Aakash Modules 03

Chapter 11
Thermal Properties of Matter

Chapter Contents
z Temperature and Heat TEMPERATURE AND HEAT
z Measurement of Temperature is a relative measure, or indication of hotness or coldness.
Temperature
The SI unit of temperature is kelvin (K), whereas degree celsius (°C) is a
z Thermal Expansion commonly used unit of temperature. Energy transfer that takes place solely
because of a temperature difference is called heat. The SI unit of heat energy
z Specific Heat Capacity transferred is expressed in joule (J). In conventional system, the unit of heat is
z Calorimetry called calorie (cal) and 1 cal = 4.186J.
z Change of State A hot body has more internal energy than another identical cold body.
z Heat Transfer MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE

z Newton’s Law of Cooling The instrument used to measure temperature called thermometer. To construct
a thermometer, we use any thermometric property of any substance which
z Black Body Spectrum
varies proportional to temperature.
z Some Important Formulae To measure the temperature we assume to fixed temperature i.e freezing point
and boiling point of water at atmospheric pressure and given them number
0 and 100 respectively.
The temperature difference between 0 and 100 divide in 100 equal parts each
part called 1 degree.
The value of degrees measured on different scales.
100°C 373 K 212°F
C K F
0°C 273 K 32°F

Celsius scal e Kelvin scale Fahrenheit scale
Measured temperature – LFP

 constant
UFP – LFP
Aakash Educational Services Limited - Regd. Office : Aakash Tower, 8, Pusa Road, New Delhi-110005 Ph. 011-47623456
108 Thermal Properties of Matter NEET
C 0 K  273 F  32 Measured temprature – LFP

  
100  0 373  273 212  32 UFP – LFP
C K  273 F  32
 
5 5 9
Example 1 : What is that temperature at which the Celsius and Fahrenheit scale give the same temperature
value?
Solution : Let that temperature be x, then
C –0 F – 32
∵ 
100 – 0 212 – 32
Now, put C = F = x
x–0 x – 32
or, 
100 – 0 180
or, x = – 40
So, at – 40°C, Fahrenheit reading is also – 40°F.
Example 2 : What is that temperature at which the Fahrenheit reading is double that of the Celsius reading?
Solution : Let the Celsius reading be x then the Fahrenheit reading will be 2x.
x–0 2 x – 32
So, 
100 – 0 212 – 32
x 2 x – 32
or, 
5 9
or, 9x = 10x – 160
or, x = 160°C
So, 2x = 320°F.
Example 3 : Suppose that on a temperature scale X, water boils at –60°X and freezes at –180.5°X. What would
a temperature of 350 K be on the X-scale?
Solution : Upper fixed point = –60 °X

Lower fixed point = –180.5 °X
Suppose 350 K = x °X, then
x  ( 180.5) 350  273.15


 60  ( 180.5) 100
x  180.5 76.85
or,   0.7685
120.5 100
or, x = (120.5) (0.7685) – 180.5 = –87.9
 350 K = –87.9°X
Aakash Educational Services Limited - Regd. Office: Aakash Tower, 8, Pusa Road, New Delhi-110005 Ph.011-47623456
NEET Thermal Properties of Matter 109
z Different Types of Thermometers
1. Mercury Thermometer : Fahrenheit was the first to choose mercury as the thermometric substance
on account of its many advantages. It doesn’t wet glass, can be easily obtained pure, remains liquid
over a fairly wide range, has a low specific heat and high conductivity, it is opaque and its expansion
is approximately uniform and regular.
The range of an ordinary mercury thermometer is limited by the fact that mercury freezes at
– 38.87°C and boils at 356°C but the upper limit can be realised to about 500°C by filling the top of
the tube with nitrogen under pressure. If instead of mercury we use Alcohol, we can measure as low
as – 111°C, and petroleum ether can measure as low as – 190°C.
2. Constant Volume Gas Thermometers : Gas thermometers are more sensitive than liquid thermometers
as expansion of gases is more than that of liquids. They are most accurate thermometers. Their
temperature range is between – 260°C to 1600°C.
The pressure and temperature are related as Pt = P0(1 + t )
Pt – P0 t –0

P100 – P0 100 – 0
Pt  P0
t  100 C
P100  P0
3. Platinum Resistance Thermometer : The platinum resistance thermometer works on the principle of
Wheatstone bridge.
Rt = R0 [1 + t]
then the resistance and temperature are related as
Rt  R0 t 0

R100  R0 100  0
Rt  R0
t  100 C
R100  R0
These thermometers can measure temperature from – 182°C to 1200°C.
4. Thermoelectric Thermometers : It is based on Seebeck effect. In this thermometer two distinct

metals are joined to form a closed circuit known as thermocouple. One junction is generally kept in ice
and the other junction is placed on the body whose temperature is to be calculated. A current flows in
the circuit given by current, I = aT + bT 2 where a, b are constants and T is temperature. Such
thermometers have several advantages. They can easily measure fast changing temperatures. Since
temperature is in the form of electric current a computer can do the recording of changing temperature
over a time interval and it can even be sent through satellites etc. from one place to other. Different parts
of our body has different temperature and it can easily make temperature diagrams of our body to be
shown on a computer. It has very wide application in engineering and medical world. The temperature
range is (–200°C to 1600°C)
5. Pyrometers : These devices are based on Stefan’s law which says radiations received is proportional
to fourth power of the absolute temperature of the body. It measures very high temperatures [pyre means
fire] say that of a furnace etc. The temperature of the sun is measured by pyro-helio-meter.
6. Vapour Pressure Thermometers : Its use is based on the well-known fact that the vapour-pressure
of a liquid varies uniquely with the temperature. The method consists simply in measuring the vapour
pressure of a certain liquid at the required temperature.
7. Magnetic Thermometers : Temperatures below 1 K are measured by ‘magnetic thermometers’ which

uses the principle of adiabatic demagnetisation. It is based on Curie-Law according to which magnetic
susceptibility of a paramagnetic salt varies inversely proportional to its absolute temperature.
Example 4 : The pressures of the gas filled in the bulb of a constant-volume gas thermometer are 66 cm and
88 cm of mercury column at 0°C and 100°C respectively. When its bulb is immersed in a liquid
placed in a vessel, its pressure is 82.5 cm of mercury column. Calculate the temperature of the
liquid.
Solution : Pressure at 0°C is P0 = 66 cm, pressure at 100°C is P100 = 88 cm. Pressure at unknown
temperature t is Pt = 82.5 cm. According to formula, the unknown temperature is
 Pt  P0 
t = 100°C ×  P  P 

 100 0 
 82.5  66 
= 100°C ×  
 88  66 
16.5
= 100°C × = 75°C
22
Example 5 : The following observations were recorded on a platinum resistance thermometer : Resistance at
melting point of ice = 3.70 ohm, resistance at boiling point of water at normal pressure = 4.71 
and resistance at t°C = 5.29 ohm. Calculate
(i) Temperature coefficient of resistance of platinum,
(ii) Value of temperature t.
Solution : (i) Temperature coefficient of resistance is given by
R100  R0 4.71  3.70

 = R  100 =
0 3.70  100
1.01
= = 2.73 × 10–3 per °C
370
(ii) For temperature t, we have
R t  R0
t = 100°C × R  R
100 0
5.29  3.70 1.59

= 100°C × = 100°C × = 157.4°C
4.71  3.70 1.01
THERMAL EXPANSION
Most of the materials expands, when their temperature increases, with few exception such as carbon.
z Thermal Expansion and Interatomic Energy
We can understand thermal expansion qualitatively on the molecular level. Consider the interatomic forces in
a solid as springs, as in figure (a). There is an analogous relationship between spring forces and interatomic
forces. Each atom vibrates about its equilibrium position. When the temperature increases, the energy and
amplitude of the vibration also increase. The interatomic spring forces are not symmetrical about the equilibrium
position, they usually behave like a spring that is easier to stretch than to compress. As a result, when the
amplitude of vibration increases, the average distance between atoms also increases. As the atoms get farther
apart, every dimension increases.
U(r)
r = distance between atoms
Average distance between atoms
r0 = average distance between atoms
r0 rav
O r
rav
E3
E2
rmin E1
So solid expands
rmax on heating
As energy increase from
E1 to E2 to E 3, average distance
Fig.: (a) A model of the forces between between atoms increases.
neighboring atoms in a solid Fig.: (b) A graph of the 'spring' potential energy U (r)
with distance ( r) between atoms.
z Thermal Expansion is of Three Types

1. Linear Expansion
Suppose a rod of some material has a length L0 at some initial temperature T0. When the temperature
changes by T, the length changes by L. Experiments show that if T is not too large (say, less than
100C° or so), then
Change in length
Coefficient of linear expansion ( ) 
Original length × temperature difference
L

L0  T
If a body has length L0 at temperature T0, then its length L at a temperature T = T0 + T is

L = L0 + L = L0 + L0T
L = L0(1 +  T)
The unit of  is K–1 or (C°)–1.
The value of  is of the order of 10–6 to 10–5 per kelvin

2. Area Expansion or Superficial Expansion
A
Coefficient of superficial expansion () 
A0  T
If a body has area A0 at temperature T0, then its area at temperature (T0 + T)
A = A0 + A0T
A = A0 (1 + T)
3. Volume Expansion
V
Coefficient of volume expansion ( ) 
V0 T
If a body has volume V0 at temperature T0, then its volume at temperature (T0 + T) is
V = V0 (1 + T)
z Relation Between Linear Expansion, Superficial expansion and Volume Expansion

(i) For isotropic solids
 = 2
 = 3
(ii) For anisotropic solids,  = x + y + z, where x, y and z represents the mean coefficients of linear
expansion along three mutually perpendicular directions.
z Apparent Expansion of Liquids
There are two coefficients of expansion in case of liquids.

(i) Coefficient of real expansion (r)
(ii) Coefficient of apparent expansion (a)
real increase in volume
r 
Original volume × rise in temperature
apparent increase in volume
a 
Original volume × rise in temperature
with a = r – s , where s is the coefficient of cubical expansion of the solid of the vessel.
z Expansion of Cavity
If there is a hole in a plate (or cavity inside a body), the area of hole (or volume of cavity) will increase when body
expands on heating.
Two spheres, one being solid and the other hollow, are made of same material having same radius at a particular
temperature. If they are heated to the same temperature, their radius will again be same.
But if they are given the same amount of heat, the rise in temperature of the hollow sphere will be more (due
to its less mass) and hence its radius will become greater than that of the solid sphere.
z Change of Density with Temperature
Consider a body (solid) of mass m. Let V1 and 1 be its volume and density respectively at temperature
t1 and V2 and 2 are the corresponding values at temperature t2.
where T = t2 – t1
1
2 =
1  T 
 1 1  T 
–1
(as  is small)
2 = 1(1 – T)
Example 6 : A surveyor uses a steel measuring tape that is exactly 50.000 m long at a temperature of 20°C.
What is its length on a hot summer day when the temperature is 35°C? (steel = 1.2 × 10–5 K–1)
Solution : The temperature change is T = T – T0 = 15C°, so from equation (ii) the change in length L
and final length L = L0 + L are
L = L0T = (1.2 × 10–5 K–1) (50 m) (15 K) = 9.0 × 10–3 m = 9.0 mm
L = L0 + L = 50.000 m + 0.009 m = 50.009 m
Thus, the length at 35°C is 50.009 m.
This example shows that metals expand very little under moderate temperature changes. Even a
metal baking pan in a 200°C oven is only slightly larger than it is at room temperature.
Example 7 : A glass flask with volume 200 cm3 is filled to the brim with mercury at 20°C. How much mercury
overflows when the temperature of the system is raised to 100°C? The coefficient of linear
expansion of the glass is 0.40 × 10–5 K–1. Cubical expansion of mercury = 18 × 10–5 K–1.
Solution : The coefficient of volume expansion for the glass is glass = 3glass = 1.2 × 10–5 K–1
The increase in volume of the glass flask is
Vglass = glassV0T
= (1.2 × 10–5 K–1) (200 cm3) (100°C – 20°C)
= 0.19 cm3
The increase in volume of the mercury is
Vmercury = mercury V0.T
= Vmercury = mercury V0T
= (18 × 10–5 K–1) (200 cm3) (100°C – 20°C) = 2.9 cm3
The volume of mercury that overflow is
Vmercury – Vglass = 2.7 cm3
Example 8 : A pendulum clock consists of a light iron rod connected to a small, heavy bob. If it is designed
to keep correct time at 20°C, how fast or slow will it go in 24 hours at 40°C? Coefficient of linear
expansion of iron = 1.2 × 10–5/°C.
l
Solution : T = 2
g
T 1 l 1 1
        (1.2  10 5 )  (20 )
T 2 l 2 2
= 1.2 × 10–4
∵ Time period increases
 Clock goes slow
T
Hence the time lost in 24 hours = 24 hours ×
T
= (24 × 3600) × 1.2 × 10–4
= 10.4 s
EXERCISE
1. A constant volume gas thermometer shows pressure reading of 50 cm and 90 cm of mercury at 0°C and 100°C
respectively. When the pressure reading is 60 cm of mercury, the temperature is
(1) 25°C (2) 40°C
(3) 15°C (4) 12.5°C

2. On centigrade scale the temperature of a body increases by 30 degrees. The increase in temperature on
Fahrenheit scale is
(1) 50° (2) 40°
(3) 30° (4) 54°
3. A bar of iron is 10 cm at 20°C. At 19°C it will be (Fe = 11 × 10–6/°C)
(1) 11 × 10–6 cm longer (2) 11 × 10–6 cm shorter
(3) 11 × 10–5 cm shorter (4) 11 × 10–5 cm longer
4. Coefficient of volume expansion of mercury is 0.18 × 10–3/°C. If the density of mercury at 0°C is 13.6 g/cc,
then its density at 200°C is
(1) 13.11 g/cc (2) 52.11 g/cc
(3) 16.11 g/cc (4) 26.11 g/cc
5. A metre rod of silver at 0°C is heated to 100°C. It’s length is increased by 0.19 cm. Coefficient of volume
expansion of the silver rod is
(1) 5.7 × 10–5 /°C (2) 0.63 × 10–5 /°C
(3) 1.9 × 10–5 /°C (4) 16.1 × 10–5/°C
6. A solid ball of metal has a concentric spherical cavity within it. If the ball is heated, the volume of the cavity
will
(1) Increase (2) Decrease
(3) Remain same (4) All of these
7. Two rods of different materials having coefficient of thermal expansion 1 and 2 and Young’s modulus Y1 and
Y2 respectively are fixed between two rigid massive walls. The rods are heated such that these undergo same
increase in temperature. There is no bending of the rods. If 1: 2 = 2 : 3, the thermal stress developed in
the two rods are equal, provided Y1 : Y2 is
(1) 2:3 (2) 1:1
(3) 3:2 (4) 4:9
8. A glass flask of volume 200 cm3 is just filled with mercury at 20°C. The amount of mercury that will overflow
when the temperature of the system is raised to 100°C is (glass = 1.2 × 10–5/C°, mercury = 1.8 × 10–4 /C°)
(1) 2.15 cm3 (2) 2.69 cm3
(3) 2.52 cm3 (4) 2.25 cm3
9. Solids expand on heating because
(1) Kinetic energy of atom increases
(2) Potential energy of atom increases
(3) Total energy of atom increases
(4) The potential energy curve is asymmetric about the equilibrium distance between neighbouring atoms
SPECIFIC HEAT CAPACITY
The amount of heat, required to raise the temperature of unit mass, of the substance by 1°C, called specific
heat capacity or specific heat
dQ
Specific heat c 
mdT
dQ = mcdT

Q  mcdT
Value of c depends on material of body and temperature range.
cal
Specific heat of water  1 from 14.5°C to 15.5°C
gK
J
In SI system specific heat of water  4200
kg K
z Molar specific heat or molar heat capacity : Molar specific heat is defined as the amount of heat required
to raise the temperature of one mole of a substance through 1°C.
1 Q 
n  T 
Molar heat capacity =
The SI unit of C is J/mol K.

z Heat capacity or Thermal capacity of a body : Heat capacity of a body is defined as the amount of heat
required to raise the temperature of body by one degree. It is denoted by C
Heat capacity C = mc
The SI unit of heat capacity is J/K.
z Water Equivalent : Water equivalent of a body is the quantity of water whose temperature would be raised
through 1°C (or 1K) by the same amount of heat as required to raise the temperature of the body through 1°C
(or 1 K).
If w be the water equivalent of a body of mass m and specific heat capacity C, then
w × Cw × 1 = m × C × 1
mC
or, w 
Cw
In cgs system, Cw = 1 cal g–1°C–1, so w = mC
mC
In SI system, Cw = 4200 J kg–1 k–1, so w 
4200
w is measured in g in cgs units and in kg in SI units.
z Latent Heat : It is the amount of heat required to change the state of a unit mass of a substance without
change in its temperature, and pressure.
Q = mL
where L is the latent heat. Its SI unit is J/kg.
It depends on
(i) Pressure, Its value is usually quoted at standard atmospheric pressure, with increase in pressure latent
heat of vaporisation will increase, and latent heat of fusion will decrease for water.
(ii) Nature of the phase change
(iii) Properties of the substance.
The latent heat of fusion (Lf) is the heat gained when the phase change is from a solid to a liquid.
For water at 1 atm, its value is 79.7 cal/g = 3.33 × 105 J/kg. It is called latent heat of ice.
The latent heat of vaporisation (Lv) corresponds to liquid to vapour phase change. Its value for water at
1 atm is 540 cal/g = 226 × 105 J/kg. It is also called the latent heat of steam.
Note : (1) Specific heat of water is
sw  4186 J kg1K 1  1 calg1 (C)1 .

(2) Specific heat capacity of ice (–10°C) is about 2220 J/kg K.
(3) The molar heat capacities for most elemental solids are about 25 J/mol K. This is known
as the rule of Dulong and Petit (for its discoverers). This means the heat required for a
given temperature increase depends only on how many atoms the sample contains and not
on the mass of an individual atom.
(4) The specific heat at extremely low temperatures varies as the cube of the absolute
temperature. This is called Debye’s law (CT3).
(5) Hydrogen has the largest specific heat capacity among all solids, liquids and gases.
CALORIMETRY
As we know that heat is a form of energy and as such is a measurable quantity. Calorimetry deals with the
measurement of heat. The vessel which is largely used in such a measurement is called a calorimeter.
Principle of Calorimetry : When two bodies at different temperatures are allowed to share heat, they attain
a common temperature. If it is assumed that no heat is received from or given to any body from outside the
system and if there is no chemical action involved in the process of sharing, then
Heat gained by cold body = Heat lost by hot body
CHANGE OF STATE
Phase change and latent heat
Let us consider a container filled with 1 kg of ice at temperature (– 25°C).
Figure is a graph which shows the changes in the state of ice with time as more and more heat is added to it.
e
Temperature
(°C) Steam
water boils 3
100 c [3 > 1 >  2 ]
Q4 d
50 Q3
water
a Q2 b 2
O
ice
Q1
melt
1
– 25
0 t1 t2 t3 time (minute)
Fig.: Graph of temperature vs time for a specimen

of water initially in the solid phase (ice)
If sufficient amount of heat Q is added, then this heat is used up in following steps.
(i) First the temperature of whole ice will raise to 0°C i.e melting point of ice, by using heat
Q1 = mci T = 1 × 0.5 × 25 = 12.5 kcal
(ii) On supplying extra heat temperature remains at 0°C, and ice start to melt, by using heat
Q2 = mLf = 1 × 80 = 80 kcal
(iii) When whole ice turned into water, on supplying extra heat the temperature rises once again up to 100°C
(boiling point of water) by using heat
Q3 = mcwT = 1 × 1 × 100 = 100 kcal
(iv) When temperature 100°C is reached, the temperature again stays constant, and by using heat of
vaporisation whole water convert into vapours at 100°C.
Q4 = mLv = 1 × 540 = 540 kcal
(v) When all the water convert into steam, the temperature again increases.
Temperature Phase Temperature Phase
change Ice change Water change Water change Steam
lce
–25°C at at at at
Q1 = mci T 0°C Q2 = mLf 0°C Q3 = mcw T 100°C Q4 = mLv 100°C
Example 9 : 5 g ice at 0°C is mixed with 1 g steam at 100°C. Find the final temperature and composition of
the mixture.
Solution : Heat required to melt ice at 0°C = Q1 = mi Lf = 5 g × 80 cal/g = 400 cal
Heat required to raise the temperature of water from 0 to 100°C = Q2 = miswt
1 cal
= 5g × × 100°C = 500 cal.
g°C
Maximum heat ice can absorb for steam to reach boiling point is = Q1 + Q2 = 900 cal
Heat rejected by steam on complete condensation = Q3 = msLv = 1 g × 540 cal/g = 540 cal
This heat rejected can melt the ice completely but cannot raise the temperature of water from
0 to 100°C as there is a deficiency of heat = Q1 + Q2 – Q3 = (900 – 540)cal = 360 cal
Heat deficient
 Resulting temperature = 100°C –
Thermal capacity of system i.e., 6 g water
360 cal
= 100°C –
6 g  1 cal/g °C
360C
= 100°C –
6
= 100°C – 60°C = 40°C
Example 10 : 100 g ice at 0°C is mixed with 10 g steam at 100°C. Find the final temperature and composition.
Solution : Heat required to melt ice at 0°C = Q1 = miLf = 100 × 80 cal/g = 8000 cal
Heat required to raise the temperature of water from 0°C to 100°C = Q2 = miswt
= 100 g × 1 calg°C × 100°C = 10,000 cal
Maximum heat ice can absorb from steam to reach boiling point = Q1 + Q2 = 18000 cal
Heat rejected by steam on complete condensation
Q3 = msLv = 10 g × 540 cal/g = 5400 cal
Heat rejected by water at 100°C cooled to 0°C
Q4 = msswt = 10 g × 1 cal/g°C × 100 = 1000 cal

Maximum heat can be supplied to steam to ice at 0°C = Q3 + Q4 = (5400 + 1000)cal = 6400 cal
To melt the ice 8000 cal heat is required, but maximum heat supplied by steam 6400 cal is in
sufficient to melt the ice. So resulting temperature of mixture is = 0°C.
Heat supplied to steam

Amount of ice melted =
Lf
6400 cal
= = 80 g
80 cal/g
 Ice remains in the mixture = 100 g – 80 g = 20 g
Water present in the mixture = 10 g + 80 g = 90 g
Example 11 : 30 g ice at 0°C is mixed with 25 g steam at 100°C. Find the final temperature and composition.
Solution : Heat required to melt ice at 0°C = Q1 = miLf = 30 g × 80 cal/g = 2400 cal
Heat required to raise the temperature of water at 0°C to 100°C
Q2 = miswt
= 30 g × 1 cal/g°C × 100°C = 3000 cal
Maximum heat ice can absorb from steam to reach 100°C = Q3 = msLv = 25 g × 540 cal/g
= 13500 cal
Total steam cannot be condensed as ice can take a maximum of 5400 cal out of 13500 cal
 Resulting temperature of mixture = 100°C
Maximum heat absorbed by ice 5400 cal

Steam condensed =  = 10 g
Lv 540 cal/g
Steam present in the mixture = 25 g – 10 g = 15 g
Water present in the mixture = 30 g + 10 g = 40 g
Example 12 : Liquids A and B are at 30°C and 20°C. When mixed in equal masses, the temperature of the
mixture is found to be 26°C. Their specific heats are in the ratio of
(1) 3:2
(2) 1:1
(3) 2:3
(4) 4:3
Solution : Let the specific heat of A and B be SA and SB. Now heat lost by A in cooling from 30°C to 26°C
will be same as liquid B warming up from 20°C to 26°C. Since the masses are same
 m.SA (30°C – 26°C) = m.SB(26°C – 20°C)
or 4SA = 6SB
SA 6 3
or S  4  2
B
z Pressure Temperature (P-T ) Diagram and Triple Point
A graph between pressure (P) and temperature (T) of a substance is called P-T diagram. This diagram is also
called phase diagram since all the three phases are separated from each other by three lines.
(i) The boiling point of a liquid also depends upon pressure. In figure, curve OC shows how the boiling point
of water varies with pressure (behaviour typical of other liquid as well).
P (atm)
B
Critical point
218 C OA : Sublimation curve
Solid Liquid OB : Fusion curve
1
OC : Vaporisation curve
0.006 Vapour
O Triple
point
T (°C)
A 0 0.01 100 374.14
Fig.: Phase diagram for water

A curve which shows the variation of boiling point with pressure is called the vaporisation curve. In case
of water, this curve (i.e., OC) is also called steam line. The points on this curve represents the states
in which liquid and vapour phases coexist.
The upper limit (C) of this curve occurs at a temperature of 374.14°C and a pressure of 218 atm and is
known as the critical point. A substance cannot exist in the liquid state at a temperature above that of
its critical point, regardless of how great the pressure may be.
(ii) The melting point of a solid also depends upon pressure (although to a smaller extent than the boiling
point). A curve which shows the variation of melting point with pressure is called the fusion curve.
In case of water, this curve is also called the ice line. In figure, the curve OB represents the fusion curve
of water. It is to be noted that this curve leans slightly to the left. This implies that as the pressure is
increased, the melting point is lowered.
(iii) The fusion and the vaporisation curves of water intersect at a temperature of 0.01°C and at a pressure
of 0.006 atm as shown in Figure. Along the fusion curve, both ice and water can simultaneously exist.
Hence, under conditions corresponding to those of the intersection of the two curves, the solid, liquid and
gas can all exist together. This intersection is accordingly called the triple point (O) of water.
(iv) At pressure below that of its triple point, no substance can exist as a liquid. The dividing line on a
pressure-temperature graph between the solid and the vapour state is called the sublimation curve since
it represents the conditions required for a solid to vaporise directly or a vapour to solidify directly.
Triple point of a substance is that point on the pressure temperature (P-T) diagram, whose coordinates
give the particular temperature and pressure at which the solid, liquid and vapour phases of the substance
coexist in equilibrium without any change in their proportions.
Summary of Shortcuts
(i) When ice is dominant i.e. the ratio of ice at 0°C and steam at 100°C is 8 : 1 or more, entire steam
will be cooled upto 0°C water and final temperature will be 0°C. Excess of 8 : 1 ratio, ice will be
left and we’ll have ice water mixture.
(ii) When steam is dominant i.e. the steam to ice ratio is 1 : 3 or more; ice will be heated upto 100°C
water. When steam will be more than 1 : 3 ratio, excess steam will be left and we’ll have water
steam mixture at 100°C.
(iii) When the ice to steam ratio is in between 8 : 1 and 3 : 1, make conventional calculation and we’ll
have all water somewhere between 0°C to 100°C.
EXERCISE
10. 300 gm of water at 25°C is added to 100 gm of ice at 0°C. The final temperature of the mixture is
5 5
(1) – C (2) – C
3 2
(3) – 5°C (4) 0°C
11. Two spheres made of same substance have diameters in the ratio 1 : 2. Their thermal capacities are in the
ratio of
(1) 1:2 (2) 1:8
(3) 1:4 (4) 2:1
12. 80 gm of water at 30°C is poured on a large block of ice at 0°C. The mass of ice that melts is
(1) 30 gm (2) 80 gm
(3) 1600 gm (4) 150 gm
13. Work done in converting 1g of ice at –10°C into steam at 100°C is
(1) 3.04 kJ (2) 6.05 kJ
(3) 0.721 kJ (4) 0.616 kJ
14. 2 gm of steam condenses when passed through 40 gm of water initially at 25°C. The condensation of steam
raises the temperature of water to 54.3°C. What is the latent heat of steam?
(1) 540 cal/g (2) 536 cal/g
(3) 270 cal/g (4) 480 cal/g
15. The temperature of 100 gm of water is to be raised from 24°C to 90°C by adding steam to it. The mass of
the steam required for this purpose is
(1) 20 g (2) 15 g
(3) 12 g (4) 18 g
16. 10 gm of ice at –20°C is kept into a calorimeter containing 10 gm of water at 10°C. The specific heat of water
is twice that of ice. When equilibrium is reached, the calorimeter will contain
(1) 20 gm of water (2) 20 gm of ice
(3) 10 gm ice and 10 gm of water (4) 5 gm ice and 15 gm water
17. Water falls from a height 500 m. What is the rise in temperature of water at bottom if whole energy remains
in the water ?
(1) 0.96°C (2) 1.02°C
(3) 1.16°C (4) 0.23°C
18. Latent heat of ice is 80 cal/gm. A man melts 60 gm of ice by chewing in 1 minute. His power is
(1) 4800 W (2) 336 W
(3) 1.33 W (4) 0.75 W
HEAT TRANSFER
The three mechanisms of heat transfer are conduction, convection and radiation. Conduction occurs within a
body or between two bodies in contact. Convection depends on motion of mass from one region of space to
another. Radiation is heat transfer by electromagnetic radiation, such as sunshine, with no need for matter to
be present in the space between bodies.
z Conduction : The phenomena of heat transfer in which heat flows from one place to other without actual transfer
of atoms called conduction.
Most of the metals also use another, more effective mechanism to conduct heat. Within the metal, some
electrons can leave their parent atoms and wander through the crystal lattice. These “free” electrons can rapidly
carry energy from the hotter to the cooler regions of the metals, so metals are generally good conductors of heat.
Consider a rod of length L, area of cross-section A. The temperature of two ends are T1 and T2 (T1 > T2).
T1 T ( T – dT ) T2
A
x dx x= L
x=0
Consider a cross-section, at co-ordinate x its temperature is T, and at (x + dx), temperature is (T - dT)
dT
Temperature gradient = 
dx
dQ dT
In variable state rate of heat flow or heat current H   KA
dt dx
The negative sign, shows that heat always flows, in the direction of decreasing temperature
Q KA(T1  T2 )
In steady state rate of heat flow 
t L
KA(T1  T2 )t
Total heat flow in time t, Q 
L
W
Where K is coefficient of thermal conductivity, Sl unit of K is
mK
z Comparison between electrical conduction and heat conduction
Electricity Heat
(1) In metals charge carriers are free electrons. (1) In metals heat carriers are free electrons.
dq dQ
(2) Electric current i  (2) Heat current iH 
dt dt
(3) Electric potential (V) (3) Temperature (T)
(4) Charge flows due to potential difference (4) Heat flows due to temperature difference
V T
(5) Electrical resistance R  (5) Heat resistance RH 
i iH
L dQ KA(T1  T2 )
R iH  
A dt L
L T1  T2 L
R 
A iH KA
L
RH 
KA
(6) Combination of resistance (6) Combination of heat resistance

Current is same Heat current will be same
(i) Series (i) Series
Potential will divide Temperature will divide
i R1 i R2 R3 iH R1 R2 R3
V1 V2 iH
Effective resistance R = R1 + R2 + .... Effective heat resistacne RH = R1 + R2 + ....

Effective conductivity in series
d1  d 2  d3  ....
K
d1 d 2 d3
   ....
k1 k2 k3
Current will divide Heat current will divide

(ii) Parallel (ii) Parallel
Potential difference
will be same
1 1 1
Effective resistance Effective heat resistance R  R  R  ....
H 1 2
1 1 1
   .... Effective thermal conductivity in parallel
R R1 R2
K1A1  K 2 A2  ....
K eff 
A1  A2  ....
Kirchhoff’s laws and principle of wheat stone bridge also valid in heat conduction.
Wiedmann - Franz Law

The ratio of thermal and electrical conductivities (K & ) at a particular temperature (T K) is same for all metals
(except mica)
K
i.e.,  constant
T
Hence, a good electrical conductor is also a good thermal conductor. But good thermal conductors
need not be good electrical conductors e.g., sand, mica.
Example 13 : A steel bar 10.0 cm long is welded end to end to a copper bar 20.0 cm long. Both bars are
insulated perfectly on their sides. Each bar has a square cross-section, 2.00 cm on a side. The
free end of the steel bar is maintained at 100°C by placing it in contact with steam, and the free
end of the copper bar is maintained at 0°C by placing it in contact with ice. Find the temperature
at the junction of the two bars and the total rate of heat flow.
Steel T Copper
Solution : T1 = 100°C 2.00 cm T2 = 0°C
10.0 cm 20.0 cm
In the steady state, the two heat currents are equal. We have
K steel A 100C – T  K copper A T – 0C 

Hsteel = and Hcopper 
Lsteel Lcopper
The areas A are equal and may be cancelled out.
Substituting Lsteel = 0.100 m, Lcopper = 0.200 m, and numerical values of K from the previous table,
we find
 50.2 W/m.K  100C – T    385 W/m.K  T – 0C

0.100 m 0.200 m
Solving for T, we obtain T = 20.7°C
We can find the total heat current by substituting this value for T,
 50.2 W/m.K   0.0200 m2  100C – 20.7C 

Hsteel =
0.100 m
Hsteel = 15.9 W
∵ Hsteel = Hcopper
 Hcopper = 15.9 W
Example 14 : Three identical rods have been joined at a junction to make it a Y shape structure. If two free ends
are maintained at 60°C and the third end is at 0°C, then what is the junction temperature ?
60°C

0°C
60°C
Solution :
60°C
H2
H
0°C

H1
60°C
Rods are in steady state
So, H = H1 + H2
KA(  0) KA(60  ) (60  )

   KA
L L L
  = 60 –  + 60 – 
 3 = 120
  = 40°C
Example 15 : Three rods of same cross section but different length and conductivity are joined in series. If the
temperature of the two extreme ends are T1 and T2 (T1 > T2) find the rate of heat transfer H.
T1 T2
k1 k2 k3
L1 L2 L3
L1 L L
Solution : Total thermal resistance R = R1 + R2 + R3 =  2  3
k1A k2 A k3 A
T1 – T2
now, H 
R

T1 – T2 
H
L1 L L
 2  3
k1A k 2 A k3 A
EXERCISE
19. Three identical thermal conductors are connected as shown in figure. Consider no heat lost due to radiation,
the temperature of the junction is
60°C
20°C
70°C
(1) 60°C (2) 20°C
(3) 50°C (4) 10°C

20. Consider a compound slab consisting of two different materials having equal thickness and thermal
conductivities K and 2K in series. The equivalent conductivity of the slab is
2
(1) K (2) 2K
3
4
(3) 3K (4)  3 K
 
21. The outer faces of a rectangular slab made of equal thickness of iron and brass are maintained at 100°C and
0°C respectively. The temperature at the interface is
(Thermal conductivity of iron and brass are 0.2 and 0.3 respectively.)
(1) 100°C (2) 40°C
(3) 50°C (4) 70°C
22. Surface of the lake is at 2°C. The temperature of the bottom of the lake is
(1) 2°C (2) 3°C
(3) 4°C (4) 1°C

23. A body of length 1 m having cross-sectional area 0.75 m2 has heat flow through it at the rate of 6000 J/s.
The difference between two ends of conductor if K = 200 J m–1K–1 is
(1) 20°C (2) 40°C
(3) 80°C (4) 100°C
24. A slab consists of two parallel layers of two different materials of same thickness having thermal conductivities
K1 and K2. The equivalent conductivity of the combination is
K1  K2
(1) K1 + K2 (2)
2
2K1 K2 K1  K 2
(3) (4)
K1  K2 2K1K 2
25. The layers of atmosphere are heated through

(1) Convection (2) Conduction
(3) Radiation (4) Both (1) & (3)
26. The temperature gradient in a rod of 0.5 m long is 80ºC/m. If the temperature of hotter end of the rod is 30°C,
then the temperature of the colder end is
(1) 40°C (2) – 10°C
(3) 10°C (4) 0°C
27. The ratio of thermal conductivity of two rods of different material is 5 : 4. The two rods of same area of cross-
section and same thermal resistance will have the length in the ratio
(1) 4:5 (2) 9:1
(3) 1:9 (4) 5:4
28. Five rods of same dimensions are arranged as shown in the figure. They have thermal conductivities K1, K2, K3,
K4 and K5. When points A and C are maintained at different temperature, no heat flows through the central rod if
B
K4 K3
A C
K5
K2 K1
D
(1) K1 = K4 and K2 = K3 (2) K1K4 = K2K3
K1 K2
(3) K1K2 = K3K4 (4) 
K4 K3
Convection
Convection is the transfer of heat by mass motion of a fluid from one region of space to another. There are
two types of convection.
(i) Forced convection : If the fluid is circulated by an external agent like a blower or pump, the convection
process is known as forced convection. The most important mechanism for heat transfer within human
body is forced convection of blood, with the heart serving as the pump.
(ii) Natural convection or free convection : If the flow is caused by difference in density due to thermal
expansion, such as hot air rising, the process is called natural convection or free convection. Free
convection in the atmosphere plays an important role in determining the daily weather, and convection
in the oceans is an important global heat transfer mechanism.
In convection heat transfer is very complex process, and there is no simple equation to describe it. Here are
a few experimental facts:
(i) The heat current due to convection is directly proportional to the surface area. This is the reason for the
large surface areas of radiators and cooling fans.
(ii) The viscosity of fluids slows natural convection near a stationary surface, giving a surface film that on a
vertical surface typically has about the same insulating value as 1.3 cm of plywood (R value = 0.7). Forced
convection decreases the thickness of this film, increasing the rate of heat transfer. This is the reason
for the “wind chill factor”, you get cold faster in a cold wind than in still air with the same temperature.
5
(iii) The heat current due to convection is found to be approximately proportional to the power of the
4
temperature difference between the surface and the main body of fluid.
z Radiation
Radiation is the transfer of heat by electromagnetic waves such as visible light, infrared, and ultraviolet rays.
This heat transfer would occur even if there were nothing but vacuum between you and the source of heat.
Everybody, even at ordinary temperatures, emits energy in the form of electromagnetic radiation. At ordinary
temperature, say 20°C, nearly all the energy is carried by infrared radiation with wavelengths much longer than
those of visible light. As the temperature rises, the wavelength shift to shorter values. At 3000°C, the temperature
of an incandescent lamp filament, the radiation contain enough visible light that the body appears “white-hot”.
Heat radiations have all the properties of visible light except frequency and wavelength. Heat radiations follows
all the laws of visible light like, reflection, refraction, interference etc.
z Good absorbers are bad reflectors

Let Q be the radiant energy incident on the surface AB as shown in Figure
Q Q1
Q  incident energy
Q1  reflected energy
A Q2 B Q2  absorbed energy
Q3  transmitted energy
Q3
If out of this Q incident energy, Q1 is reflected, Q2 is absorbed and Q3 is transmitted, then

Q1
r (reflectance of the surface)
Q
Q2
a (absorptance of the surface)
Q
Q3
t (transmittance of the surface)
Q
None of these quantities (r, a and t) has a unit as these are pure ratios.
Thus, r + a + t = 1
In case, the surface does not transmit radiation, t = 0 and as r + a = 1
obviously, if a is more, r is less or vice-versa. Thus, good absorbers are bad reflectors and bad absorbers are
good reflectors. But good absorbers are good emitter and vice versa.
z Blackbody
A perfect blackbody is one which absorbs radiation of all wavelengths incident on it. Its absorptance is unity
as it neither reflects nor transmits any radiations.
A blackbody does not mean that its colour is black, although a black-coloured body may come close to being
a blackbody. Examples of black bodies, Fery’s black body, the sun.
z Fery’s blackbody
The radiation inside an enclosure whose inner walls are maintained at a constant temperature has the same
properties as the black body radiation.
Hole behaves like

black body
Conical
projection
Lamp black
coating
Most of the energy entering through hole is absorbed (  99%).
z Stefan’s Law
From the experimental study of rate of emission of radiations by a hot body, Stefan in 1879, proposed a law
which after him is called Stefan’s law. Boltzmann gave a theoretical proof of this law by applying the laws
of thermodynamics to the blackbody radiations. This law is, therefore, also called Stefan-Boltzmann Law.
Now, as per Stefan’s Law the radiant energy emitted by a perfectly black body per unit area per second is
directly proportional to the fourth power of its absolute temperature.
E  T4
 E = T 4
 watt 
Where E = heat radiation energy per unit time per unit area  2  = emissive power
m 
T = absolute temperature [K]
 = Stefan-Boltzmann’s constant and  = 5.67×10–8 Wm–2K–4
Rate of emission from the body
H = EA = AT 4 [A = outer surface area]
Remember : Whether the radiating body is hollow or solid it is the outer surface area only which comes
into the formula H  AT 4
For non-black bodies : The heat radiated happens to be less and for these bodies we write the equation
H  eAT 4 where, e is known as ‘emissivity’ or ‘relative emittance’ and has value 0 < e < 1 depending on
the nature of the surface.
So, emissivity e for a body is defined as
Emissive power of a body at absolute temperatureT
e=
Emissive power of black body at the same absolute temperature T
For blackbody the e = 1 Any
Body Surroundings
Let the surroundings be at temperature T0 and let a body be at temperature T0
temperature T
at temperature. T (T > T 0 ). The body emits, as well as
receives energy from surrounding. Then the net heat exchange
between the body and the surrounding per unit time will be
H = eA T – T0  .
4 4
NEWTON’S LAW OF COOLING

The rate of loss of heat of a body is directly proportional to the excess of temperature (T – T0) of the body
with respect to surroundings.
Rate of loss of heat.
dQ
  (T  T0 ) (T0 = Temperature of surroundings)
dt
dQ
  k (T  T0 ) (i) Where ( k  4T03 Ae )
dt
dT
– mc  k (T  T0 )
dt
dT k
Rate of cooling,   T  T0  (ii)
dt mc
dT k
 dt
T  T0 mc
dT k
T T 0

mcdt
k
ln(T  T0 )  Kt  c (iii) Where K  and c = constant of integration
mc
(i) For Newton’s law of cooling graph between ln (T - T0) and time t is a straight line
ln(T – T 0)
(t )
time
(ii) Newton’s law of cooling is a special case of Stefan-Boltzmann’s law applicable for small temperature
difference.
(iii) Newton’s law of cooling can also be used in form
 dT  Ti  Tf
   K Tav  T0 , Where Tav 
 dt  2
Example 16 : A body cools in 7 min from 60°C to 40°C. What will be its temperature after the next 7 minutes?
The temperature of the surroundings is 10°C.
Solution : In the First case,
 T – T0 
T1 = 60°C, T2 = 40°C, T0 = 10°C, t = 7 min from ln  1  Kt ,
 T2 – T0 
we get,
 60 – 10 
ln    7K
 40 – 10 
5
ln = 7K ...(i)
3
In the Second case,
if T is the temperature after next 7 min, T1 = 40°C, T2 = T, T0 = 10°C, t = 7 min
ln
 40 – 10
T – 10 = 7K
30
ln = 7K ...(ii)
T – 10
From equations (i) & (ii),
5 30
ln = ln
3 T – 10
5 30

3 T – 10
T = 28°C
BLACK BODY SPECTRUM

If a black body, heated to different temperatures and a graph is drawn between wavelength and intensity corresponding
to those wavelengths, then it is of following shapes. From graphs following conclusion can be drawn.
e
T3 > T2 > T 1
T3
T2
T1
m m m

3 2 1
(i) At a certain temperature as wavelength increases, intensity corresponding to those wavelength also increase,
achieves a maximum value and again start to decrease. It means at a given temperature, spectral emissive
power is maximum for a particular wavelength. Spectrum of black body is continuous spectrum.
(ii) As temperature increases, wavelength corresponding to maximum intensity, shift towards lower wavelength.
Wavelength corresponding to maximum intensity is inversely proportional to absolute temperature.
1
m 
T
 mT  b (This is Wein’s displacement law)
b = Wein’s constant = 2.89 × 10–3 m K.

(iii) As temperature increases, area under the graph also increases, the area under the graph, gives the total
radiated average power per unit surface area and is found proportional to forth power of absolute temperature.
Hence Stefan's Law proved.
(iv) The maximum intensity corresponding to any wavelength is proportional to fifth power of absolute temperature
(e )m  T 5 This is Wein’s energy law
z Solar Constant and the Temperature of the Sun

The amount of radiant energy received by the Earth per unit area per unit time from the Sun in the absence
of atmosphere when placed at right angles to the incident radiation at a distance equal to the mean distance
of the Earth from the Sun, is called solar constant (S). Its measured value is approximately 1360 Wm–2.
The radiant energy emitted per second by the Sun is
H = (4R2)T 4
where R is the radius of the Sun.
If the mean distance of the Earth from the Sun is r, then the radiant power received per unit area is
2
H 4R 2T 4  R 
Solar constant (S) = 2 =    T 4 R = Radius of sun.
4r 4r 2 r
R
Here = mean angle subtended by the solar radius at the Earth = 4.65 × 10–3 rad.
r
2
R
Temperature of the Sun : From S    T 4 ,
r 
1/4
 r 2S 
T  2 
 R  
EXERCISE
29. In heat transfer, which method is based on gravitation
(1) Natural convection (2) Conduction
(3) Radiation (4) All of these

30. In which process, the rate of transfer of heat is maximum?
(1) Conduction (2) Convection
(3) Radiation (4) In all these, heat is transferred with the same velocity
31. Good absorbers of heat are
(1) Poor emitters (2) Non-emitters
(3) Good emitters (4) Highly polished

32. A body, which emits radiations of all possible wavelengths, is known as
(1) Good conductor (2) Partial radiator
(3) Absorber of photons (4) Perfectly black body
33. A hot and a cold body are kept in vacuum separated from each other. Which of the following causes decrease
in temperature of the hot body?
(1) Radiation (2) Convection
(3) Conduction (4) Temperature remains same
34. A liquid cools down from 70°C to 60°C in 5 minutes. The time taken to cool it from 60°C to 50°C will be
(1) 5 minutes
(2) Lesser than 5 minutes
(3) Greater than 5 minutes
(4) Lesser or greater than 5 minutes depending upon the density of the liquid
35. If a metallic sphere gets cooled from 62°C to 50°C in 10 minutes and in the next 10 minutes gets cooled to
42°C, then the temperature of the surroundings is
(1) 30°C (2) 36°C
(3) 26°C (4) 20°C

36. Newton’s law of cooling is used in laboratory for the determination of the
(1) Specific heat of the gases (2) The latent heat of gases
(3) Specific heat of liquids (4) Latent heat of liquids

37. It takes 10 minutes to cool a liquid from 61°C to 59°C. If room temperature is 30°C then time taken in cooling
from 51°C to 49°C is
(1) 10 min (2) 11 min
(3) 13 min (4) 15 min
38. A block of metal is heated to a temperature much higher than the room temperature and allowed to cool in a
room free from air currents. Which of the following curves correctly represents the cooling? (T : Temperature
of block)
T T
(1) (2)
time time
T T
(3) (4)
time time
SOME IMPORTANT FORMULAE
1. Bimetallic Strip
A bimetallic strip consists of two strips of equal length but of different metals, riveted together keeping one
over the other.
Fe
Fe
Cu
Cu
1
When such a bimetallic strip is heated, it bends with metal of greater  on outer side, i.e., convex side.
This bimetallic strip is specially used in thermostat or auto-cut in electric heating circuits. It has also been
used as thermometer by calibrating its bending.
2. Expansion in Metallic Scales

If a scale say of steel gives correct reading at temperature 0 then at temperature  (> 0) due to linear
expansion of scale reading will be lesser than true value. Also, if the measured object (say copper) also
expands on heating then
1  s   – 0  
True value = Scale reading
1  Cu   – 0  
3. Effect of Linear Expansion on Pendulum Clocks

Suppose a pendulum clock gives proper time at temperature  and length of its pendulum at this temperature
is L. If temperature is increased to , then due to linear expansion, length of pendulum and hence its time
period will increase. Let L ang T be its length and time period at temperature .
Let t be change in time of clock in time interval t
1
So, t =  t
2
1
(a) Hence, time lost by the clock in a day (86,400 s) =   86,400   43200 s
2
(b) Clock will gain time, i.e., clock will become fast if  < .
(c) The gain or loss in time is independent of time period T and depends on the time interval t.
4. Formation of Ice on The Surface of Ponds or Lakes. Air (–°C)
– °C = temperature of the atmosphere
x ice
 = density of ice
L = Latent heat of fusion of ice
K = Thermal conductivity of ice dx
L
or, t ( x22  x12 ) x1 = Initial thickness water (0°C)
2K 
x2 = Final thickness
5. Effect on Buoyancy
The thrust on V volume of a body in a liquid of density  is given by B = Vg. Now with rise in temperature by
 °C, due to expansion, volume of body will increase while density of liquid will decrease according to the
relations.
V  = V(1 + s)

and  
1    
B V g 1   s  
    1    s –   
B V g 1    
(Using binomial approximation)
Now as s < , B  < B i.e., with rise in temperature thrust also decreases. This in turn implies that if a body is
weighed in a liquid at different temperatures, with rise in temperature due to decrease in thrust its weight
(= W0 – B) will increase.

t
en
nm nment
sig ssig
As A Assignment
Assignment
6. 30 g ice at 0°C is mixed with 2 g steam at 100°C.
SECTION - A The final temperature of the mixture is
NCERT Based MCQs [NCERT Pg. 289]
1. Steam is passed through 40 g of ice at (1) 0°C
–10°C till temperature of mixture becomes 80°C.
(2) 100°C
Mass of mixture will be approximately
(3) 50°C
[NCERT Pg. 289]
(4) 65°C
(1) 12 g (2) 52 g
7. Three identical conductors, P, Q and R are
(3) 45 g (4) 55 g symmetrically fixed at point O as shown in figure.
2. The temperature at which Fahrenheit reading is The temperature of junction O is
five times of Celsius reading is [NCERT Pg. 279] [NCERT Pg. 292]
(1) 10°C
(2) 12°C 60°C
40°C
(3) 18°C P
Q
(4) –10°C
O
3. It takes 10 minutes to cool a liquid from 65° to
R
55°C. If room temperature is 30°C then time taken
in cooling from 51° to 49°C is [NCERT Pg. 296]
50°C
(1) 2 minutes
(1) 60°C (2) 40°C
(2) 3 minutes
(3) 50°C (4) 45°C
(3) 1 minute
8. The thermal capacity of 50 g of aluminium is
(4) 5 minutes
(Specific heat = 0.2 cal/g°C) [NCERT Pg. 284]
4. The Wein’s displacement law express, the relation (1) 20 cal/°C (2) 200 cal/°C
between [NCERT Pg. 294]
(3) 10 cal/°C (4) 100 cal/°C
(1) Radiation energy and wavelength
9. Which of the following instruments can be used to
(2) Temperature and speed of light measure the temperature of sun?
(3) Colour of light and wavelength [NCERT Pg. 279]
(4) Wavelength corresponding to maximum (1) Pyro-heliometer
intensity and temperature
(2) Magnetic thermometers
5. A black body which is at a high temperature T K, (3) Resistance thermometers
emitted thermal radiation at the rate of E watt/m2.
The thermal radiation emitted by a body of (4) Thermoelectric thermometers
emissivity equal to 0.5 at temperature T/4 (in 10. When water is heated from 0°C to 10°C, then its
watt/m2) is [NCERT Pg. 295] density [NCERT Pg. 282]
(1) E/512 (1) Increases
(2) E/4 (2) Decreases
(3) E/256 (3) First increases then decreases
(4) E/128 (4) First decreases then increases
11. The maximum wavelength of black body emission

SECTION - B
m, changes with absolute temperature T of body as
[NCERT Pg. 294] Objective Type Questions
m m 1. A faulty thermometer reads melting point of water

as 10° and boiling point as 190º. How much will
the faulty thermometer read when the actual
(1) (2) temperature is 60ºC?
T T (1) 108º
m m (2) 118º
(3) 128° (4) 138º
2. It is given that the specific heat of copper is one
(3) (4)
tenth that of water. A copper ball of 100 g at 200ºC
T T is put into 100 cc water at 24°C. Assuming no
12. In natural convection, a heated portion of liquid heat loss to the surroundings. The final
moves because of [NCERT Pg. 293] temperature of the system is
(1) Density difference from surrounding (1) 60°C
(2) Molecular collision within it (2) 55°C
(3) Small conduction loop forms (3) 40°C
(4) Its molecular motion becomes aligned (4) 35ºC

13. Two cylinders of same diameter and length one of 3. A bimetallic strip is two different metal bars 1 and
iron and other of silver are placed in close contact 2 welded parallel to their length. Given thermal
as shown. If thermal conductivity of silver is 11 coefficient of linear expansion 1 > 2 and length of
times than that of iron, then temperature of bars is same. Upon cooling the strip will bend with
interface A is approximately [NCERT Pg. 292]
(1) Concave on side 2
Fe A Ag (2) Concave on side 1
100°C 0°C (3) Convex on side 1
(1) 91.7° (2) 80°C (4) Any of the above is possible
(3) 8.3°C (4) 50°C 4. A solid metal sphere is rotating about its diameter
with constant angular speed . If its temperature is
14. The thermal conductivity of a rod depends on
increased appreciably, then its rotational speed will
[NCERT Pg. 292]
(1) Increase
(1) Material of rod
(2) Decrease
(2) Length
(3) Remain constant
(3) Mass
(4) Increase then will become constant
(4) Cross sectional area of rod
5. The thermal coefficient of linear expansion of an
15. A body cools in 4 minute from 60°C to 50°C. The anisotropic solid metal along x, y, z directions are
temperature of the body after the next 4 minute is x = 2 × 10–5 per ºC y = 3 × 10–5 per ºC and
(The temperature of the surroundings is 10°C) z = 4 × 10 –5 per ºC respectively. Its thermal
[NCERT Pg. 296] coefficient of volume expansion  should be
(1) Greater than 40°C but less than 50°C (1) 6 × 10–5 per ºC
(2) 40°C (2) 7 × 10–5 per ºC
(3) Less than 40°C (3) 8 × 10–5 per ºC
(4) Less than 40°C but greater than 35°C (4) 9 × 10–5 per ºC
6. A steel measuring tape and a copper rod are at 10. A pressure cooker having ice at – 20ºC is heated
their true length at room temperature. Their thermal at constant heat supply rate till the steam comes
coefficient of linear expansion are s and c out at 350ºC. The possible graphical variation of
respectively. However measurement of copper rod temperature T of cooker with time t is best shown
length by steel tape is shown as L 0 at a by (Assume ideal situation)
temperature  higher than room temperature. The
correct length of the copper rod at room T T
temperature is
(1) L0(1 + s .) (1) (2)
(2) L0(1 + c .) t t
(3) L0[1 + (s + c )] T T
(4) L0[1 + (s – c )]

(3) (4)
7. Inside a solid metal cube there is a spherical
t t
cavity. If the cube is heated, then volume of
(1) Cube as well as cavity decreases 11. Three rods of identical geometry but different
materials are welded to form the english alphabet
(2) Cube as well as cavity increases
letter Y as shown. If their conductivity are K, 2K and
(3) Cube increases but of cavity decreases 3K and end temperature are 20ºC. 20ºC and 100ºC
(4) Cube decreases but of cavity increases respectively, then their junction temperature Tj is
8. A cylindrical metal rod of length L, Young’s 20ºC
modulus of elasticity Y and thermal coefficient of K
linear expansion  is fixed between two concrete Tj
walls. The cross-sectional area of the rod is A. If
the temperature of the rod is increased by , then
100ºC 3K
the compressive force developed in the rod can be 2K
written as
20ºC
YA  (1) 70ºC (2) 60ºC
(1)
1   (3) 50ºC (4) 40ºC
(2) YA   
2 12. For water at 0ºC it takes one hour for first 3 mm
of ice layer formation. How much time will it take
YA 2 for next 6 mm of ice formation?
(3)
1   (1) 2 hour (2) 4 hour
YA (3) 6 hour (4) 8 hour
(4)
1  2 13. A solid sphere, solid cylinder and circular disc of
9. The apparent volume expansion coefficient of a same material and mass are maintained at same
liquid in steel vessel is A and that in aluminium temperature. The body which is cooling at fastest
vessel is B. If the thermal coefficient of linear rate is
expansion of aluminium is C, then that of steel will (1) Solid sphere (2) Solid cylinder
be
(3) Circular disc (4) All same
A  B  3C 14. Choose the correct statement
(1)
3 (1) Gas thermometers can be used for calibrating
B  A  3C other thermometers
(2)
3 (2) Platinum resistance thermometers are based
A  B  3C on Wheatstone bridge
(3) (3) Optical radiation pyrometer are based on
3
Stefan’s law
B  A  3C
(4) (4) All of these
3
15. Find the temperature at which Fahrenheit reading 20. A body at temperature T is getting cooled in an
is 1.5 times the Celsius reading. atmosphere of temperature T0. Assuming Newton’s
law of cooling to be valid, which of the following
(1) – 107º F
graphs shows the vartiation of ln(T-T0) with time t?
(2) – 160º F
ln (T-T0)
ln (T-T0)
(3) – 160º C
(4) 160º F
(1) (2)
16. Which of the following graphs correctly represents
the relation between Celsius (ºC) and Fahrenheit t t
(ºF) scale?
ln (T-T0)
ln (T-T0)
°C °C
(3) (4)
(1) (2) t t
21. In a constant volume gas thermometer the pressure
°F °F of the gas in the bulb is 28 cm and 44 cm of Hg
at temperature 0°C and 100°C respectively.
°C °C Pressure of the bulb at temperature 50°C will be
(1) 32 cm of Hg
(2) 34 cm of Hg
(3) (4)
(3) 36 cm of Hg
°F °F (4) 38 cm of Hg
17. 100 gram ice at 0°C is mixed with 20 gram steam 22. Two bodies X and Y of identical geometry, mass
at 100°C. Assuming no heat loss to the and surface finish but different material are getting
surrounding, the final temperature of the mixture is cooled in an atmosphere. Variation of their
temperature T with time t is as shown. If SX and
(1) 30°C (2) 40°C SY are their specific heat then
(3) 50°C (4) 60°C T
18. Two conducting rods are joined in series as shown y
in the diagram. Their conductivity are K and 2K.
x
Their length are in the ratio 2L and L respectively.
t
If extreme ends are maintained at 100°C and 0°C,
(1) SX = SY
then the junction temperature Tj is (Assume one
dimensional steady state heat transfer) (2) SX > SY
(3) SX < SY
100°C Tj 0°C 1
(4) S X  S
Q K 2K Q Y
2L L 23. Assume that in case of black body radiation the

product of absolute temperature T of body and the
(1) 80°C (2) 60°C
wavelength  for maximum spectral intensity of
(3) 40°C (4) 20°C radiation is constant, then which of the following
19. A cup of tea cools from 80ºC to 79.9°C in 5 minute. colors of black bodies will have highest
If temperature of surroundings is 20°C. Then how temperature?
much time will it take to cool from 70°C to 69.9°C? (1) Blue
Assume Newton’s law of cooling is valid here (2) Green
(1) 5 minute (2) 6 minute (3) Yellow
(3) 7 minute (4) 8 minute (4) Red
24. M kilogram of ice is being heated from –T1°C to (1) 25°C (2) 20°C
T2°C and variation of its temperature T along with (3) 35°C (4) 40°C
heat inputs Q is shown. Latent heat of melting
process can be calculated as 28. Two coaxial cylinders of radius r and 3r are made
of material of thermal conductivity K 1 and K 2
T (Temperature)
respectively. The equivalent thermal conductivity of
T2 substance for axial heat flow may be
K2 3r
r
O Q (Heat input) K1
Q1 Q2 Q3
–T1 4(K1  K 2 ) K1  6K 2
(1) (2)
9 9
Q1 Q2  Q1 K1  8K 2 K1  K 2
(1) (2) (3) (4)
M M 9 2
Q2 Q3  Q2 29. Two metal spheres of same material have diameter
(3) (4) in the ratio of 1 : 2. The ratio of their rates of
M M
cooling is
25. Shown below is a composite rod of metal A and B.
(1) 4 : 1 (2) 2 : 1
Their thermal coefficients of linear expansion are 1
and 2. Their lengths are L1 and L2 respectively. If (3) 1 : 2 (4) 1 : 4
on heating the length of the entire composite rod
30. A body is allowed to cool. It takes 15 minutes to
does not change, then which of the following
cool from 80°C to 60°C. The temperature of body
relations is true?
in next 15 minutes would be (temperature of
A B surrounding is 20°C)
1 2
(1) 41.6°C (2) 46.7°C
L1 L2 (3) 49.2°C (4) 52°C
(1) 1 = 2 31. A small cavity of diameter 3 cm is made in a
(2) 1 L1 = 2 L2 metal piece. On heating the metal piece, the
(3) 1 L1 + 2 L2 = 0 diameter of the cavity would
(4) (1 L1)2 + (2 L2)2 = 0 (1) Increase
26. 1.2 kg ice at 0°C is mixed with 1 kg water at 24°C (2) Decrease
in a closed calorimeter. The fraction of ice that (3) Remains unchanged
melts is (Lf = 80 cal/g)
(4) First decreases then increases
2 1
(1) (2) 32. 200 cal/minute heat energy is supplied to a solid
3 3 of 100 g. The temperature of solid Q varies with
1 1 time as shown. The latent heat of fusion of the
(3) (4)
4 2 substance is
27. Four identical rods are arranged as shown in the Q
figure. The temperature of the junction O in steady (0°C)
state is
0°C Q2
Q1
10°C 30°C t
(0, 0) 5 20 30 40
O (Minute)
(1) 6 cal/g (2) 18 cal/g
(3) 24 cal/g (4) 30 cal/g
40°C
33. A pendulum clock (made of metal) gives correct 37. A black body radiation has maximum wavelength
time at 30°C. If the room temperature rises to  m at temperature 3000 K. Its corresponding
40°C then error in the clock per 10 hours would be wavelength at temperature 4000 K will be
( = 10–3/°C)
4 3
(1) 40 s (2) 120 s (1)  (2) 
3 m 4 m
(3) 180 s (4) 240 s
5 3
(3)  (4) 
34. A black body at 327°C suspended in a black 6 m 5 m
enclosure at 27°C cools at certain rate. If
38. A cylindrical rod is used to conduct heat energy.
temperature of black body is lowered to t   °C so
If it conducts Q cal/sec, then what energy will it
that rate of cooling becomes half of initial value
conduct if its all linear dimensions are halved?
then find approximate value of t in °C.
(1) 129° C (2) 239° C Q
(1) Q = 2Q (2) Q  
2
(3) 429° C (4) 512° C
Q
35. A body cools from 70ºC to 60ºC in 5 minute, then (3) Q = 4Q (4) Q  
it will cool from 60ºC to 50ºC in time (assume 4
same surrounding whose temperature is 30ºC) 39. Select correct statement regarding “Newton’s law
of cooling”
(1) 6 min. (2) 7 min.
(3) 8 min. (4) 9 min. (1) It is used to determine latent heat of solid
36. Which of the following curves, showing black body (2) It is used to determine latent heat of liquid
radiation at temperatures T1 and T2 (T2 > T1) is (3) It is used to determine specific heat of liquid
correct?
I (4) It is used to determine specific heat of gases
40. 3.2 kg of ice at –10ºC just melts with m mass of
steam at 100ºC, then m is equal to
T2  cal 
(1)  Sice  0.5 gºC 
 
T1

(1) 800 g (2) 625 g
I
(3) 425 g (4) 325 g
SECTION - C
T2
(2) Previous Years Questions
T1
 1. A deep rectangular pond of surface area A,
containing water (density = ), specific heat
I
capacity = s), is located in a region where the
outside air temperature is at a steady value of –
26°C. The thickness of the frozen ice layer in this
T2 pond, at a certain instant is x. [NEET-2019 (Odisha)]
(3)
T1 Taking the thermal conductivity of ice as K, and its
 specific latent heat of fusion as L, the rate of
I increase of the thickness of ice layer, at this
instant, would be given by
(1) 26K/x(L + 4s)
T1 (2) 26K/x(L – 4s)
(4)
T2 (3) 26K/(x2L)
 (4) 26K/(xL)
2. An object kept in a large room having air K1  K 2 3  K1  K 2 
temperature of 25°C takes 12 minutes to cool from (1) (2)
2 2
80°C to 70°C. The time taken to cool for the same (3) K1 + K2 (4) 2(K1 + K2)
object from 70°C to 60°C would be nearly,
8. Two identical bodies are made of a material for
[NEET-2019 (Odisha)] which the heat capacity increases with
(1) 15 min (2) 10 min temperature. One of these is at 100°C, while the
other one is at 0°C. If the two bodies are brought
(3) 12 min (4) 20 min
into contact, then assuming no heat loss, the final
3. A copper rod of 88 cm and an aluminium rod of common temperature is [NEET (Phase-2)-2016]
unknown length have their increase
(1) 50°C
in length independent of increase in temperature.
The length of aluminium rod is : (Cu = 1.7 × 10–5 (2) More than 50°C
K–1 and Al = 2.2 × 10–5 K–1) [NEET-2019]
(3) Less than 50°C but greater than 0°C
(1) 6.8 cm (2) 113.9 cm
(4) 0°C
(3) 88 cm (4) 68 cm
9. A body cools from a temperature 3T to 2T in
4. The unit of thermal conductivity is : 10 minutes. The room temperature is T. Assume
that Newton's law of cooling is applicable. The
[NEET-2019]
temperature of the body at the end of next
(1) J m K–1 (2) J m–1 K–1 10 minutes will be [NEET (Phase-2)-2016]
(3) W m K–1 (4) W m–1 K–1
7 3
5. The power radiated by a black body is P and it (1) T (2) T
4 2
radiates maximum energy at wavelength, 0. If the
temperature of the black body is now changed so 4
that it radiates maximum energy at wavelength (3) T (4) T
3
3
 0 , the power radiated by it becomes nP. The 10. Coefficient of linear expansion of brass and steel
4
value of n is [NEET-2018] rods are 1 and 2. Lengths of brass and steel
rods are l 1 and l 2 respectively. If (l 2 – l 1 ) is
3 4 maintained same at all temperatures, which one of
(1) (2)
4 3 the following relations holds good? [NEET-2016]
81 256 (1) 1l1 =2l2
(3) (4)
256 81
(2) 1l2 =2l1
6. A spherical black body with a radius of 12 cm
radiates 450 watt power at 500 K. If the radius (3) 1l 22   2 l12
were halved and the temperature doubled, the
power radiated in watt would be [NEET-2017] (4) 12 l 2  22 l1
(1) 225 (2) 450 11. A piece of ice falls from a height h so that it melts
completely. Only one-quarter of the heat produced
(3) 1000 (4) 1800 is absorbed by the ice and all energy of ice gets
7. Two rods A and B of different materials are welded converted into heat during its fall. The value of h is
together as shown in figure. Their thermal [Latent heat of ice is 3.4 × 105 J/kg and g = 10 N/kg]
conductivities are K 1 and K 2 . The thermal
[NEET-2016]
conductivity of the composite rod will be
(1) 68 km
[NEET-2017]
(2) 34 km
A K1
T1 T2 (3) 544 km
B K2
(4) 136 km
d
12. A black body is at a temperature of 5760 K. The 18. A piece of iron is heated in a flame. It first becomes
energy of radiation emitted by the body at dull red then becomes reddish yellow and finally turns
wavelength 250 nm is U1, at wavelength 500 nm is to white hot. The correct explanation for the above
U2 and that at 1000 nm is U3. Wien's constant, observation is possible by using [NEET-2013]
b = 2.88 × 106 nmK. Which of the following is
(1) Wien's displacement law
correct? [NEET-2016]
(1) U2 > U1 (2) U1 = 0 (2) Kirchoff's law
(3) U3 = 0 (4) U1 > U2 (3) Newton's law of cooling

13. The value of coefficient of volume expansion of (4) Stefan's law
glycerin is 5 × 10–4 K–1. The fractional change in 19. Liquid oxygen at 50 K is heated to 300 K at constant
the density of glycerin for a rise of 40°C in its pressure of 1 atm. The rate of heating is constant.
temperature is [Re-AIPMT-2015] Which one of the following graphs represents the
(1) 0.010 (2) 0.015 variation of temperature with time?
(3) 0.020 (4) 0.025 [AIPMT (Prelims)-2012]
14. The two ends of a metal rod are maintained at
Temperature
Temperature
temperatures 100°C and 110°C. The rate of heat
flow in the rod is found to be 4.0 J/s. If the ends
are maintained at temperatures 200°C and 210°C, (1) (2)
the rate of heat flow will be [AIPMT-2015]
Time Time
(1) 4.0 J/s (2) 44.0 J/s
Temperature
Temperature
(3) 16.8 J/s (4) 8.0 J/s
15. On observing light from three different stars P, Q
and R , it was found that intensity of violet colour (3) (4)
is maximum in the spectrum of P, the intensity of
Time Time
green colour is maximum in the spectrum of R and
the intensity of red colour is maximum in the 20. If the radius of a star is R and it acts as a black
spectrum of Q. If TP, TQ and TR are the respective body, what would be the temperature of the star, in
absolute temperatures of P, Q and R then it can which the rate of energy production is Q?
be concluded from the above observations that [AIPMT (Prelims)-2012]
[AIPMT-2015] 1/ 4 1/ 4
 4R 2Q   Q 
(1) TP < TQ < TR (2) TP > TQ > TR (1)   (2)  2 
    4R  
(3) TP > TR > TQ (4) TP < TR < TQ
1/ 2
Q  Q 
16. Steam at 100°C is passed into 20 g of water at (3) (4)  2 
4R 2   4R  
10°C. When water acquires a temperature of 80°C,
the mass of water present will be: ( stands for Stefan's constant)
[Take specific heat of water = 1 cal g–1°C–1 and 21. A slab of stone of area 0.36 m2 and thickness
latent heat of steam = 540 cal g–1] [AIPMT-2014] 0.1 m is exposed on the lower surface to steam at
100°C. A block of ice at 0°C rests on the upper
(1) 24 g (2) 31.5 g
surface of the slab. In one hour 4.8 kg of ice is
(3) 42.5 g (4) 22.5 g melted. The thermal conductivity of slab is (Given,
17. Certain quantity of water cools from 70°C to 60°C latent heat of fusion of ice = 3.36 × 105 J kg–1)
in the first 5 minutes and to 54°C in the next [AIPMT (Mains)-2012]
5 minutes. The temperature of the surroundings is (1) 1.24 J/(m-s-°C)
[AIPMT-2014] (2) 1.29 J/(m-s-°C)
(1) 45°C (2) 20°C (3) 2.05 J/(m-s-°C)
(3) 42°C (4) 10°C (4) 1.02 J/(m-s-°C)
22. When 1 kg of ice at 0°C melts to water at 0°C, the 27. On a new scale of temperature (which is linear) and
resulting change in its entropy, taking latent heat called the W scale, the freezing and boiling points
of ice to be 80 cal/°C, is [AIPMT (Prelims)-2011] of water are 39°W and 239°W respectively. What
will be the temperature on the new scale,
(1) 293 cal/K (2) 273 cal/K
corresponding to a temperature of 39°C on the
(3) 8 × 104 cal/K (4) 80 cal/K Celsius scale? [AIPMT (Prelims)-2008]
23. A cylindrical metallic rod in thermal contact with two (1) 139°W (2) 78°W
reservoirs of heat at its two ends conducts an
(3) 117°W (4) 200°W
amount of heat Q in time t. The metallic rod is
melted and the material is formed into a rod of half 28. Assuming the sun to have a spherical outer surface
the radius of the original rod. What is the amount of radius r, radiating like a black body at temperature
of heat conducted by the new rod, when placed in t°C, the power received by a unit surface, (normal
thermal contact with the two reservoirs in time t? to the incident rays) at a distance R from the centre
[AIPMT (Prelims)-2010] of the sun is (where  is the Stefan’s constant)
[AIPMT (Prelims)-2007]
Q Q
(1) (2)
4 16 r 2 (t  273 ) 4 4r 2 t 4
(1) (2)
Q R2 R2
(3) 2Q (4)
2
r 2 (t  273 ) 4 16  2 r 2 t 4
24. The total radiant energy per unit area, normal to the (3) 2 (4)
4R R2
direction of incidence, received at a distance R from
the centre of a star of radius r, whose outer surface 29. A black body is at 727°C. It emits energy at a rate
radiates as a black body at a temperature T K is which is proportional to [AIPMT (Prelims)-2007]
given by (where  is Stefan’s constant) (1) (727)4 (2) (727)2
[AIPMT (Prelims)-2010] (3) (1000)4 (4) (1000)2
r 2T 4 r 2T 4 30. A black body at 1227°C emits radiations with
(1) (2)
R 2 4r 2 maximum intensity at a wavelength of 5000 Å. If the
temperature of the body is increased by 1000°C, the
r 4T 4 4r 2T 4 maximum intensity will be observed at :
(3) (4)
r4 R2
25. The two ends of a rod of length L and a uniform
cross-sectional area A are kept at two temperatures (1) 4000 Å (2) 5000 Å
dQ (3) 6000 Å (4) 3000 Å
T1 and T2 (T1 > T2). The rate of heat transfer, ,
dt 31. Which of the following circular rods, (given radius r
through the rod in a steady state is given by and length l) each made of the same material and
[AIPMT (Prelims)-2009] whose ends are maintained at the same
temperature will conduct most heat ?
dQ k (T1 – T2 ) dQ
(1)  (2)  kLA(T1 – T2 ) [AIPMT (Prelims)-2005]
dt LA dt
(1) r = 2r0; l = 2l0 (2) r = 2r0; l = l0
dQ kA(T1 – T2 ) dQ kL(T1 – T2 ) (3) r = r0; l = l0 (4) r = r0; l = 2l0
(3)  (4) 
dt L dt A Questions asked Prior to Medical Ent. Exams. 2005
26. A black body at 227°C radiates heat at the rate of 32. The coefficients of linear expansion of brass and
7 cals/cm2s. At a temperature of 727°C, the rate of steel are 1 and 2 respectively. When we take a
heat radiated in the same units will be brass rod of length l1 and steel rod of length l2 at
0°C, then difference in their lengths (l2 – l1) will
remain the same at all temperatures, if
(1) 50 (2) 112
(1) 12l1 = 22l2 (2) 1l2 = 2l1
(3) 80 (4) 60 (3) 1l1 = 2l2 (4) 1l22 = 2l12
33. The density of water at 20°C is 998 kg/m3 and at 39. Unit of Stefan’s constant is
40°C 992 kg/m 3 . The coefficient of volume (1) watt-m2-K4
expansion of water is
(2) watt-m2/K4
(1) 10–4/°C (2) 3 × 10–4/°C
(3) watt/m2-K
(3) 2 × 10–4/°C (4) 6 × 10–4/°C
(4) watt/m2K4
34. If 1 g of steam at 100°C steam is mixed with 1 g
of ice at 0°C, then resultant temperature of the 40. Consider a compound slab consisting of two
mixture is pieces of same length and different materials
having equal thicknesses and thermal conductivities
(1) 100°C (2) 230°C K and 2 K, respectively. The equivalent thermal
(3) 270°C (4) 50°C conductivity of the slab is
35. Heat is flowing through two cylindrical rods of the (1) 2/3 K
same material. The diameters of the rods are in the
ratio 1 : 2 and the lengths in the ratio 2 : 1. If the (2) 2 K
temperature difference between the ends is same,
then ratio of the rate of flow of heat through them (3) 3 K
will be (4) 4/3 K
(1) 2 : 1 (2) 8 : 1
41. Gravitational force is required for
(3) 1 : 1 (4) 1 : 8
(1) Stirring of liquid
36. A cylindrical rod has temperatures T1 and T2 at its
ends. The rate of flow of heat is Q (cal/s). If all the (2) Convection
linear dimensions are doubled keeping (3) Conduction
temperatures constant, then rate of flow of heat Q2
will be (4) Radiation
(1) 4Q1 (2) 2Q1 42. A black body is at a temperature of 500 K. It

emits energy at a rate which is proportional to
Q1 Q1
(3) (4) (1) (500)3
4 2
37. Two metal rods 1 and 2 of same lengths have same (2) (500)4
temperature difference between their ends. Their (3) 500
thermal conductivities are K1 and K2 and cross
sectional areas A1 and A2, respectively. If the rate (4) (500)2
of heat conduction in 1 is four times that in 2, then 43. Which of the following is closest to an ideal black
(1) K1A1 = K2A2 body?
(2) K1A1 = 4K2A2 (1) Black lamp
(3) K1A1 = 2K2A2 (2) Cavity maintained at constant temperature
(4) 4K1A1 = K2A2 (3) Platinum black
38. Consider two rods of same lengths and different (4) A lump of charcoal heated to high temperature
specific heats (S1, S2), conductivities (K1, K2) and
area of cross-sections (A1, A2) and both having 44. For a black body at temperature 727°C, its rate of
temperatures T1, and T2 at their ends. If rate of flow energy loss is 20 watt and temperature of surrounding
of heat due to conduction is equal, then is 227°C. If temperature of black body is changed to
(1) K1A1 = K2A2 1227°C then its rate of energy loss will be
K 1 A1 K 2 A2 (1) 304 W
(2) 
S1 S2 320
(2) W
(3) K2A1 = K1A2 3
K 2 A1 K 1 A2 (3) 240 W
(4) 
S2 S1 (4) 120 W
45. A beaker full of hot water is kept in a room. If it 51. A wire is stretched under a force. If the wire
cools from 80°C to 75°C in t1 minutes, from 75°C suddenly snaps, the temperature of the wire
to 70°C in t2 minutes and from 70°C to 65°C in t3 (1) Remains the same
minutes, then
(2) Decreases
(1) t1 < t2 < t3 (2) t1 > t2 > t3
(3) Increases
(3) t1 = t 2 = t 3 (4) t1 < t2 = t3
46. The Wien’s displacement law expresses the 52. A uniform metal rod of 2 mm2 cross-section fixed
relation between at both ends is heated from 0°C to 20°C.
(1) Wavelength corresponding to maximum The coefficient of the linear expansion of the rod is
intensity and temperature 12 × 10–6/°C. Its Young’s modulus of elasticity is
1011 N m–2. The energy stored per unit volume of
(2) Radiation energy and wavelength the rod is
(3) Temperature and wavelength (1) 1440 J m–3
(4) Colour of light and temperature (2) 15750 J m–3
47. We consider the radiation emitted by the human (3) 1500 J m–3
body. Which one of the following statements is
correct? (4) 2880 J m–3
(1) The radiation emitted is in the infra-red region
SECTION - D
(2) The radiation is emitted only during the day
NEET Booster Questions
(3) The radiation is emitted during the summers
and absorbed during the winters 1. The approximate value of solar constant S
(in W/m2) is
(4) The radiation emitted lies in the ultraviolet
region and hence is not visible (1) 1260
48. If m denotes the wavelength at which the radiative (2) 1360

emission from a black body at a temperature T K (3) 1460
is maximum, then
(4) 1560
(1) m T 4
2. On the Fahrenheit scale, the temperature rise of
(2) m is independent of T nine degrees is equivalent to how much degree rise
in Celsius scale?
(3) m T
(1) 4
(4) m T–1
(2) 5
49. A black body has wavelength corresponding to
maximum intensity m at 2000 K. Its corresponding (3) 6
wavelength at 3000 K will be (4) 8
3 2 3. An aluminium scale [ = 2.4 × 10 –5 (C°) –1 ]
(1) m (2) m
2 3 calibrated at 25°C is measuring length of copper rod
[ = 1.7 × 10–5 (C°)–1] at 125°C. If the reading
16 81 shown is 100 m, then the correct reading is
(3) m (4) m
81 16
(1) 100.7 m (2) 100.07 m
50. The radiant energy from the sun, incident normally
(3) 107 m (4) 170 m
at the surface of earth is 20 kcal/m2 min. What
would have been the radiant energy, incident 4. If 150 gram ice at 0°C is mixed with 10 gram
normally on the earth, if the sun had a steam at 100°C then final temperature of
temperature, twice of the present one? composition under ideal condition is
(1) 320 kcal/m2 min (2) 40 kcal/m2 min (1) Less than 0°C (2) 0°C
(3) 160 kcal/m2 min (4) 80 kcal/m2 min (3) 10°C (4) 28°C
5. Four identical metal rods are connected as shown 10. A thin rod of negligible mass and area A suspended
in figure. Assume there is no heat loss through vertically from one end at °C. The rod is cooled
side walls of the rods and no radiation loss, the to 0°C but prevented from contracting by attaching
junction temperature in steady state is a mass at the lower end. If the Young’s modulus
of wire is Y and coefficient of linear expansion is
10°C , then the mass attached is
YA 2 YA
20°C 40°C (1) (2)
g g
YA YA
30°C (3)
g
(4)
g
(1) 22°C (2) 26°C
11. The steam point and the ice point of an arbitrary
(3) 25°C (4) 32°C temperature scale are marked as 80 S and 20 S.
6. Air outside a water lake is blowing at –40°C. It What will be the temperature in centigrade when
takes 10 hours for first two centimeter of ice layer this arbitrary scale reads 32 S?
to form over the lake. Time taken to form next four (1) 50°C (2) 40°C
centimeter of ice layer formation will be
(3) 30°C (4) 20°C
(1) 20 hours (2) 40 hours
12. The densities of wood and benzene at 0°C are 880
(3) 60 hours (4) 80 hours kg/m3 and 900 kg/m3 respectively. The coefficients
7. A hot solid metal ball of radius R is left for cooling of volume expansion are 1.2 × 10–3/°C for wood
in a room. Rate of cooling of the ball is proportional and 1.5 × 10–3/°C for benzene. The temperature at
which a piece of wood just sinks in benzene is
to
(1) 40°C (2) 70°C
(1) R2 (2) R
(3) 68°C (4) 80°C
1 1
(3) (4)
R R2 13. A cube and a sphere made of same material
shown in figure are allowed to cool under identical
8. Two different metal slabs of identical length are
conditions, then
joined in parallel. Their cross-sectional areas are A
and 2A. If their thermal conductivity coefficients are
k 1 and k 2 as shown then their equivalent
conductivity for one dimensional steady state heat 10 cm
transfer is
10 cm
Heat A (1) Cube will cool at a faster rate
k1
Flow 2A (2) Sphere will cool at a faster rate
k2
(3) Rate of cooling is independent of dimension of
k1  k2 body
(1) (2) k1  k2
2 (4) Both (2) and (3) are correct
k1  2k 2
(3) 2k1k2 (4) 14. A uniform thermometre scale is at steady state
3 with its 0 cm mark at 20°C and 100 cm mark at
9. A cup of tea cools from 70°C to 69.9°C in 6 100°C. Temperature of the 60 cm mark is
seconds. If temperature of surroundings is 30°C,
(1) 48°C
then time taken by the cup to cool from 50°C to
49.9°C is (assume Newton’s law of cooling) (2) 68°C
(1) 6 s (2) 9 s (3) 52°C
(3) 12 s (4) 15 s (4) 58°C
15. If Cp and Cv denote the specific heats (per unit 21. The molar specific heat at constant pressure of an
mass) of an ideal gas of molecular weight M, ideal gas is (7/2)R. The ratio of specific heat at
where R is the molar gas constant constant pressure to that at constant volume is
(1) Cp – Cv = R/M2 (2) Cp – Cv = R 9 7
(1) (2)
(3) Cp – Cv = R/M (4) Cp – Cv = MR 7 5
16. Two uniform rods AB and BC have Young’s modulii 8 5

(3) (4)
1.2 × 1011 N/m2 and 1.5 × 1011 N/m2 respectively. 7 7
If coefficient of linear expansion of AB is 22. 50 g ice at 0°C is dropped into a calorimeter
1.5 × 10–5/°C and both have equal area of cross containing 100 g water at 30°C. If thermal
section, then coefficient of linear expansion of BC, capacity of calorimeter is zero then amount of ice
for which there is no shift of the junction at all left in the mixture at equilibrium is
temperatures, is
(1) 12.5 g
C (2) 25 g
A B
(3) 20 g
(4) 10 g
(1) 1.5 × 10–5/°C (2) 1.2 × 10–5/°C 23. Heat energy at constant rate is given to two
substances P and Q. If variation of temperature (T)
(3) 0.6 × 10–5/°C (4) 0.75 × 10–5/°C
of substances with time (t) is as shown in figure,
17. Coefficient of linear expansion of a vessel then select the correct statement.
completely filled with Hg is 1 × 10–5/°C. If there is T
no overflow of Hg on heating the vessel, then P
coefficient of cubical expansion of Hg is Q
–5 –5
(1) 4 × 10 /°C (2) > 3 × 10 /°C
(3)  3 × 10–5/°C (4) Data is insufficient
t
18. A metallic tape gives correct value at 25ºC. (1) Specific heat of P is greater than Q
A piece of wood is being measured by this metallic
tape at 10ºC. The reading is 30 cm on the tape, (2) Specific heat of Q is greater than P
the real length of wooden piece must be (3) Both have same specific heat
(1) 30 cm (2) > 30 cm (4) Data is insufficient to predict it
(3) < 30 cm (4) Data is not sufficient 24. A bullet of mass 10 g moving with a speed of
20 m/s hits an ice block of mass 990 g kept on a
19. In a thermostat two metal strips are used, which
frictionless floor and gets stuck in it. How much ice
have different
will melt if 50% of the lost KE goes to ice? (initial
(1) Length temperature of the ice block and bullet = 0°C)
(2) Area of cross-section (1) 0.001 g
(3) Mass (2) 0.002 g
(4) Coefficient of linear expansion (3) 0.003 g
20. The coefficient of linear expansion of a crystalline (4) 0.004 g
substance in one direction is 2 × 10–4/°C and in 25. Heat is being supplied at a constant rate to
every direction perpendicular to it is 3 × 10–4/°C. the sphere of ice which is melting at the rate
The coefficient of cubical expansion of crystal is of 0.1 gm/s. It melts completely in 100 s. The rate
equal to of rise of temperature thereafter will be
(1) 5 × 10–4/°C (1) 0.4ºC/s
(2) 4 × 10–4/°C (2) 2.1ºC/s
(3) 8 × 10–4/°C (3) 3.2ºC/s
(4) 7 × 10–4/°C (4) 0.8ºC/s
26. In a calorimeter of water equivalent 20 g, water of 31. Three rods of same dimensions have thermal
mass 1.1 kg is taken at 288 K temperature. If conductivities 3K, 2K and K. They are arranged as
steam at temperature 373 K is passed through it shown, with their ends at 100°C, 50°C and 0°C.
and temperature of water increases by 6.5°C then The temperature of their junction is
the mass of steam condensed is
50°C
(1) 17.5 g 2K
3K
(2) 11.7 g 100°C
K
(3) 15.7 g 0°C
(1) 75°C
(4) 18.2 g
200
27. If the radius of a star is R and it acts as a black (2) °C
3
body, what would be the temperature of the star, in
which the rate of energy production is Q? (3) 40°C
( stands for Stefan's constant.) 100
(4) °C
1/ 4 3
 4R 2Q 
(1)   32. If wavelength of maximum intensity of radiation
   emitted by Sun and Moon are 0.5 × 10–6 m and
1/ 4
10 –4 m respectively, then the ratio of their
 Q  temperature is
(2)  2 
 4R  
1
(1)
Q 10
(3)
4R 2  1
(2)
1/ 2 50
 Q 
(4)  2 
 4R   (3) 100
28. Gravitational force is required for (4) 200

33. The three rods shown in figure have identical
(1) Stirring of liquid
dimensions. Heat flows from the hot end at a rate
(2) Convection of 40 W in the arrangement (a). Find the rates of
heat flow when the rods are joined as in
(3) Conduction arrangement (b). (Assume KAl = 200 W/m °C and
(4) Radiation KCu = 400 W/m °C)
29. Which of the following processes is reversible? 0°C Al Cu Al 100°C

(a)
(1) Transfer of heat by conduction
Al
(2) Transfer of heat by radiation 0°C 100°C
Cu
(3) Isothermal compression Al
(4) Electrical heating of a nichrome wire (b)

(1) 75 W (2) 200 W
30. Solar constant (S) depends upon the temperature
of the Sun (T) as (3) 400 W (4) 4 W
34. Two spheres of same material and radius r and 2r
(1) S  T are heated to same temperature and are kept in
(2) S  T 2 identical surroundings, ratio of their rate of loss of
heat is
(3) S  T 3 (1) 1 : 2 (2) 1 : 4
(4) S  T 4
(3) 1 : 6 (4) 1 : 8
35. If a graph is plotted by taking spectral emissive 40. A very thin metallic shell of radius r is heated to
power along y-axis and wavelength along x-axis temperature T and then allowed to cool. The rate
then the area below the graph above wavelength of cooling of shell is proportional to
axis is
1
(1) Emissivity (1) rT (2)
r
(2) Total intensity of radiation (3) r 2 (4) r 0
(3) Diffusivity 41. If an object at absolute temperature (T) radiates
(4) Solar constant energy at rate R, then select correct graph
36. A spherical black body with radius 12 cm radiates showing the variation of logeR with loge(T).
450 W power at 500 K. If the radius is halved and [Assume loge (e  A) > 0]
temperature is doubled, the power radiated in watt
would be loge(R)
(1) 225 (2) 450
(3) 900 (4) 1800
37. Three rods of same material, same area of cross- (1)
section but different lengths 10 cm, 20 cm and
30 cm are connected at a point as shown. What loge(T)
is temperature of junction O?
20ºC
logeR
20 cm
10 (2)
c m
cm
30 O
loge(T)
30ºC 10ºC
(1) 19.2ºC (2) 16.4ºC logeR
(3) 11.5ºC (4) 22ºC
1
38. If transmission power of a surface is , reflective
9 (3)
1 loge(T)
power is , then what is its absorptive power?
6
18 13 logeR
(1) (2)
13 18
3 15
(3) (4)
15 3 (4)
39. A solid cylinder of length L and radius r is heat
upto same temperature as that of a cube of edge logeT
length a. If both have same material, volume and
allowed to cool under similar conditions, then ratio 42. Two diagonally opposite corners of a square made of
of amount of radiations radiated will be (Neglect a four thin rods of same material, same dimensions
radiation emitted from flat surfaces of the cylinder) are at temperature 40°C and 10°C. If only heat
conduction takes place, then the temperature
a 2a difference between other two corners will be
(1) (2)
3r rL
(1) 0°C (2) 10°C
a2 a2
(3) (4) (3) 25°C (4) 15°C
rL 2rL
43. Bottom of a lake is at 0°C and atmospheric 45. Two bodies A and B of equal masses, area and
temperature is –20°C. If 1 cm ice is formed on the emissivity cooling under Newton’s law of cooling
surface in 24 h, then time taken to form next 1 cm from same temperature are represented by the
of ice is graph. If  is the instantaneous temperature of the
body and 0 is the temperature of surroundings,
(1) 24 h then relationship between their specific heats is
(2) 72 h log(– 0)
(3) 48 h
A
(4) 96 h B
44. The power received at distance d from a small t
metallic sphere of radius r(<<d) and at absolute (1) SA = SB (2) SA > SB
temperature T is P. If temperature is doubled and (3) SA < SB (4) None of these
distance reduced to half of initial value, then the
46. Assume that Solar constant is 1.4 kW/m2, radius
power received at that point will be
of sun is 7 × 105 km and the distance of earth from
(1) 4p centre of sun is 1.5 × 108 km. Stefan’s constant
is 5.67 × 10 –8 Wm –2 K –4, find the approximate
(2) 8p temperature of sun
(3) 32p (1) 5800 K (2) 16000 K
(4) 64p (3) 15500 K (4) 8000 K

Chapter 12
Thermodynamics
Chapter Contents
z Introduction Introduction
z Thermal Equilibrium The study of heat and its transformation to mechanical energy is called
thermodynamics.
z Zeroth Law of In mechanics, our interest is in the motion of particles or bodies under
Thermodynamics the action of forces and torques. While in thermodynamics deal with
the internal microscopic state of the body without considering with
z Heat, Internal Energy and
the motion of the system as a whole.
Work
In this chapter we shall study the laws of thermodynamics, various
z First Law of thermodynamic processes, basic theory of heat engines, refrigerators
Thermodynamics and Carnot engine.
z Specific Heat Capacity

THERMAL EQUILIBRIUM
z Thermodynamic State
In mechanics the term ‘Equilibrium’ means, that the net external force and
Variables and Equation of
torque on a system are zero. But in thermodynamics, the term thermal
State
equilibrium means, temperature of two systems are equal, and there is no
z Thermodynamic Processes exchange of heat if put in contact.
z Second Law of
Thermodynamics ZEROTH LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS
z Heat Engines If two systems A and B are in thermal equilibrium with a third system C
separately, then A and B will also be in thermal equilibrium with each other.
z Refrigerators and Heat
Pumps Note : Two or more systems are said to be in thermal equilibrium, if
z Carnot Engine there is no exchange of heat energy between them when they are brought
in thermal contact.
z Additional Information
HEAT, INTERNAL ENERGY AND WORK

Heat : It is the disordered form of energy, which flows naturally from a body
at high temperature to a body at low temperature till thermal equilibrium is
obtained.
Internal Energy : It is sum of the kinetic energies and potential energies
of all the constituent molecules of the system. It is denoted by ‘U’.
150 Thermodynamics NEET
Internal energy depends only on the state of the system. It is a state variable which is independent of the
path taken to arrive at that state. If we neglect the small intermolecular forces in a gas, the internal energy
of the gas is just the sum of the kinetic energies associated with various random motions of its molecules.
Note : Internal energy of a system does not depend on the motion of a system as a whole i.e., the sum of
the kinetic energy of only the constituent molecules due to their randomness inside the system is considered.
Work done by gas : When the piston of a cylinder is pushed down or gas is compressed, the work done
by the gas is taken to be negative. Similarly when the gas expands the work done by the gas is taken to
be positive.
Work done : W   P  dV
To calculate work done graphically from (P – V) graph, calculate area under (P – V) graph up to volume axis.
A statement like ‘a gas in a given state has a certain amount of heat.’ is as meaningless as the
statement that ‘a gas in a given state has a certain amount of work’. While a statement that ‘a gas in
a given state has a certain amount of inernal energy’ is a meaningful statement. Similarly we may say
that ‘a certain amount of heat is supplied to the system’ or ‘a certain amount of work was done by
the system’ are meaningful.
Example 1 : The figure shows a P-V graph of the thermodynamic behaviour of an ideal gas. Find out from this
graph (i) work done by the gas in the process A  B, B  C, C  D and D  A, (ii) work done
by the gas in complete cycle A  B  C  D  A.
14 A B
P(10 N/m )
12
2
10
8
5
6
4 D C
2 A' B
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0
V (Litre)
Solution : (i) The work done in a thermodynamic process is equal to the area enclosed between the
P–V curve and the volume-axis.
Work done by the gas in the process A  B is
W1 = area ABB' A' = AB × A'A
= (6.0 –1.0 ) litre × (12 × 105) N/m2
= 5.0 × 10–3 m3 × (12 × 105) N/m2
= 6000 N-m = 6000 joule.
Work done in the process B  C is zero since volume remains constant.
Work done on the gas in the process C  D is
W2 = area DCB'A'
= DC × A' D = (–5.0 × 10–3) × (2 × 105) = –1000 joule. (Negative sign is taken because
volume decreases)
Work done in the process D  A is also zero, because volume remains constant.
(ii) Work W1 is positive, while W2 is negative. Hence the net work done in the whole cycle is
W = W1 – W2 = 6000 – 1000 = 5000 joule
This net work is done by the gas.
NEET Thermodynamics 151
Example 2 : Consider the process on a system shown in figure below. During the process, the work done by
the system.
Pressure
1 2
Volume
(1) Continuously increases
(2) Continuously decreases
(3) First increases then decreases
Solution : Don’t get tempted to mark the answer (3). We said that the area under the P-V diagram is equal
to the work done. So, if we move from 1 to 2 the area under the graph is continuously increasing
so the correct response will be (1).
Note : In this question the rate with which the work is being done by the system is first
decreasing then increasing.
Example 3 : Find the work done during the perfectly circular cyclic process as shown in the diagram.
P1
P2
V
V1 V2
V2 – V1 
Solution : The area of a circle is R2. But here you have two radii. The horizontal radius R1  and
2
 P1 – P2 
the vertical radius R2  . You know that the area of an ellipse is R1R2, where R1 & R2
2
are semi-major and semi-minor axis respectively. If R1 = R2 the ellipse becomes a circle. So, here
V2 – V1  .  P1 – P2 
the work done = area = R1R2 =  . The +ve sign is due to the fact that the
2 2
cycle is clockwise.
FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS

First law of thermodynamics is in accordance with law of conservation of energy. According to Clausius
statement of first law of thermodynamics, the heat given to the system
Q = U + W
U = Change in the internal energy

W = Work done by the system against external pressure
Heat given to system taken as positive
Q
Heat given by system taken as negative
U = Uf – U i
Work done by the system taken as positive

W
Work done on the system taken as negative
Note : It should be remembered that

(1) The units of dQ, dU and dW should be same while using this equation.
(2) If the temperature of an ideal gas rises, then dU should be positive and if the
temperature falls, then dU is negative.
(3) If the volume of the system increases, then dW is positive while if the volume of
the system, decreases, then dW is negative. If the volume is fixed, dW = 0.
(4) dQ and dW depends not only on the initial and final states but also on the path
followed (or thermodynamic process).
(5) dU depends only on initial and final states, not on the path. For all processes
dU  nCV dT for an ideal gas even when volume is not constant. But for non-ideal
gas it is true only when volume is constant.
(6) During melting, change in volume is neglected,  W = 0, hence dQ  dU , But

during boiling dV  0, so dQ = dU + PdV > dU.
SPECIFIC HEAT CAPACITY

We have seen in last chapter that heat capacity of a substance is given by
Q
S
T
If we divide S by mass of substance m in kg.
S 1 Q
s 
m m T
Here s is known as the specific heat capacity of substance.
If the amount of substance is specified in terms of moles  (instead of mass m in kg), we can define heat
capacity per mole of the substance by
S 1 Q
C 
  T
Here C is known as molar specific heat capcity of substance.
Both s and C are independent of the amount of the substance.
Value of specific heat may varies from 0 to .
Specific heat capacity depends on the process or the conditions under which heat transfer takes place. For
gases, we mainly calculate two types of specific heats.
Specific heat capacity at constant pressure ‘Cp’ and specific heat capacity at constant volume ‘Cv’.
Cp  Cv  R
Note : In above equations the subscript denotes the quantity kept fixed.
1 U
(1) Cv  . is true for all ideal gases for all thermodynamic processes even when volume
n T
is not constant. But for non-ideal gases (or any other systems), it is true only when volume
is constant.
(2) The relation Cp – Cv = R is derived by using ideal-gas model, but it is true within few percent
for many real gases at moderate pressure.
(3) For few substances, Cp < Cv. There are some substances, the volume of which decreases
during heating (one of which is water between 0°C and 4°C). In this case W is negative,
so the heat input Q is less than that in constant-volume case. Hence Cp < Cv .
(4) When n1 moles of an ideal gas with molar heat capacities Cv and Cp is mixed with another
ideal gas of n2 moles with molar heat capacities Cv and Cp, then the molar heat capacities
of the mixture are
n1Cv   n2Cv  n1Cp   n2Cp 
Cv  and Cp 
n1  n2 n1  n2
Cp n1Cp   n2Cp 
and   
Cv n1Cv   n2Cv 
5
Example 4 : Value of Cp for monatomic gas is R. Find Cv.
2
Solution : As Cp – Cv = R
 Cv = Cp – R
5
= R–R
2
3
= R
2
THERMODYNAMIC STATE VARIABLES AND EQUATION OF STATE
Equilibrium state of a thermodynamic system can be described completely by some parameters or some
macroscopic variables. These parameters or variables which describe equilibrium states of the system are
called state variables. The various state variables are not necessarily be independent. The relation between
the state variables is called the equation of state.
For an ideal gas, the equation of state is
PV = RT
Thermodynamic state variables are of two kinds
(a) Intensive Variable : These are the variables which are independent of the size. e.g., pressure, density
and temperature.
(b) Extensive Variable : These are the variables which depend on the size of the system. e.g., volume,
mass, internal energy.
THERMODYNAMIC PROCESSES
Quasi-Static Process
The process in which the system shifts infinitesimally from the equilibrium state is known as quasi-static
process.
z Isothermal Process
All slow process are assumed to be isothermal. A process in which the temperature of the system is kept
fixed throughout is called an isothermal process.
In general, for an isothermal process none of the quantities U, W or Q is zero. For an ideal gas if temperature
is constant, the internal energy is also constant. i.e.,
U = 0 and hence Q = W.
For an isothermal process, the ideal gas equation, PV = RT gives
PV = constant, which is just Boyle’s law.
Work done in an Isothermal Process

V2
W   dW   PdV
V1
V2
 W  2.303 RT log
V1
Graphs for isothermal process

P V P
P1 A
V2 2 P1
P2
V1 1 P2
V O T T
O V V2 T O T
1
Note : If V2 > V1 then W > 0, hence Q > 0 i.e., gas absorbs heat and work is done by the gas on
the environment during expansion.
 If V2 < V1, then W < 0, hence Q < 0 i.e., during compression, work is done on the gas by the
environment and heat is released.
z Adiabatic Process
A process in which no heat transfer takes place between a system and its surrounding is called an adiabatic
process. All sudden processes are assumed to be adiabatic.
In an adiabatic process, Q = 0, so from the first law of thermodynamics, U = –W, hence we see that work
done by the gas results in decrease in its internal energy.
For an adiabatic process,
  
Cp
PV = constant, or P1V1 = P2V2 Where  
Cv
–1 –1 –1
TV = constant, or T1V1 = T2V2
1–  1–  1– 
P T = constant, or P1 T1 = P2 T2
Work done in an Adiabatic Process
V2
W 
V1
P dV
R(T1  T2 )

 1
Graphs for adiabatic process
P V P
P1 V2 P2
P2 V1 P1
V T T
O V1 V2 O T1 T2 O T1 T2
 –1 1– 
PV = Constant TV = Constant P T = Constant
Note : If work is done by the gas in an adiabatic process (W > 0) then T2 < T1.
 If work is done on the gas (W < 0), we get T2 > T1, i.e., the temperature of the gas rises.
z Isochoric Process
A process in which the volume of a thermodynamic system remains constant is called an isochoric process
also known as isometric process. In this process no work is done on or by the gas, all the energy added
as heat, changes the internal energy.
As W = PV = 0
Now from first law of thermodynamics
Q = U = nCv T
Graphs for isochoric process
P V P
P2 2
P2 2
Slope =  1 2
W=0 V
1
P1
P1 1
V O T O T
O V T1 T2 T1 T2
z Isobaric Process
A process in which the pressure remains constant, is called isobaric process. Work done by gas is
W = PV = P(V2 – V1)
= R [T2 – T1] (because, for ideal gas PV = RT]
Since temperature changes, so does internal energy. The heat absorbed goes partly to increase internal energy
and partly to do work. The change in temperature for a given amount of heat is determined by the specific
heat of the gas at constant pressure.
Graphs for isobaric process

P V P
V2 2
P 1 2 P 1 2
1
V1
W = PV
O V O T O T
V1 V2 T1 T2 T1 T2
z Cyclic Process
A process that eventually returns a system to its initial state is called a cyclic process. Since the final state
is the same as the initial state, and so the total internal energy change must be zero, because internal energy
is a state variable.
P P
Clockwise Anticlockwise
B B
0 0
> <
A w w
A
V V
 U = 0
From first law of thermodynamics,
Q = W [Or Q = W]
Example 5 : The pressure (1 × 105 newton/m2) of the air filled in a vessel is decreased adiabatically so much
as to increase its volume three times. Calculate the pressure of air.  for air = 1.4,
log10 3 = 0.4771, log10 2.148 = 0.33206.
Solution : Initial pressure P = 1 × 105 N/m2, initial volume = V, final volume V = 3V, final pressure = P
(say).
For adiabatic expansion, we have
PV  = P V
Substituting values :
(1 × 105 )V  = P(3V)
or 105 = P (3)1.4 or P = 105 (1/3)1.4
Taking log
log P  = 5 log 10 + 1.4 (log 1– log 3)
= 5 (1) + 1.4 (0 – 0.4771) = 5 – 0.66794 = 4.33206
 P  = 2.148 × 104 N/m2.
Example 6 : A tyre pumped to a pressure of 3.375 atmosphere and at 27°C suddenly bursts. What is the final
temperature? ( = 1.5)
Solution : Air of the tyre is adiabatically expanded.
Initial pressure P = 3.375 atmosphere,
Initial temperature T = 27°C + 273 = 300 K,
Final pressure P = 1 atmosphere,
Final temperature T = ?
 = 1.5 = 3/2
For adiabatic expansion
  1
T T  T  P
=  1 or    
P  1 P T   P 
Putting the values :
3/2 1/ 2 1/ 3
 300   3.375  300  3.375 
    or    1.5
 T   1  T  1 
or T' = 300/1.5 = 200 K = – 73°C.
Example 7 : In the following plots match I, II, III, IV with (a) Isothermal process and Adiabatic process for
(b) monatomic, (c) diatomic and (d) triatomic gases respectively.
P
I
II
III
IV
V
Solution : For Isothermal process PV = const. ( n = 1) (Note all the above graphs are basically
PVn = const. plotted)
For Adiabatic process PV  = const. Now,
5
For monotomic gas    1.66 ( n = 1.66)
3
7
For diatomic gas    1.4 ( n = 1.4)
5
8
and for triatomic gas    1.33 ( n = 1.33)
6
In expansion P-V graph we know that as the value of ‘n’ increases the plot keeps coming down.
So, we can represent the graphs as follows : P
Hence the final answer is that PV n = const.
Plot I is Isothermal process

Plot II is Triatomic adiabatic I(n = 1)
II(n = 1.33)
Plot III is diatomic adiabatic & III (n = 1.4)
IV (n = 1.66)
Plot IV is monoatomic adiabatic. V
Note : If n   then the process PV n = const. is known as ‘Polytropic process’ e.g.

PV2 = constant denotes a polytropic process. Real life engine processes are polytropic only.
Example 8 : A thermodynamical process is shown in figure with P A = 3 × 10 4 Pa; V A = 2 × 10 –3m3;

PB = 8 × 104 Pa, Vc = 5 × 10–3m3. In the processes AB and BC, 600 J and 200 J of heat is added
to the system respectively. The change in internal energy of the system in process AC would be:
P
B C
V
(1) 560 J (2) 800 J (3) 600 J (4) 640 J
Solution : Since internal energy is a state function so the change in internal energy during the process AC
will be same as that during the total process AB plus BC. Calculate the total work W during
AB plus BC and total heat Q during these processes. Then calculate U = Q – W.
During the process AB the volume doesn’t change so work done is zero.
During BC the pressure is constant, so total work done
= PB (VC – VB) = PB (VC – VA) ∵VB  VA
= 8  10 4 [N/m2 ]  5  10 –3 m3 – 2  10 –3 m3   240 J
 W during process AB plus BC = 240 J
Now given Q during the same total process = 600 + 200 = 800 J.
 U = Q – W = 800 – 240 = 560 J
Example 9 : Heat is supplied at constant pressure to diatomic gas. The part of this heat which goes to increase
its internal energy will be
5 3 2 2
(1) (2) (3) (4)
7 5 5 3
dU
Solution : Use dQ = dU + W. Now the part of dQ which increases dU is . You know that for constant
dQ
pressure process dQ = nCp. dT and dU = nCVdT always.
dU nCV dT CV 1 7
So, you have    . Now, you know ratio of specific heats for diatomic gas is
dQ nCP dT CP  5
1 5
  . So the correct option is (1)
 7
Note : If in this question you were asked what part of heat at constant process goes to work
5 2
done, then answer had been 1 – 
7 7
Example 10 : 70 calories of heat are required to raise the temperature of 2 moles of an ideal diatomic gas at
constant pressure from 30°C to 35°C. The amount of heat required in calories to raise the
temperature of the same gas through the same range (30°C – 35°C) at constant volume is
(1) 30 cal (2) 50 cal
(3) 370 cal (4) 90 cal
Solution : You know at constant pressure heat absorbed dQp = n.Cp.dT ...(i)
and at constant volume heat supplied is dQv = n.CV.dT ...(ii)
Dividing (i) by (ii) we get
dQP CP 70 7
     dQV  50 calorie
dQV CV dQV 5
Example 11 : N moles of a monatomic gas is carried round the reversible rectangular cycle ABCDA as shown
in the diagram. The temperature at A is T0. The thermodynamic efficiency of the cycle is
P
B C
2P0
P0 D
V
V0 2V0
(1) 15% (2) 50%
(3) 20% (4) 25%
Solution : First of all note that point C is at highest temperature and A is at lowest temperature.
So during process A to B and B to C heat is being added to the cycle.
Work output can be calculated by calculating the area under the cycle of P-V diagram.
Then efficiency can be calculated as work output upon heat input.
Note that the temperature at A is T0, that at B is 2T0 and that at C is 4T0 .
3R
Also note CV for monatomic gas is
2
For A – B,
Q = NCVT (∵ constant volume process)
3R N
= N  2T0 – T0   3RT0
2 2
For B – C,
Q = NCPT (∵ constant pressure process)
5R
= N  4T0 – 2T0 
2
= 5NRT0
3  13
Now, Total heat input Q =   5  NRTO  NRTO
 2  2
Work output = Area Under the Cycle

= (2P0– P0) (2V0 – V0)
= P0V0
= NRT0
W NRT0
 Efficiency = =
Q 13
NRT0
2
2
= or 15.38%
13
Note : Just as an exercise do the same problem for diatomic gas and find the answer 10.5%
for efficiency.
Example 12 : On a volume-temperature diagram a process 1-2 is an upward sloping straight line having the
tendency to cut the volume axis as shown in the figure ahead. During this process the pressure
Volume 2
Temperature
(1) Remains constant (2) Continuously increases
(3) Continuously decreases (4) Data Insufficient
Solution : If this line had the tendency to pass through the origin, the pressure had been constant, hence
answer (1) is wrong. Look at this process in the background of several isobaric lines.
p3
p2 p1
Volume
Temperature
Here note that p1 > p2 > p3. The process line 1 - 2 cuts p3 first then p2 then p1. So during the
process 1 - 2 the pressure continuously increases. Hence the correct answer is (2).
Note : But be careful. Let us suppose on the same volume temperature diagram, the upward
sloping line has the tendency to cut the temperature axis as shown below.
2 p3
volume
p2
p1
1
temperature
Now in the process 1 to 2 the answer will be reversed because first we are touching p1 then p2
then p3. So, we are moving from high pressure p1 to low pressure p3 hence, pressure continuously
decreases now.
Example 13 : A particular cyclic process on a P-V diagram is a rectangle as shown below. Plot it on (a) T-V
and (b) P-T diagram.
1 2
Pressure
4 3
Volume
Solution : (a) Given on P-V diagram we have two isobaric and two isochoric lines. On a T-V diagram,
isobaric lines will have the tendency to pass through the origin and the isochoric lines will
be vertical. So, the basic shape of the cycle 1-2-3-4 on T-V diagram will appear as follows:
T
c
b
a d
V
Here a, b are isochoric lines and c, d are isobaric lines. Now, if we can locate a single corner
to be point 1, 2, 3 or 4 and put the arrow of its process, the cycle will be automatically
completed.
T
Here isochoric lines are easy to deal with. Note the process
2
2-3 on P-V diagram is for larger volume - so is the line b on
T-V diagram. In the process 2-3 the temperature decreases
(You can check by drawing several isothermal lines). So on
the line ‘b’ the arrow should point down because that is the
3
direction of decreasing temperature. So the point 2 will be on
the upper side of line ‘b’ and the process arrow will be down V
to point 3 on the T-V diagram depicted below.
Now, rest of the cycle to be completed is very easy. The arrow here indicates that the
clockwise cycle will continue. From point 3 to point 4 then to 1 and finally to point 2 as
shown below. Hence the final answer.
T
3
4
V
(b) Going by the same logic for the P-T diagram try to get the final answer as follows :
P
1 2
4
3
T
Because on P-T diagram the isobaric lines will be horizontal and the isochoric line will have
the tendency to pass through the origin. If you concentrate on the process 1-2 in P-V
diagram, you can note that it’s a higher pressure line and the temperature increases from
1 to 2. Same thing we have shown on P-T diagram here higher pressure line is the top
horizontal line and the arrow will point left to right because that is the direction of increasing
temperature.
EXERCISE
1. Two gases are said to be in thermal equilibrium when they have same
(1) Pressure (2) Volume
(3) Temperature (4) Area
2. Which of the following P–V curve best represents an isothermal process?
P P
(1) (2)
V V
P
P
(3) (4)
V
V
3. Work done in given cyclic process is
P
3P0
P0
V
2V0 5V0
(1) P0V0 (2) 3P0V0
(3) 6P0V0 (4) 5P0V0
4. Indicator diagram is a
(1) P–T curve (2) P–V curve
(3) V–T curve (4) Q – T curve
5. In an isothermal process for an ideal gas
(1) Q = 0 (2) W = 0
(3) U = 0 (4) V = 0
6. When gas in a vessel expands, its thermal energy decreases. The process involved is
(1) Isobaric (2) Isochoric
(3) Isothermal (4) Adiabatic
7. Which of the following laws of thermodynamics defines the term internal energy?
(1) Zeroth law (2) First law
(3) Second law (4) Third law
8. Select the incorrect statement
(1) For isothermal process of ideal gas, U = 0 (2) For isochoric process, W = 0
(3) For adiabatic process, U = –W (4) For cyclic process, W = 0
9. Which is not a path function?
(1) Q (2) Q + W
(3) W (4) U
10. What is the work done by 0.2 mole of a gas at room temperature to double its volume during isobaric process?
–1 –1
(Take R = 2 cal mol ºC )
(1) 30 cal (2) 40 cal
(3) 120 cal (4) 160 cal
SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS

First law of thermodynamics is simply an energy conservation law, on the basis that one form of energy can
be converted into other. But it does not give the answer of following questions.
(i) Work can be directly converted into heat, why heat cannot be directly converted into work?
(ii) Heat flows from a body at high temperature to a body at low temperature, can it flow, from a body at
low temperature to a body at high temperature?
Second law of thermodynamics is the outcome of human experience on the basis of heat engine and
refrigerator.
Two scientist gave different statements but both statements give identical results.
z Kelvin - Planck statement (for heat engine) : It is impossible to derive a continuous supply of work,
without rejecting a part of heat to the cold body.
or
Efficiency of heat engine can never be 100%
z Clausius statement (for refrigerator) : It is impossible to transfer heat from a body at low temperature
to a body at high temperature without performing some work.
HEAT ENGINES
Any device that transforms heat, partly into work or mechanical energy is called a heat engine. Generally, a
quantity of matter inside the heat engine undergoes inflow and outflow of heat, by expansion and compression,
and sometimes by change in phase. We call this matter, the working substance of the engine.
The most common and simplest kind of engine to analyze is one in which the working substance undergoes
a cyclic process, i.e., a sequence of processes that eventually brings the substance in the same state in
which it started. In some of these processes, working substance absorbs a total amount of heat Q1 from an
external reservoir at some high temperature T1. While in some other processes of the cycle, it releases a
total amount of heat Q2 to an external reservoir at some lower temperature T2. The schematic representation
of basic features of a heat engine may be shown as below
Hot Q1 Q2 Cold
Reservoir Working Reservoir
T1 substance T2
Fig: The engine takes heat Q1 from a hot reservoir at temperature T1, releases heat Q2 to a cold reservoir
at temperature T2 and delivers work W to the surrounding.
z )
The efficiency of a heat engine (
Useful work W
  ...(i)
Total heat absorbed Q1
Useful work W = Q1 – Q2
Q1  Q2
 
Q1
 Q 
   1  2   100% ...(ii)
 Q1 
Q2 T2
As 
Q1 T1
 T 
    1  2   100% ...(iii)
 T1 
REFRIGERATORS AND HEAT PUMPS

It takes heat from a cold place (the inside of the refrigerator) and gives it off to a warmer place (usually the
air in the room where the refrigerator is located).
Note : A heat engine has a net output of mechanical work, the refrigerator requires a net input of
mechanical work.
A heat pump is the same as a refrigerator. The term refrigerator or a heat pump depends on the purpose of
the device i.e., if we use the device to cool the portion of space, like the inside of a chamber and reservoir
at high temperature surrounding it, we call the device a refrigerator. But if the purpose is to pump heat into
a portion of space (i.e., the room in the building) the device is called a heat pump.
In a refrigerator the working substance is generally in gaseous form (e.g., freon, ammonia).
Hot Q1 Q2 Cold
Reservoir Working Reservoir
T1 substane T2
Fig.: Schematic representation of a refrigerator or a heat pump.

In above figure it is clear that the working substance extracts some heat Q2 from the cold reservoir at
temperature T2, and some external work W is done on it, while heat Q1 is relased to the hot reservoir at
temperature T1.
z ):
Coefficient of Performance (
The ratio of quantity of heat removed per cycle from the cold reservoir (Q2) to the energy spent per cycle (W)
to remove this heat is known as the coefficient of performance of a refrigerator.
Q2
 ...(i)
W
By energy conservation,
Q1 = W + Q2
 W = Q1 – Q2
Q2 T2
   ...(ii)
Q1  Q2 T1  T2
Lesser will be the temperature difference of source and sink better will be performance.
z Coefficient of Performance of Heat Pump
Q1 Q1 1
r    ...(iii)
W Q1  Q2 
z Relation between  and 
1 


Note : As we have seen that in a heat engine, heat cannot be completely converted into work i.e.,
 = 1 is never possible. Similarly a refrigerator (or a heat pump) cannot work without some external
work done on the system i.e. the coefficient of performance ‘’ cannot be infinite.
CARNOT ENGINE
According to second law of thermodynamics, no heat engine can have 100% efficiency. But how much greater
an efficiency can an engine have, working between temperature T1 (hot reservoirs) and T2 (cold reservoirs)?.
The question was answered by a French engineer, Sadi Carnot, who developed a hypothetical, idealized heat
engine that has the maximum possible efficiency consistent with the second law of thermodynamics. For
maximum heat engine efficiency the processes should be reversible so we must avoid all irreversible process.
A reversible heat engine operating between two temperatures is called a Carnot engine and the sequences
of steps constituting one cycle is called the Carnot cycle.
Note : Irreversible engine have less efficiency due to the dissipative effects, while a reversible engine
are consisting of reversible process which are quasi-static and non-dissipative.
A Carnot cycle (reversible heat engine) consists of four steps.

All of these four stages of Carnot engine whose working substance is considered to be an ideal gas is
discussed below.
(a) Isothermal expansion (from A to B)
(P1, V1, T1)
V  P A
W1  Q1  RT1 ln  2   area (ABGEA)
 V1  B (P , V , T )
2 2 1
and P1V1 = P2V2 Q1
(b) Adiabatic expansion (from B to C)
R(T1  T2 )
W2   area (BCHGB) (P3, V3, T2)
 1 (P4, V4, T2) D
C
  Q2
and P2V2 = P3V2
(c) Isothermal compression (from C to D) O E F G H V
V4 Fig.: A Carnot cycle for a heat engine with an ideal gas
W3  Q2  RT2 ln  area (CHFDC)
V3 as the working substance.
and P3V3 = P4V4
(d) Adiabatic compression (from D to A)
R(T1  T2 )
W4    area (DFEAD)
 1
 
and P4V4 = P1V1
Net work done W = W1 + W2 + W3 + W4
= Area (ABCDA)
 T2 
Efficiency    1    100%
 T1 
Conclusion:
(i) Efficiency can be 100%, if T2 = 0K or T1 =  K, which is impossible, so 100% efficiency is impossible
(ii) Lesser the difference of temperature of source and sink, lesser will be efficiency.
(iii) If T2 = T1, efficiency is zero, or engine will not work.
Example 14 : A Carnot engine takes in 3000 kcal of heat from a reservoir at 627°C and gives a part of it to a
sink at 27°C. The work done by the engine is
(1) 4.2 × 106J
(2) 8.4 × 106J
(3) 16.8 × 106 J
(4) Zero
Solution : Here T1 = 273 + 627 = 900 K and T2 = 273 + 27 = 300 K

W T2
Now,  = Q  1 – T
1 1
W 300
  1–
3000 kcal 900
 W = 2000 kcal
= 2000 × 4.2 kJ = 8.4 × 106 joule
Hence, the correct choice is (2).
Example 15 : A scientist claims to have developed 60% efficient engine while working between 27°C and 327°C.
Does he claim right?
Solution : Here sink temperature T2 = 273 + 27 = 300 K.

(low temperature happens to be sink temperature)
Given source temperature T1 = 327 + 273 = 600 K.
So, within this temperature difference the maximum possible efficiency is
T2 300
max = 1 – 1–  0.5  50%
T1 600
But the scientist is claiming more efficiency, So as per Carnot’s theorem his claim is not correct.
1
Example 16 : The efficiency of a Carnot’s engine at a particular source and sink temperature is . When the
2
2
sink temperature is reduced by 100°C, the engine efficiency becomes . Find the source
3
temperature.
T2 1
Solution : 1–  ...(i) (T2 : sink temperature T1 : Source Temperature)
T1 2
T2 – 100   2
and 1 – ...(ii)
T1 3
T2 1
or, 
T1 2 from (i)
T2 – 100  
1
and from (ii)
T1 3
Dividing these two we get
T2 3

T2 – 100 2
or, T2 = 300 K
So, T1 = 600 K
Example 17 : An ideal refrigerator runs between –23°C and 27°C. Find the heat rejected to atmosphere for every
joule of work input.
Solution : Let the heat rejected to the atmosphere Q1 = x and given W = 1 joule. Now Q2 = Q1 – W = x – 1.
Given Hot temperature T1 = 273 + 27 = 300 K and cold temperature T2 = 273 – 23 = 250 K
For ideal process we know
Q1 T1

Q2 T2
x 300
 
x – 1 250
or, x = 6 joule
z Carnot Theorem
We have already seen that the efficiency of a Carnot’s heat engine depends on temperature of hot reservoir
(source) ‘T1’ and temperature of cold reservoir (sink) ‘T2’
Carnot gave the most important results which are
(a) No engine can have efficiency more than that of the Carnot engine.
(b) The efficiency of the Carnot engine is independent of the nature of the working substance.
The above mentioned results are sometimes said to be as Carnot’s theorem.
EXERCISE
11. The value of maylie between
(1) 0 to 1 (2) 1 to 
(3) –1 to +1 (4) 0 to 
12. If a Carnot engine works between 127ºC and 527ºC, then its efficiency is
(1) 25% (2) 37.5%
(3) 50% (4) 75%
13. If the temperature of sink is at absolute zero, then the efficiency of Carnot engine will be
(1) 0 (2) 100%
(3) 50% (4) 75%
14. A Carnot engine whose sink is at 300 K has an efficiency of 50%. By how much should the temperature of
source be increased so as the efficiency becomes 70%?
(1) 100 K (2) 200 K
(3) 300 K (4) 400 K
15. A Carnot engine takes 6000 cal of heat from a reservoir at 627ºC and gives it to a sink at 27ºC. The work
done by the engine is
(1) 2 kcal (2) 3 kcal
(3) 4 kcal (4) 8 kcal
16. A process can be reversible if
(1) It is quasi-static (2) Non-dissipative
(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) Neither (1) nor (2)
17. In practice, all heat engines have efficiency less than that of a Carnot engine because
(1) Carnot engine is irreversible
(2) A reversible process can never be attained in a real world
(3) Irreversible engine has higher efficiency than reversible engine
(4) Efficiency of Carnot engine is always one
18. The efficiency of reversible engine is ____ the irreversible engine.
(1) Less than (2) Greater than
(3) Equal to (4) Negligible than
19. A Carnot cycle consists of
(1) Two stages (2) Four stages
(3) Six stages (4) Eight stages
20. A Carnot engine is working in such a temperature of sink that its efficieny is maximum and never changes
with any non-zero temperature of source. The temperature of sink will most likely to be
(1) 0K (2) 0ºC
(3) 0ºF (4) Data insufficient
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
1. Comparison of Different Thermodynamic Process

An adiabat is steeper than an isotherm i.e., the slope of an adiabat is greater than the slope of an isotherm.
 dP  P
Slope of isotherm  –
 dV  V
 dP  P
Slope of adiabat  –
 dV  V
 Slope of an adiabatic process =   (slope of the isothermal process)
P P
A C
i so ad
th ia
er ba
In expansion m B tic
adiabatic curve ad B i so
the A
i ab r
at C m
lies below Isothermal ic
(i) Expansions V (ii) Compressions V
2. As the slope of adiabat depends on the atomicity of gas i.e., , therefore if different gases expands adiabatically
from same initial state, then graph for monatomic gas is more steeper than graph for diatomic and polyatomic
gas as shown in the following diagram.
P
5
1  monatomic gas  = 3
3
2  diatomic gas  = 7
2 5
1
4
3  polyatomic gas  =
3
V
3. Comparison of Work in Different Process.
P isobar P
A B ad
ia b
isotherm iso at
th e
C rm
adiabat
D B A
isobar
V V
In Expansion (If expansion is same) In compression (If compression is same)

Wisobaric > Wisothermal > Wadiabatic Wisobaric < Wisothermal < Wadiabatic
Polytropic Process
PV N = constant
N = Polytropic constant
Molar heat capacity of the gas
R
C  CV 
1 N
If the temperature of n mole gas is increased from T1 to T2
Heat absorbed Q = nC(T2 – T1)
t
en
nm nment
sig ssig
As A Assignment
Assignment
(1) 4P0V0 (2) –4P0V0
SECTION - A
(3) –P0V0 (4) P0V0
NCERT Based MCQs
4. A heat engine operates between the temperature of
1. A system goes from A to B via two process (I) and
(II) as shown in figure. If U1 and U2 are change 1
source T1 and sink T2 has efficiency . If T2 get
in internal energy in process (I) and (II) respectively 4
then [NCERT Pg. 306] half, then efficiency of the engine is
[NCERT Pg. 313]
P
(I) 1 1
(1) (2)
A B 2 4
(II)
1 5
V (3) (4)
8 8
(1) U1 > U2 (2) U1 < U2
(3) U1 = U2 (4) U1 = U2 = 0 5. A monatomic gas at a pressure P, having a volume
V expands isothermally to a volume 3V and then
2. A monatomic gas contained in vessel is subjected
compresses adiabatically to the volume V, the final
to a thermodynamic process such that its pressure
pressure of the gas is [NCERT Pg. 312]
changes with volume as shown in graph, then
change in internal energy during process will be 5 2
(1) (2)
[NCERT Pg. 306] 33 P 33 P
P P
(3) (4) 3 P
3
2P0 6. An ideal gas is taken through a cyclic
thermodynamic process through four steps.
P0
The amounts of heat given to the system in these
V0 2V0 steps are Q1 = 1000 J, Q2 = – 800 J, Q3 = 450 J,
(1) Zero (2) 3P0V0 Q4 = –200 J respectively. The efficiency of cycle is
nearly [NCERT Pg. 322]
3
(3) P0V0 (4) 5P0V0 (1) 31% (2) 45%
2
3. The work done during the cyclic process shown in (3) 35% (4) 48%
the diagram is [NCERT Pg. 312] 7. A refrigerator whose coefficient of performance is 6,
P extract heat from cooling compartment at the rate
of 300 J/cycle. How much heat per cycle is
5P0 rejected in the room? [NCERT Pg. 313]
(1) 50 J
(2) 250 J
P0
(3) 300 J
V
V0 5V0 (4) 350 J
8. A Carnot engine has an efficiency of 20%. When P
temperature of sink is reduced by 80°C, its
B
efficiency is doubled. The temperature of source is
[NCERT Pg. 313]
(1) 1492°C A
C
(2) 400°C
O T
(3) 127°C
(4) 80°C
9. In the adiabatic expansion of an ideal gas, select
the incorrect statement. [NCERT Pg. 312] (1) (2)
(1) There is decrease in temperature of the gas
(2) There is decrease in internal energy of the gas
(3) The work done is positive
(4) The work done by gas is equal to heat supplied (3) (4)
10. An ideal gas has initial volume V and pressure P.
To triple its volume the minimum work done will be
in [NCERT Pg. 312] 14. Which of the following is incorrect?
(1) Isothermal process [NCERT Pg. 305]
(2) Adiabatic process (1) If two systems A and B are in thermal
(3) Isobaric process equilibrium with system C separately, then A
(4) Equal in all process and B will be in thermal equilibrium
 7 (2) Zeroth law of thermodynamics defines

11. An ideal gas of adiabatic exponent     is
 5 temperature
expanding at constant pressure. The ratio of
(3) Temperature does not determine the direction
dQ : dU : dW is (Symbols have their usual
meanings) [NCERT Pg. 309] of flow of heat when two bodies are placed in
thermal contact
(1) 7 : 5 : 1
(2) 7 : 2 : 5 (4) Internal energy of an ideal gas depends on the
state of the system
(3) 2 : 1 : 1
(4) 7 : 5 : 2 15. Which of the following graph does not belong to
isothermal process for an ideal gas?
12. A refrigerator is to maintain etables, kept inside at
2°C. If room temperature is 27°C, then coefficient [NCERT Pg. 311]
of performance of refrigerator is P
P
[NCERT Pg. 322] A B
P1
(1) 10 PV = constant
(2) 9 (1) (2)

P2 B A
(3) 11 1
O V O V
(4) 8 V1 V2
V
13. The given figure shows the pressure-temperature P A
(P – T) diagram for a fixed mass of an ideal P1 A
gas undergoing cyclic process ABCA.
The corresponding pressure-volume (P – V) graph (3) (4)
B
for the given cyclic process will be P2 B 1
T O
[NCERT Pg. 312] O T T
(1) 60% (2) 75%

SECTION - B
(3) 80% (4) 85%
Objective Type Questions
7. If a thermodynamic cyclic process is as shown on
1. For the two adiabatics shown on a pressure-volume volume-temperature (V-T) diagram, then on
(P – V) diagram, if process 1 is for oxygen gas, pressure - volume (P-V) diagram it will be shown
then process 2 may be for (Assume all gases are
as
ideal)
V
P
2
1
V
T
(1) N2 (2) CO2
P P
(3) He (4) O3
2. In a thermodynamic process, heat supplied in a
process is used completely in doing work against (1) (2)
the external surroundings. Hence this process may
be designated as V V
(1) Polytropic (2) Adiabatic
P P
(3) Isochoric (4) Isothermal
3. In an adiabatic process if pressure P and density
d of a monatomic gas are related as P is (3) (4)
proportional to d x, then x is equal to
V V
2 3
(1) (2) 8. For an isochoric process of an ideal gas, the Bulk
7 5
modulus of elasticity will be (P is pressure)
5 5
(3) (4) (1) Zero (2) P
2 3
4. The change in internal energy of two moles of an (3) P (4) 
ideal gas, when volume changes from 2V to 5V at 9. In a thermodynamic process an ideal gas absorbs
constant pressure P is ( = Cp/Cv) 20 J of heat and does 25 J of work. If initial
PV 2PV internal energy of the gas is 60 J then the final
(1) (2) internal energy will be
 1  1
(1) 65 J (2) 55 J
3PV 6PV
(3) (4) (3) 105 J (4) 15 J
 1  1
10. An ideal gas goes from state a to state b through
5. An ideal gas expands from initial volume V1 to final
two process I and II as shown.
volume V2 in two ways viz., slowly and quickly.
P
Then I
(1) Final pressure of quicker expansion is more a b
than that of slower expansion
(2) Work output in quicker expansion is more than II
slower expansion V
(3) Pressure change is more in quicker expansion The heat absorbed and work done in process I are
than that in slower 100 J and 80 J respectively. If work done in
process II is 60 J, then heat absorbed in process
(4) Pressure change is more in slower expansion II will be
than that in quicker expansion
(1) 90 J
6. A scientist claims to have developed a heat engine
(2) 85 J
working between 27ºC and 727ºC with efficiency x.
Which of the following values of x will make his (3) 80 J
claim right? (4) 75 J
11. An ideal gas undergoes a hypothetical cyclic 16. An ideal diatomic gas undergoes a thermodynamic
process as follows. (P : Pressure; V : Volume) process as shown on indicator P-V diagram. The
heat input during process a to b is
P
P
b 4P0 b
2P0 a
a c
V V
V0 5V0
Now choose the correct statement (1) 12 P0V0 (2) 45 P0V0
(1) During process ab, temperature increases (3) 57 P0V0 (4) 47 P0V0
(2) Temperature decreases during process bc 17. The molar heat capacity at constant pressure of an
(3) During process ca, temperature decreases 8R
ideal gas mixture is . The ratio of molar heat
(4) All of these 3
capacities at constant pressure to constant volume
12. A reversible engine absorbs 600 J of heat from for this mixture will be
source at 627°C and rejects some heat to the sink
(1) 1.5 (2) 1.4
at 27°C. The heat rejected to the sink is
(3) 1.6 (4) 1.2
(1) 500 J (2) 400 J
18. The internal energy of the gas remains constant
(3) 300 J (4) 200 J
during
13. 2 moles of an ideal gas at temperature 27°C is
(1) Adiabatic expansion
heated isothermally from volume V to 4V. If R = 2
cal/mol K, then the heat input in this process is (2) Adiabatic compression
approximately (3) Isobaric expansion
(1) 1560 cal (2) 1660 cal
(4) Isothermal compression
(3) 1760 cal (4) 1860 cal
19. Four moles of a gas enclosed in a container is
14. N moles of an ideal monatomic gas is heated from heated at constant pressure. The temperature of
35ºC to 55°C at constant volume and 900 J of heat the gas increases by 3°C. The work done by the
is absorbed. If same gas is heated at constant gas is (R = gas constant).
pressure from 55°C to 95°C, then the heat required
will be (1) 4 R (2) 6 R
(1) 1000 J (2) 1500 J (3) 8 R (4) 12 R
(3) 2000 J (4) 3000 J 20. A monatomic gas (ideal) is supplied 80 joule heat
at constant pressure. The internal energy of gas,
15. A diatomic gas undergoes a cyclic process abc as
increases by
shown on temperature - volume (T-V) diagram as
shown. Hence (1) 58 J (2) 48 J
(3) 44 J (4) 32 J
b
T 21. Two heat engines A and B are operating at 700 K,
a 300 K and 800 K, 400 K respectively. If A and B
c
are their efficiencies then
(1) A = B
V 2
O (2) A  B
3
(1) Pressure during ab decreases
8
(2) Pressure during ab increases (3) A  B
7
(3) Temperature increases during bc
4
(4) Temperature decreases during ca (4) A  B
3
22. The PV diagram for an ideal gas is shown in the 27. A monatomic ideal gas undergoes a
figure. The corresponding PT diagram is thermodynamic process as shown in the figure.
P The molar specific heat of the process is
V
B C
A D
V
P P T
B C B C 3 5
(1) R (2) R
2 2
(1) (2) A
A D D
7
(3) R (4) 2R
T T 5
P P 28. A gas (ideal) is allowed to expand according to
A D B C dP dV
  . Select correct relation
P V
(3) (4)
A D (1) du < 0 (2) du > 0
B C
T T (3) dQ = 0 (4) du = 0
23. An ideal monatomic gas undergoes a process 29. The given indicator diagram shows variation of
follow the relation P  V. The molar heat capacity pressure with volume, when a thermodynamical
of the gas is system is taken from state A to state B. During
R the process
(1) (2) R
2 P
A
5
(3) 2R (4) R
3
24. A refrigerator, whose coefficient of performance is
4, extracts heat from the water inside it at the rate B
V
of 200 J/cycle. The amount of the heat exhausted (0, 0)
to the room, per cycle is
(1) The system is cooled
(1) 250 J (2) 400 J
(2) The system is heated
(3) 680 J (4) 180 J
(3) The system heated first and then cooled
25. A Carnot’s engine takes 300 cal of heat at 500 K
and rejects 150 cal of heat to the sink. The (4) The system cooled first and then heated
temperature of sink is 30. 21 J of heat energy is supplied to a diatomic ideal
(1) 80 K (2) 120 K gas at constant pressure, then change in internal
energy of the gas is
(3) 212 K (4) 250 K
(1) 10 J (2) 12 J
26. Work done by thermodynamic system during
process AB as shown in the figure, is (3) 15 J (4) 18 J
P 31. An ideal monatomic gas is allowed to expand
adiabatically so that its pressure and temperature
3P0 B are related as P = CTx then x is equal to (C is a
constant)
A 3 3
P0 (1) (2) 
V 2 2
V0
(1) P0V0 (2) 2P0V0 5 5
(3)  (4)
(3) 3P0V0 (4) Zero 2 2
32. The volume of an ideal gas at temperature 27ºC is 2. In which of the following processes, heat is neither
1 absorbed nor released by a system?
changed to th of its initial value adiabatically.
4 [NEET-2019]
The new temperature of the gas is ( = 1.5) (1) Isothermal (2) Adiabatic
(1) 400 K (2) 500 K
(3) Isobaric (4) Isochoric
(3) 600 K (4) 700 K
3. A sample of 0.1 g of water at 100°C and normal
33. An ideal gas expands adiabatically so that its pressure (1.013 × 105 Nm–2) requires 54 cal of
3 heat energy to convert to steam at 100°C. If the

temperature varies with volume as T  V 4 , then volume of the steam produced is 167.1 cc, the
CP change in internal energy of the sample, is
the value of C of the gas, is
V [NEET-2018]
3 5
(1) (2) (1) 104.3 J (2) 208.7 J
5 3
(3) 84.5 J (4) 42.2 J
7 7
(3) (4) 4. The volume (V) of a monatomic gas varies with its
3 4
temperature (T), as shown in the graph. The ratio
34. An ideal gas heat engine operate between 27°C of work done by the gas, to the heat absorbed by
and 127°C. If it absorbs 10 kcal per cycle at higher it, when it undergoes a change from state A to
temperature, then amount of heat energy thrown to state B, is [NEET-2018]
sink per cycle, is
V
(1) 2.5 kcal (2) 7.5 kcal
B
(3) 5 kcal (4) 8.5 kcal A
35. The temperature of sink of heat engine is 27°C. If
O T
its efficiency is 40%, then the temperature of
source is 2 2
(1) (2)
5 3
(1) 500°C (2) 227°C
2 1
(3) 127° (4) 227 K (3) (4)
7 3
CP 5. The efficiency of an ideal heat engine working
36. For a gas  3, then gas may be
R between the freezing point and boiling point of
water, is [NEET-2018]
(1) Monatomic
(2) Diatomic (1) 26.8%
(3) Polyatomic (2) 20%

(4) Mixture of monatomic and diatomic (3) 12.5%
(4) 6.25%
SECTION - C
Previous Years Questions 1
6. A Carnot engine having an efficiency of as heat
10
1. 1 g of water, of volume 1 cm3 at 100°C, is converted engine, is used as a refrigerator. If the work done
into steam at same temperature under normal on the system is 10 J, the amount of energy
atmospheric pressure ( 1× 105 Pa). The volume absorbed from the reservoir at lower temperature is
of steam formed equals 1671 cm3. If the specific [NEET-2017]
latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2256 J/g, the
change in internal energy is (1) 1 J
[NEET-2019 (Odisha] (2) 90 J

(3) 99 J
(1) 2256 J (2) 2423 J
(4) 100 J
(3) 2089 J (4) 167 J
7. Thermodynamic processes are indicated in the 11. A gas is compressed isothermally to half its initial
following diagram. volume. The same gas is compressed separately
P through an adiabatic process until its volume is
again reduced to half. Then [NEET-2016]
IV
i f (1) Which of the case (whether compression
I III
f through isothermal or through adiabatic
f II process) requires more work will depend upon
700 K the atomicity of the gas
f 500 K
300 K (2) Compressing the gas isothermally will require
V
more work to be done
Match the following
Column-I Column-II (3) Compressing the gas through adiabatic
process will require more work to be done
P. Process I a. Adiabatic
(4) Compressing the gas isothermally or
Q. Process II b. Isobaric
adiabatically will require the same amount of
R. Process III c. Isochoric work
S. Process IV d. Isothermal 12. The coefficient of performance of a refrigerator is 5.
[NEET-2017] If the temperature inside freezer is –20°C, the
temperature of the surroundings to which it rejects
(1) P  a, Q  c, R  d, S  b
heat is [Re-AIPMT-2015]
(2) P  c, Q  a, R  d, S  b
(1) 21°C (2) 31°C
(3) P  c, Q  d, R  b, S  a
(3) 41°C (4) 11°C
(4) P  d, Q  b, R  a, S  c
13. An ideal gas is compressed to half its initial volume
8. One mole of an ideal monatomic gas undergoes a by means of several processes. Which of the
process described by the equation PV 3 = process results in the maximum work done on the
constant. The heat capacity of the gas during this gas? [Re-AIPMT-2015]
process is [NEET (Phase-2)-2016]
(1) Isothermal
3 5
(1) R (2) R (2) Adiabatic
2 2
(3) 2R (4) R (3) Isobaric
9. The temperature inside a refrigerator is t2 °C and (4) Isochoric

the room temperature is t1 °C. The amount of heat 14. One mole of an ideal diatomic gas undergoes a
delivered to the room for each joule of electrical transition from A to B along a path AB as shown
energy consumed ideally will be in the figure
[NEET (Phase-2)-2016] P (in kPa)
A
5
t1 t1  273
(1) t  t (2) t  t
1 2 1 2 2 B
t2  273 t1  t2
(3) t1  t2 (4) t  273 4 6
1 3
V (in m )
10. A refrigerator works between 4°C and 30°C. It is The change in internal energy of the gas during the
required to remove 600 calories of heat every transition is [AIPMT-2015]
second in order to keep the temperature of the
refrigerated space constant. The power required is (1) –12 kJ
[Take 1 cal = 4.2 J) [NEET-2016] (2) 20 kJ
(1) 2365 W (2) 2.365 W (3) –20 kJ
(3) 23.65 W (4) 236.5 W (4) 20 J
1 19. A gas is taken through the cycle A  B  C  A,
15. A Carnot engine, having an efficiency of  = as as shown. What is the net work done by the gas?
10
heat engine, is used as a refrigerator. If the work P(105 Pa)
done on the system is 10 J, the amount of energy
7
absorbed from the reservoir at lower temperature is 6 B
[AIPMT-2015] 5
4
(1) 1 J (2) 100 J 3
A
(3) 99 J (4) 90 J
2 C
1
16. Figure below shows two paths that may be taken 0 V(10–3 m3)
1 2 4 6 8
by a gas to go from a state A to a state C. In
[NEET-2013]
process AB, 400 J of heat is added to the system
and in process BC, 100 J of heat is added to the (1) 1000 J (2) Zero
system. The heat absorbed by the system in the (3) – 2000 J (4) 2000 J
process AC will be [AIPMT-2015]
20. The molar specific heats of an ideal gas at constant
P pressure and volume are denoted by Cp and Cv
4
6 × 10 Pa
B C Cp
respectively. If   and R is the universal gas
Cv
constant, then Cv is equal to [NEET-2013]
4 A R (   1)
2 × 10 Pa
(1) (2)
–3 3 –3 3
V (   1) R
2 × 10 m 4 × 10 m
1 
(1) 300 J (3)  R (4)
1 
(2) 380 J
21. During an adiabatic process, the pressure of a gas
(3) 500 J is found to be proportional to the cube of its
(4) 460 J Cp
temperature. The ratio of for the gas is:
17. A monoatomic gas at a pressure P, having a volume Cv
V expands isothermally to a volume 2V and then
adiabatically to a volume 16V. the final pressure of [NEET-2013]
the gas is: (take  = 5/3) [AIPMT-2014]
5
(1) 64P (2) 32P (1) 2 (2)
3
(3) P/64 (4) 16P
3 4
18. A thermodynamic system undergoes cyclic process (3) (4)
2 3
ABCDA as shown in figure. The work done by the
system in the cycle is 22. In the given (V – T) diagram, what is the relation
between pressures P1 and P2?
P
C B V
3 P0 P2
2 P0 P1
D 2
P0
A 1
V0 2V0 V T
[AIPMT-2014]
[NEET-2013]
(1) P0 V0 (2) 2P0 V0
(1) P2 > P1 (2) P2 < P1
P0V0
(3) (4) Zero (3) Cannot be predicted (4) P2 = P1
2
23. One mole of an ideal gas goes from an initial state (1) Q1 > Q2 > Q3 and U1 = U2 = U3
A to final state B via two processes: It first (2) Q3 > Q2 > Q1 and U1 = U2 = U3
undergoes isothermal expansion from volume V to
3V and then its volume is reduced from 3V to V at (3) Q1 = Q2 = Q3 and U1 > U2 > U3
constant pressure. The correct P-V diagram (4) Q3 > Q2 > Q1 and U1 > U2 > U3
representing the two processes is
26. During an isothermal expansion, a confined ideal gas
[AIPMT (Prelims)-2012] does –150 J of work against its surroundings. This
implies that [AIPMT (Prelims)-2011]
A A (1) 150 J of heat has been added to the gas
(2) 150 J of heat has been removed from the gas
(1) P (2) P
B B (3) 300 J of heat has been added to the gas
(4) No heat is transferred because the process is
V 3V V 3V isothermal
V V
27. A mass of diatomic gas ( = 1.4) at a pressure of
2 atmospheres is compressed adiabatically so that
B A
its temperature rises from 27°C to 927°C. The
pressure of the gas in the final state is
(3) P (4) P
A B [AIPMT (Mains)-2011]
(1) 256 atm (2) 8 atm
V 3V V 3V
V
(3) 28 atm (4) 68.7 atm
V
24. A thermodynamic system is taken through the cycle 28. If U and W represent the increase in internal
ABCD as shown in figure. Heat rejected by the gas energy and work done by the system respectively
during the cycle is in a thermodynamical process, which of the
following is true? [AIPMT (Prelims)-2010]
D C
2P (1) U = – W, in a isothermal process
(2) U = – W, in a adiabatic process
Pressure
(3) U = W, in a isothermal process

P
A B (4) U = W, in a adiabatic process
V 3V 29. If Cp and Cv denote the specific heats (per unit
Volume mass) of an ideal gas of molecular weight M, where
[AIPMT (Prelims)-2012] R is the molar gas constant [AIPMT (Mains)-2010]
1 (1) Cp – Cv = R/M2
(1) PV (2) PV
2 (2) Cp – Cv = R
(3) 2 PV (4) 4 PV
(3) Cp – Cv = R/M
25. An ideal gas goes from state A to state B via three
different processes as indicated in the P-V diagram (4) Cp – Cv = MR
30. A monoatomic gas at pressure P 1 and V 1 is
A 1
2 1
compressed adiabatically to th its original
P B 8
3 volume. What is the final pressure of the gas?
[AIPMT (Mains)-2010]
V
If Q1, Q2, Q3 indicate the heat absorbed by the gas (1) 64 P1
along the three processes and U1, U2, U3 (2) P1
indicate the change in internal energy along the
three processes respectively, then (3) 16 P1
[AIPMT (Mains)-2012] (4) 32 P1
31. In thermodynamic processes which of the following 37. Which of the following processes is reversible ?
statements is not true? [AIPMT (Prelims)-2009]
(1) In an isochoric process pressure remains
constant (1) Transfer of heat by radiation
(2) In an isothermal process the temperature (2) Electrical heating of a nichrome wire
remains constant
(3) Transfer of heat by conduction
(3) In an adiabatic process PV  = constant
(4) Isothermal compression
(4) In an adiabatic process the system is insulated
from the surroundings 38. An ideal gas heat engine operates in Carnot cycle
between 227°C and 127°C. It absorbs 6 × 104 cal
32. The internal energy change in a system that has
of heat at higher temperature. Amount of heat
absorbed 2 kcals of heat and done 500 J of work is
converted to work is [AIPMT (Prelims)-2005]
(1) 6400 J (1) 2.4 × 104 cal (2) 6 × 104 cal
(2) 5400 J (3) 1.2 × 104 cal (4) 4.8 × 104 cal
(3) 7900 J Questions asked Prior to Medical Ent. Exams. 2005

(4) 8900 J 39. A system is taken from state a to state c by two
33. If Q, E and W denote respectively the heat added, paths adc and abc as shown in the figure. The
change in internal energy and the work done in a internal energy at a is Ua = 10 J. Along the path
closed cycle process, then adc the amount of heat absorbed Q1 = 50 J and
the work obtained W1 = 20 J whereas along the
path abc the heat absorbed Q 2 = 36 J. The
(1) Q = 0 (2) W = 0 amount of work along the path abc is
(3) Q = W = 0 (4) E = 0
d c
34. An engine has an efficiency of 1/6. When the
temperature of sink is reduced by 62°C, its efficiency
is doubled. Temperature of the source is
[AIPMT (Prelims)-2007] P
(1) 99°C (2) 124°C a b

(3) 37°C (4) 62°C V
35. A Carnot engine whose sink is at 300 K has an (1) 6 J (2) 10 J
efficiency of 40%. By how much should the
(3) 12 J (4) 36 J
temperature of source be increased so as to
increase its efficiency by 50% of original efficiency? 40. A Carnot engine has efficiency 25%. It operates
[AIPMT (Prelims)-2006] between reservoirs of constant temperatures with
temperature difference of 80°C. What is the
(1) 275 K (2) 325 K temperature of the low-temperature reservoir?
(3) 250 K (4) 380 K
(1) –25°C (2) 25°C
36. The molar specific heat at constant pressure of an
(3) –33°C (4) 33°C
7
ideal gas is R . The ratio of specific heat at 41. In an adiabatic change, the pressure and
2
temperature of a monatomic gas are related as
constant pressure to that at constant volume is :
P  Tc, where c equals
3 5
7 8 (1) (2)
(1) (2) 5 3
5 7
2 5
5 9 (3) (4)
(3) (4) 5 2
7 7
42. An ideal Carnot engine, whose efficiency is 40%, 49. An ideal gas at 27°C is compressed adiabatically
receives heat at 500 K. If its efficiency is 50%, then to 8/27 of its original volume. The rise in
the intake temperature for the same exhaust temperature is (Take  = 5/3)
temperature is
(1) 275 K (2) 375 K
(1) 800 K (2) 900 K
(3) 475 K (4) 175 K
(3) 600 K (4) 700 K
50. Two Carnot engines A and B are operated in series.
43. A monatomic gas initially at 18°C is compressed The engine A receives heat from the source at
adiabatically to one eighth of its original volume. temperature T1 and rejects the heat to the sink at
The temperature after compression will be temperature T. The second engine B receives the
(1) 1164 K (2) 144 K heat at temperature T and rejects to its sink at
temperature T2. For what value of T the efficiencies
(3) 18 K (4) 887.4 K of the two engines are equal?
44. An ideal gas, undergoing adiabatic change, has
which of the following pressure temperature T1  T2 T1  T2
(1) (2)
relationship? 2 2
(1) PT1– = constant (2) P1–T = constant (3) T1T2 (4) T1T2
(3) P–1T = constant (4) PT–1 = constant
51. The (W/Q) of a Carnot engine is 1/6. Now the
45. A sample of gas expands from volume V1 to V2. temperature of sink is reduced by 62°C, then this
The amount of work done by the gas is greatest, ratio becomes twice, therefore the initial
when the expansion is temperature of the sink and source are respectively
(1) Adiabatic (2) Equal in all cases
(1) 33°C, 67°C (2) 37°C, 99°C
(3) Isothermal (4) Isobaric
(3) 67°C, 33°C (4) 97K, 37K
46. The efficiency of a Carnot engine operating with
52. A scientist says that the efficiency of his heat
reservoir temperature of 100°C and – 23°C will be
engine which works at source temperature 127°C
373  250 373  250 and sink temperature 27°C is 26%, then
(1) (2)
373 373 (1) It is impossible
(2) It is possible but less probable
100  23 100  23
(3) (4) (3) It is quite probable
100 100
(4) Data are incomplete
47. We consider a thermodynamic system. If U
represents the increase in its internal energy and 53. The efficiency of Carnot engine is 50% and
W the work done by the system, which of the temperature of sink is 500 K. If temperature of
following statements is true? source is kept constant and its efficiency raised to
60%, then the required temperature of sink will be
(1) U = –W in an isothermal process
(1) 100 K
(2) U = W in an isothermal process
(2) 600 K
(3) U = – W in an adiabatic process
(3) 400 K
(4) U = W in an adiabatic process
(4) 500 K
48. If the ratio of specific heat of a gas at constant
pressure to that at constant volume is , the 54. An ideal gas heat engine operates in a Carnot
change in internal energy of a mass of gas, when cycle between 227°C and 127°C. It absorbs 6 kcal
the volume changes from V to 2V at constant at the higher temperature. The amount of heat (in
pressure P, is kcal) converted into work is equal to
PV (1) 4.8
(1) (2) PV
(   1) (2) 3.5
R PV (3) 1.6
(3) (4)
(   1) (   1) (4) 1.2
55. One mole of an ideal gas at an initial temperature 3. A thermodynamic cyclic process abc is shown in
of T K does 6R joules of work adiabatically. If the volume-temperature (V-T) diagram. Its
ratio of specific heats of this gas at constant corresponding pressure-volume (P-V) diagram is
pressure and at constant volume is 5/3, the final best shown by
temperature of gas will be
V
(1) (T + 2.4) K (2) (T – 2.4) K c b
(3) (T + 4) K (4) (T – 4) K
56. The amount of heat energy required to raise the
temperature of 1 g of Helium at NTP, from T1K to a
T2K is
T
3 3
(1) Na kB (T2  T1 ) (2) Na kB (T2  T1 ) P P a
2 4
a b
3 T  3
(3) Na kB  2  (4) Na k B (T2  T1 ) (1) (2)
4  T1  8
c b c
57. Which of the following relations does not give the V V
equation of an adiabatic process, where terms have
their usual meaning? P P
c b b
(1) P.T1– = constant (2) P1–T = constant
(3) PV = constant (4) TV–1 = constant (3) (4)
a a c
SECTION - D V V
NEET Booster Questions 4. In an isobaric process of a diatomic gas 140 J of

heat is added to N moles of the gas to increase
1. The internal energy of a gas is 20 J. It undergoes
its temperature from T1 to T2. The amount of work
a thermodynamic process such that 35 J of heat done by the gas in this process is
is added to the system and it does 5 J of work on
atmosphere. The final value of the internal energy (1) 100 J (2) 40 J
of the gas is (3) 60 J (4) 120 J
(1) – 10 J (2) 25 J
5. The source and sink temperature of a Carnot
(3) 50 J (4) 40 J engine are 327°C and 27°C respectively. The
efficiency of the engine is
2. An ideal gas undergoes a cyclic process as
shown on pressure-volume (P-V) diagram. Now (1) 10% (2) 20%
choose the correct statement about temperature
variation (3) 30% (4) 50%
6. The variation of coefficient of volume expansion of
P an ideal gas at constant pressure with absolute
a temperature is
P P
c b
V (1) (2)
(1) During a–b temperature continuously
decreases T T
(2) During b–c temperature continuously P P
decreases
(3) During c–a temperature continuously (3) (4)
decreases
(4) All of these
T T
7. If a gas is compressed adiabatically 12. Two different adiabatic paths for the same gas
intersect two isothermals at T1 and T2 as shown
(1) The internal energy of the gas increases
in P – V figure. The volumes of a, b, c and d
(2) Internal energy of the gas decreases stages are related as
(3) Internal energy of the gas does not change
P
(4) Work done by the gas is positive a
b
8. PV plots of two gases during adiabatic processes T1
are shown. Plot 1 and 2 should correspond d
respectively to c
T2
P Va Vd Vb Vc V
1 Va Vb Va Vc
2 (1) V  V (2) V  V
c d b d
V
Va Vb
(1) He and Ne (2) N2 and Ne (3) V  V (4) VaVb = VcVd
d c
(3) Ne and N2 (4) O2 and N2
13. A container is filled with 20 moles of an ideal
9. The heat energy absorbed in going through a diatomic gas at absolute temperature T. When
circular cyclic process shown in figure is nearly heat is supplied to gas temperature remains
constant but 8 moles dissociate into atoms. Heat
P(atm) energy given to gas is
3 atm (1) 4RT (2) 6RT
(3) 3RT (4) 5RT
1 atm
14. A cyclic process on an ideal monatomic gas is
shown in figure. The correct statement is
V(Lt)
1 Lt 3 Lt P
B C
(1) 314 J
(2) 300 J
A
(3) 200 J
V
(4) 100 J
(1) Work done by gas in process AB is more than
10. One mole of an ideal diatomic gas whose pressure that in the process BC
changes with volume as P = V, where  is
(2) Net heat energy has been supplied to the system
constant. The molar heat capacity of the gas is
(1) R (3) Temperature of the gas is maximum at state B
(2) 2R (4) In process CA, heat energy is absorbed by system

(3) 3R 15. A triatomic, diatomic and monoatomic gas is
supplied same amount of heat at constant pressure,
(4) 4R
then
11. A heat engine works on a Carnot cycle with a heat
(1) Fractional energy used to change internal
sink at a temperature of 2700 K. If the efficiency
energy is maximum in monatomic gas
of the heat engine is 10%, then the temperature of
heat source is (2) Fractional energy used to change internal
energy is maximum in diatomic gas
(1) 4000 K
(2) 3000 K
energy is maximum in triatomic gases
(3) 5000 K
(4) 7000 K energy is same in all the three gases
16. If a gas is taken from A to C through B then heat (1) TA > TB > TC
absorbed by the gas is 8 J. Heat absorbed by the
(2) TA < TB < TC
gas in taking it from A to C directly is
(3) TB < TA < TC
P (kPa)
(4) TA = TB = TC
20 20. A gas may expand either adiabatically or

C
isothermally. A number of P–V curves are drawn
for the two processes over different range of
10 B
A pressure and volume. It will be found that
(1) An adiabatic curve and an isothermal curve
200 400 V (cc) may intersect
(1) 8 J (2) 9 J (2) Two adiabatic curves do not intersect
(3) 11 J (4) 12 J (3) Two isothermal curves do not intersect
17. Liquid oxygen at 50 K is heated to 300 K at
(4) All of these
constant pressure of 1 atm. The rate of heating is
constant. Which one of the following graphs 21. A hydrogen cylinder is designed to withstand an
represents the variation of temperature with time? internal pressure of 100 atm. At 27°C, hydrogen is
pumped into the cylinder which exerts a pressure
of 20 atm. At what temperature does the danger
Temperature
Temperature
of explosion first sets in?

(1) 500 K
(1) (2)
(2) 1500 K
Time Time (3) 1000 K
(4) 2000 K
Temperature
Temperature
22. The variation of pressure P with volume V for an

ideal diatomic gas is parabolic as shown in the
(3) (4) figure. The molar specific heat of the gas during this
process is
Time Time
P
18. 105 calories of heat is required to raise the
temperature of 3 moles of an ideal gas at constant
pressure from 30°C to 35°C. The amount of heat
required in calories to raise the temperature of the
gas through the range (60°C to 65°C) at constant
 Cp 
volume is     1.4  O V
 Cv 
9R 17R
(1) 50 cal (2) 75 cal (1) (2)
5 6
(3) 70 cal (4) 90 cal
3R 8R
19. Figure shows the isotherms of a fixed mass of an (3) (4)
4 5
ideal gas at three temperatures TA, TB and TC,
then 23. When 1 kg of ice at 0°C melts to water at 0°C, the
A resulting change in its entropy, taking latent heat
1
V B of ice to be 80 cal/°C is
(1) 293 cal/K
C
(2) 273 cal/K
(3) 8 × 104 cal/K
O P
(4) 80 cal/K
24. For an isobaric process, the ratio of Q (amount 28. A closed cylindrical vessel contains N moles of an
of heat supplied) to the W (work done by the ideal diatomic gas at a temperature T. On
supplying heat, temperature remains same, but
 C  n moles get dissociated into atoms. The heat
gas) is    P 
 CV  supplied is
(1)  (2)  – 1 5 5
(1) (N  n )RT (2) nRT
2 2
  1 3
(3)
 1
(4)
 1 (3) nRT (4) nRT
2 2
25. 3 moles of an ideal gas are contained within a 29. An ideal monatomic gas at 300 K expands
cylinder by a frictionless piston and are initially at adiabatically to 8 times its volume. What is the final
temperature T. The pressure of the gas remains temperature?
constant while it is heated and its volume (1) 75 K
doubles. If R is molar gas constant, the work done
(2) 300 K
by the gas in increasing its volume is
(3) 560 K
3
(1) RT ln 2 (4) 340 K
2
5
(2) 3RT ln 2 30. Isothermal elasticity for a gas (having   ) is
3
3 3 × 10 5 N/m 2. If the same gas is undergoing
(3) RT
2 adiabatic change then adiabatic elasticity at that
instant is
(4) 3RT
(1) 3 × 105 N/m2
26. Two moles of a gas at temperature T and volume
V are heated to twice its volume at constant (2) 5 × 105 N/m2
(3) 6 × 105 N/m2
Cp
pressure. If   then increase in internal (4) 10 × 105 N/m2
Cv
energy of the gas is 31. The variation of pressure P with volume V for an
ideal monatomic gas during an adiabatic process
RT is shown in figure. At point A the magnitude of rate
(1) of change of pressure with volume is
 1
P
2RT
(2)
 1
2RT 3 P0 A
(3)
3(   1)
V
O 2 V0
2T
(4)
 1 3 P0
(1)
27. To an ideal triatomic gas 800 cal heat energy is 5 V0
given at constant pressure. If vibrational mode is 5 P0
neglected, then energy used by gas in work done (2)
against surroundings is 3 V0
(1) 200 cal 3 P0

(3)
(2) 300 cal 2 V0
(3) 400 cal 5 P0
(4)
(4) 60 cal 2 V0
32. Figure shows, the adiabatic curve on a log T and log (1) During process CD, work done by gas is
V scale performed on ideal gas. The gas is negative
(2) During process AB, work done by the gas is
log T positive
5 (3) During process BC internal energy of system
A
4 increases
3
B (4) During process BC internal energy of the
2
system decreases
1
log V 36. An ideal gas of volume V and pressure P expands
O 1 2 3 4 5 isothermally to volume 16 V and then compressed
adiabatically to volume V. The final pressure of gas
(1) Monatomic is [ = 1.5]
(2) Diatomic (1) P
(3) Polyatomic (2) 3P
(4) Mixture of monatomic and diatomic (3) 4P
33. A diatomic gas undergoes a process represented (4) 6P
by PV1.3 = constant. Choose the incorrect statement
37. The pressure P of an ideal diatomic gas varies with
(1) The gas expands by absorbing heat from the its absolute temperature T as shown in figure. The
surroundings molar heat capacity of gas during this process is
(2) The gas cools down during expansion [R is gas constant]
(3) The work done by surroundings during P

expansion of the gas is negative
(4) None of these
34. The process CD is shown in the diagram. As
system is taken from C to D, what happens to the
T
temperature of the system?
(1) 1.7 R
P
(2) 3.25 R
3p0 C
(3) 2.5 R
(4) 4.2 R
p0 D 38. An ideal gas expands according to the law
v0 V P 2V = constant. The internal energy of the gas
3v0
(1) Increases continuously
(1) Temperature first decreases and then increases (2) Decreases continuously
(2) Temperature first increases and then decreases (3) Remain constant
(3) Temperature decreases continuously
(4) First increases and then decreases
(4) Temperature increases continuously
39. Neon gas of a given mass expands isothermally to
35. A P-T graph is shown for a cyclic process. Select double volume. What should be the further
correct statement regarding this fractional decrease in pressure, so that the gas
when adiabatically compressed from that state,
P reaches the original state?
C
(1) 1 – 2–2/3
(2) 1 – 31/3
B
D (3) 21/3
A
O T (4) 32/3
40. Carnot cycle is plotted in P-V graph. Which portion 41. Efficiency of a heat engine working between a
represents an isothermal expansion? given source and sink is 0.5. Coefficient of
performance of the refrigerator working between the
P A same source and the sink will be
B
(1) 1 (2) 0.5
D C (3) 1.5 (4) 2

V 42. A heat engine rejects 600 cal to the sink at 27°C.
Amount of work done by the engine will be
(1) AB
(Temperature of source is 227°C & J = 4.2 J/cal)
(2) BC
(1) 1680 J (2) 840 J
(3) CD
(4) DA (3) 2520 J (4) None of these

Chapter 13
Kinetic Theory
Chapter Contents
z Molecular Theory of Matter Gases have no shape and size and can be contained in vessels of
any shape and size. They have negligible force of molecular
z Behaviour of Gases interaction. Many scientists like Boyle and Newton tried to explain
z Kinetic Theory of an Ideal the behaviour of gases. But the real theory was developed in the
Gas nineteenth century by Maxwell and Boltzmann. This theory is Kinetic
theory, which explains the behaviour of gases. It is consistent with
z Law of Equipartition of gas laws and Avogadro Hypothesis. It gives the interpretation of
Energy pressure and temperature of gases. In this chapter we shall study
z Degrees of Freedom some of the features of kinetic theory.
z Mean Free Path MOLECULAR THEORY OF MATTER

John Dalton, about 200 years ago, proposed the atomic theory.
According to this theory
(a) The smallest constituents of an element are atoms.
(b) Atoms of one element are identical but differ from those of other
elements.
(c) A small number of atoms of each element combine to form a
molecule of a compound.
From many observations, in recent times we now know that molecules
(made up of more than one atoms) constitute matter. We are able to
measure their dimensions with the help of electron microscope and
scanning tunnelling microscope. The size of an atom is about an
angstrom (10–10 m).
In solids the atom is tightly packed (about 2 Å). In liquids the atoms
are not as rigidly fixed as in solids and can move around, this enables
a liquid to flow. In gases the interatomic distances are very large
therefore, the mean free path (the average distance a molecule can
travel without colliding) is very large i.e., of the order of thousands of
angstroms. Hence, if the gases are not enclosed, they disperse away.
188 Kinetic Theory NEET
BEHAVIOUR OF GASES
In gases molecules are far away from each other, and due to this the interatomic forces between the molecules
is negligible except, when two molecules collide. Hence, the properties of gases are easier to understand
than those of solids and liquids.
z Avogadro’s Hypothesis
Equal volume of all the gases under similar condition of temperature and pressure contain equal number of
molecules.
The number of molecules in 22.4 litres of any gas at STP are 6.02 × 1023. This is known as Avogadro number
and is denoted by NA. The mass of 22.4 litres of any gas at S.T.P. (standard temperature 273 K and pressure
1 atm) is equal to its molecular weight which is equal to one mole.
The perfect gas equation can be written as
PV = RT …(i)
 is number of moles and R = NAkB which is universal gas constant. Temperature T is absolute temperature
R = 8.314 J mol–1 K–1
M N
  …(ii)
M0 N A
where M is the mass of the gas containing N molecules, M0 is the molar mass and NA the Avogadro’s number.
Using equation (ii), equation (i) can be written as
N  R T R 
PV  ∵  N  kB 
NA  A 
 PV = NkBT
N
P kBT  nkBT
V
where n is the number density of molecules i.e., number of molecules per unit volume, kB is Boltzmann’s
constant. Its value in SI unit is 1.38 × 10–23 JK–1.
We can also write equation (i) as
 M   M 
P RT  RT  RT ∵ V  
V M0V M0
If a gas satisfy equation (i) at all pressures and temperature then, it is known as ideal gas. It is a theoretical
model of a gas practically no gas is truly ideal. The figure given below shows the departure of real gases
from ideal gas behaviour. A straight line parallel to x-axis shows an ideal gas. Curves of other gases
approaches ideal gas behaviour at low pressure and high temperatures.
Ideal gas
1
T1
J mol–1 K–1
T2
T1 > T2 > T3
T3
pV
T
0
400200 600 800
P (atm)
Fig.: Real gases approach ideal gas behaviour at low pressures and high temperatures.
NEET Kinetic Theory 189
Now, the question arises why real gases approaches ideal behaviour at low pressure and high temperatures.
Let us try to seek for the answer to this question. At low pressures and high temperatures the molecules of
the gas are far apart and the interaction between the molecules becomes negligible, without interactions the
gas behaves like an ideal one.
z Boyle’s law
At constant temperature, pressure of given mass of a gas varies inversely to its volume.
1
P
V
PV = constant
1 1  P2V2
PV
Graphs of Boyle’s law

m = const. m = const.
P m = const. P T = const. PV T = const.
T = const.
V 1/V P or V
(a) (b) (c)
Fig.: (a) Showing variation of P with V; (b) Showing variation of P with 1/V;
(c) Showing variation of PV with P or V
z Charles’ law
At constant pressure, volume of given mass of a gas is directly proportional to absolute temperature.
The graph between V and T are straight lines as shown in the graph given below :
T
VT at constant P
V = KT 1.2
P1 > P2 > P3
V 1.0
K
T P1
0.8
V1 V2
 0.6 P2
T1 T2
0.4 P3
0.2
0
100 200 300 400 500 V
Fig.: Experimental T-V curves (solid lines) for CO2 at three pressures compared
with Charles’ law (dotted lines).
z Gay Lussac’s law or Pressure law
At constant volume, pressure of given mass of a gas is directly proportional to absolute temperature
P  T (at constant volume)
P1 P2

T1 T2
z Dalton’s law of partial pressure
Let us consider a mixture of non-interacting ideal gases and 1, 2, 3…… be the number of moles of gases
respectively, in a vessel of volume V at temperature T and pressure P. Gas equation becomes
PV = (1 + 2 + 3 + …)RT
RT RT RT
P  1  2  3  
V V V
P = P1 + P2 + P3 + ……
Thus, the total pressure of a mixture of ideal gases is the sum of partial pressures. This is Dalton’s law of
partial pressures.
Example 1 : The pressure of a gas is increased 2 times. What should be the change in its volume so that
the temperature and number of moles remain constant?
Solution : Applying Boyle’s law
P1V1 = P2V2 …(i)
P2 = 2P1
Substituting the values in equation (i)
V1
V2 
2
Hence, the volume reduced to half.
Example 2 : The pressure of a given mass of a gas filled in a vessel of volume V at constant temperature is
1
reduced to rd of its initial value. Calculate the percentage change in its volume.
3
Solution : Applying Boyle’s law
P1V1 = P2V2
1
∵ P2  P1
3
Substituting the values in equation, we get
1
1 1 
PV PV
1 2 then, V2 = 3V1
3
Change in volume
V = V2 – V1 = 2V1
Percentage change
V 2V
  100  1  100
V V1
= 200%
Example 3 : The percentage change in the pressure of a given mass of a gas filled in a container at constant
temperature is 100%. Calculate the percentage change in its volume.
Solution : Let the initial pressure and volume be P1 and V1 and final pressure and volume be P2 and V2.
P2 – P1
Percentage change in pressure   100  100
P1
P2 – P1 = P1
P2 = 2P1
Applying Boyle’s law,
P1V1 = P2V2
P1V1 = 2P1V2
V1
V2 
2
V1
Change in volume = (V2 – V1)  –
2
V1
–
Percentage change  2  100  – 50%
V1
1
Example 4 : A gas is filled in a vessel at 27°C. To what temperature should it be heated in order that rd of
3
the gas may escape out of the vessel?
V 3V
Solution : T1 = 27 + 273 = 300 K, V1 = V, T2 = ?, V2  V  
2 2
Applying Charles’ law
V1 V2

T1 T2
3V
V
 2
300 T2
3 900
T2   300   450 K
2 2
 t2 = (450 – 273)°C = 177°C
1
Example 5 : A gas is filled in a container at 27°C. On increasing the temperature to 127°C, 1 litre (having th
4
mass) of the gas escape out of the container. Calculate the volume of the container.
Solution : Let the volume of container be V
 T1 = (273 + 27) K
= 300 K
V1 = V
T2 = (273 + 127) K
= 400 K
V2 = V + 1
From Charles’ law
V1 V2 V V 1
  
T1 T2 300 400
 4V = 3V + 3
Hence V = 3 litre
Example 6 : The pressure of a gas filled in a closed container increases by 1% when temperature is increased
by 1°C. Find the initial temperature of the gas.
Solution : P1 = P, T1 = T K
1 101
P2  P  P P
100 100
T2 = (T + 1) K
P1 T1

P2 T2
P T
 
101 (T  1)
P
100
100 T

101 T  1
100T + 100 = 101T

1T = 100, T = 100 K
Example 7 : One mole each of hydrogen, oxygen and nitrogen are mixed in a close container of volume 10 litres
and temperature 27°C. Calculate the pressure exerted by the mixture. (R = 8.314 J mol–1 K–1)
Solution : According to Dalton’s law of partial pressure
P = P1 + P2 + P3
RT RT RT 3RT

P   
V V V V
 = 1 mole
3RT 3  8.314  300

 P 
V 10  10 –3
 7.48  105 Nm–2
KINETIC THEORY OF AN IDEAL GAS
Kinetic theory of gases is based on the molecular picture of matter. According to which
(1) A given amount of gas is a mixture of very large number of identical molecules of the order of Avogadro’s number.
(2) The molecules are moving randomly in all directions.
(3) At ordinary temperature and pressure, the size of the molecules is very small as compared to the
distances between them. Thus, the interaction between them is negligible. Hence, they move according
to Newton’s laws of motion.
(4) The molecules do not exert any force of attraction or repulsion on each other, except during collisions.
(5) The collisions of molecules against each other or with the walls of the container are perfectly elastic.
Such that the momentum and the kinetic energy of the system of molecules are conserved during
collisions, though their individual velocities change.
z Pressure of an Ideal Gas

Consider an ideal gas enclosed in a cube of side l and volume V. Let the co-ordinate axes be taken parallel
to the sides of the cube, as shown in figure given below. The total number of molecules of gas is N and
average of the squared speed is v 2 . z
Pressure of Gas
1 mNv2 (vx, vy, vz)

P= …(i)
3 V (–vx, vy, vz)
1 2
P= v …(ii) x
3
y
2E
P= …(iii) Fig.: Elastic collision of a gas molecule with the wall of the container.
3V
So pressure of the gas is two third of kinetic energy per unit volume.
Example 8 : If the mass of each molecule of a gas is doubled and speed is halved, then find the ratio of initial and
final pressure.
1M 2
Solution : P v
3V
1M 2
P1  v1
3V
1 M2 2
P2  v2
3 V
P1 M1 v12 M v2
   
P2 M2 v 22 2M 1 v 2
4
4 2
P1 : P2    2 :1
2 1
Example 9 : A gas is filled in a vessel at a certain temperature and at a pressure of 80 cm of mercury. At the same
temperature, more gas is filled in the vessel so that its mass increases by 60%. Determine the
resultant pressure in the vessel.
1M 2
Solution : P v
3V
At constant temperature the value of v 2 remains constant. Then, if V is constant we have

PM
On increasing the mass of the gas by 60%, the pressure will also increase by 60%. Hence, the
final pressure of the gas is
 60 
80 cm   80   cm  128 cm (of mercury)
 100 
z Kinetic Interpretation of Temperature

The pressure exerted by an ideal gas is given by
1 mNv2
P
3 V
1 
mv 2  N
2  2 
P
3 V
2E
P
3V
3
E  PV
2
3
E  NK BT
2
E 3
 K BT
N 2
So we can see that the average kinetic energy of a molecule is proportional to the absolute temperature of
the gas. It is independent of pressure, volume or the nature of the ideal gas. This is a fundamental result
relating the temperature to the internal energy of a molecule. This is kinetic interpretation of temperature.
z Root mean square speed (vrms)
The rms speed (root mean square speed) is defined as the square root, of the mean of the squares, of the
random speeds of the individual molecules of a gas.
Assume random speed of the molecules of gas are v1, v2, v3 … vn.
1
 v 2  v 22  v 32    v n2  2
v rms  1 
 n 
According to kinetic theory, pressure of ideal gas
1 mNv2
P=
3 V
3PV = mN A v 2 (if N = NA)
3PV
v2 
M
3RT 3kBT
Becuase vrms = 
M m
Where
M : mass of one mole of gas
m : Mass of one molecule of gas
z Average speed (vav) : It is the arithmetic mean of the speed of molecules of a given gas at a given
temperature.

v1  v 2  .....
v av 
N
and according to kinetic theory,
8RT 8K BT 8
v av    v  0.92 v rms
M m 3 rms
where M : Mass of one mole of gas
and m : Mass of one molecule of gas
z Most probable speed (vmp) : It is the speed possessed by maximum number of molecules in a given gas
at a given temperature.
2RT 2K BT 2
v mp    v  0.82 v rms
M m 3 rms
Example 10 : If the pressure remains constant, find the temperature at which root mean square speed of a gas
is half of its value at 27°C.
Solution : At constant pressure, rms speed depends only on the temperature
v rms  v 2  T
v rms T1


v rms T2
v rms 300

v rms 273  t
2
300
2
273  t
Squaring both sides, we get
300
4
273  t
1092 + 4t = 300
4t = – 1092 + 300 = – 792
792
t–  –198C
4
Example 11 : The density of carbon-dioxide gas at 0°C and at pressure of 1.0 × 105 Nm–2 is 1.98 kg m–3, find
the root mean square velocity of its molecules at 0°C and 30°C.
Solution : According to the kinetic theory, the pressure P of a gas is given by
1 2
P v
3
where  is the density of the gas and v 2 the mean square velocity of its molecules.
3P
 vrms  v 2 

Here, P = 1.0 × 105 Nm–2,
 = 1.98 kg m–3
3  1.0  105
 vrms =
1.98
= 389 m/s
Again, from the kinetic theory, the root mean square speed is directly proportional to the square
root of the absolute temperature.
vrms  T
(v rms )30 273  30

(v rms )0 = 273
303
=
273
= 1.053
 (vrms)30 = (vrms)0 × 1.053
= 389 × 1.053
= 410 m/s
LAW OF EQUIPARTITION OF ENERGY

A molecule to move in space needs three coordinates to specify its location and the translational kinetic
energy of such a molecule is
1 1 1
E mv x2  mv y2  mv z2
2 2 2
For a gas in thermal equilibrium at temperature T, the average value of energy denoted by E is
1 1 1 3
E  mv x2  mv y2  mv z2  kBT
2 2 2 2
1
Therefore, energy associated with each direction is kBT .
2
Thus a molecule free to move in space has three translational degree of freedom.
DEGREES OF FREEDOM
Degrees of freedom of a system is defined as the total number of co-ordinates or independent quantities
required to describe the position and configuration of the system completely or the number of ways by which
a gas molecule can acquire energy called degree of freedom.
(i) The molecules of a monoatomic gas (like neon, argon, helium etc.) consists only of one atom so can
be assumed as a point mass, so it has only 3 degree of freedom corresponding to translational motion.
(ii) The molecules of diatomic gases like O2, N2, H2 etc., can be assumed as a dumbbell. So it has 5
degrees of freedom, 3 translational and 2 rotational.
Since total energy is given as Y
E = ET + Er + Ev
X
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
E = mv x2  mv y2  mv z2  I x 2  I y 2  Iz 2  v 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Ix  0, (At low temperature) Ev = 0 Z
1 1 1 1 1
 E= mv x2  mv y2  mv z2  I y 2  Iz 2
2 2 2 2 2
(iii) At very high temperature about 3000 K, there are 7 degrees of freedom, 3 Translational, 2 rotational and
2 vibrational, for diatomic gases.
(iv) Linear molecule (Triatomic) have 5 degrees of freedom.
(v) Non linear molecule (Triatomic) have 6 degrees of freedom.
1
(vi) Energy of each degree of freedom of one mole of gas E = RT
2
1 dE
(vii) Molar specific heat at constant volume Cv =
n dT
S. No. Atomicity No. of degree Total energy Cv 

dU
CP = Cv + R   CP
of freedom dT Cv
3 3 5 5
1 Monoatomic 3 RT Cv  R CP  R
2 2 2 3
5 5 7 7
2 Diatomic 5 RT Cv  R CP  R
2 2 2 5
Linear 5 5 7 7
3 5 RT Cv  R CP  R
triatomic 2 2 2 5
Non-linear 6 6 4
4 6 RT Cv  R CP = 4 R
triatomic 2 2 3
 3R
f R
(viii) Molar specific heat at constant volume Cv = 
2  1
 f 
(ix) Molar specific heat at constant pressure CP = R  1  
 2
2
(x) Ratio of molar specific heats  = 1 +
f
Example 12 : Calculate the average kinetic energy of oxygen molecule at 0°C. (R = 8.314 J mol–1 K –1,
NA = 6.02 × 1023).
Solution : Oxygen is diatomic molecule, therefore it has 5 degrees of freedom, 3 translational 2 rotational.
5
 K.E.  kBT
2
5 RT
K.E. 
2 NA
5 8.314
T = 0°C = 273 K =   273 = 9.4 × 10–21 J
2 6.023  1023
Example 13 : Calculate the ratio of K.E. of molecule of neon and oxygen gas at 27°C.
Solution : For neon : It is monatomic, therefore it has 3 degrees of freedom
3
(K.E.)neon  kBT
2
For oxygen gas number of degree of freedom is 5
5
 (K.E.)oxygen  kBT
2
5
kBT
5
Hence ratio of their K.E.  2 
3
k T 3
2 B
Example 14 : Calculate the molar specific heat at constant volume of neon gas.
(R = 8.314 J mol–1 K–1)
3
Solution : Average energy of one molecule of neon gas is given by kBT (monatomic hence have 3 degrees
2
of freedom)
3
Total energy = U = (K.E.) × NA  kB N AT
2
3
U RT
2
Specific heat at constant volume
dU 3
Cv   R
dT 2
3
  8.314
2
= 12.47 J mol–1 K–1
= 2.96 cal mol–1 K–1
Example 15 : The molar specific heats of an ideal gas at constant volume and constant pressure are respectively
4.98 and 6.96 cal mol–1 K –1. If the molecular weight of the gas be 32, then calculate the
root-mean square speed of the molecules of the gas at 120°C. (1 cal = 4.2 J)
Solution : Cp – Cv = R
R = 6.96 – 4.98 = 1.98 cal mol–1 K–1 = 2
R = 1.98 × 4.2 = 8.316 J mol–1 K–1
1 3
Mv 2  RT
2 2
3RT
v2 
M
3RT
v rms  v 2 
M
Here, M = 32 g mol–1 = 32 × 10–3 kg mol–1

and T = 120°C + 273 = 393 K
3  8.316  393
 vrms =
32  10 –3
= 553.53 ms–1
MEAN FREE PATH

The average distance travelled by molecules between two successive collisions, called the mean free path
(l) which is given by
1
l
2nd 2
Where
d = diameter of molecule
n = number of molecule per unit volume
As we know that
PV = N KBT
N 
P =   K BT
V 
P = n KBT
P
n=
K BT
K BT
l=
2d 2P
1
 l  T and l 
P
Example 16 : Calculate the ratio of the mean free path of the molecules of two gases if the ratio of the number
density per cm3 of the gases is 5 : 3 and the ratio of the diameters of the molecules of the gases
is 4 : 5.
1
Solution : l1 
2n1d12
1
l2 
2n2d 22
l1 n2 d 22

l 2 n1d12
n1 5

n2 3
n2 3
 
n1 5
d1 4

d2 5
d2 5
 
d1 4
l1 3 5 5 15
   
l 2 5 4 4 16
l1 : l2 = 15 : 16
Example 17 : For a molecule of an ideal gas n = 3 × 108 cm–3 and mean free path is 10–2 cm. Calculate the
diameter of the molecule.
Solution : Mean free path is given by
1
l
2nd 2
1
d2 
2nl
1
d2 
2  3.14  3  108  10–2
10 –6

1.414  3.14  3
d  7.5  10 –8  7.5  10 –4
d = 2.7 × 10–4 cm
Hence, the diameter of the molecule of the gas is 2.7 × 10–4 cm.
EXERCISE
Cp
1. Each molecule of a gas has f degree of freedom. The ratio   for the gas is
Cv
f 1
(1) 1  (2) 1 
2 f
2 f
(3) 1 (4)
f 2
2. At constant pressure the r.m.s. velocity c is related to density d as
1
(1) c  d (2) c 
d
1
(3) c  d (4) c 
d
3. The mean rotational kinetic energy of diatomic molecule at temperature T is
1 5
(1) kT (2) kT
2 2
3
(3) kT (4) kT
4
4. A jar has a mixture of hydrogen and oxygen gases in the ratio 1 : 5, the ratio of mean kinetic energy of
hydrogen and oxygen molecule is
(1) 1 : 16 (2) 1 : 4
(3) 1 : 5 (4) 1 : 1
5. The rms speed of the molecules of enclosed gas is v. What will be the rms speed if pressure is doubled
keeping the temperature same?
(1) 3 v (2) 4 v
(3) v (4) 5 v
PV
6. The figure shows the plot of vs P, for oxygen gas at two different temperatures then
nT
PV T2
nT T1
(1) T1 > T2 (2) T2 > T1
(3) T1 = T2 (4) May be (1) & (2)
7. Temperature of ideal gas is increased from 27°C to 927°C, the rms speed of molecule will become
(1) Twice (2) Half
(3) Four times (4) One fourth
8. Which of the following gas possesses maximum rms velocity? All being at same temperature
(1) Oxygen (2) Carbon dioxide
(3) Hydrogen (4) Helium
9. A container is filled with a sample of gas having n molecules with speed , 2, 3, .... n. The ratio of average
speed to root mean square speed is
3(n  1) (n  1)
(1) (2)
2(2n  1) 2(2n  1)
5(2n  2) 3(n  2)
(3) (4)
7(3n  1) 5(3n  2)
10. A vessel contains a non-linear triatomic gas. If 50% of gas dissociate into individual atom, then find new value
of degree of freedom by ignoring the vibrational mode and any further dissociation.
(1) 2.15 (2) 3.75
(3) 5.25 (4) 6.35

t
en
nm nment
sig ssig
As A Assignment
Assignment
5. The average kinetic energy of a gas molecule at
SECTION - A 27°C is 6.2 × 10–21 J. Its average kinetic energy at
NCERT Based MCQs 227°C will be [NCERT Pg. 330]
1. One mole of ideal gas follows a law according to (1) 58.6 × 10–21 J
(2) 8.32 × 10–21 J
a
that its pressure varies with volume as P  (3) 10.33 × 10–21 J
V
1
b (4) 13.72 × 10–21 J
(where a and b are positive constant). The 6. Translational kinetic energy of hydrogen molecules
temperature of gas at volume V = a is at room temperature is 30 J. Their rotational kinetic
[NCERT Pg. 325] energy is [NCERT Pg. 334]
(1) 30 J
a2 b
(1) (2) abR (2) 20 J
(b  a ) R
(3) 10 J
ab ab
(3) (b  a ) R (4) (b – a ) R (4) 48 J
7. The volume of a certain mass of gas at constant
2. Which of the following is incorrect? (Where
pressure is doubled to its value at 0°C.
symbols have their usual meaning)
The temperature of the gas will be
[NCERT Pg. 334] [NCERT Pg. 326]
CP R (1) 173°C
(1)   C (2) CV 
V  1 (2) 273 K
R 2 (3) 273°C
(3) CP  (4)   1 
 1 f (4) 173 K
7 8. The rms speed of a molecule of oxygen at 127°C
3. 2 moles of a gas having   is mixed with
5 is half that of a molecule of hydrogen at
5
1 mole of a gas having   . The  for the [NCERT Pg. 330]
3
mixture will be [NCERT Pg. 334] (1) 100 K
5 19 (2) 273 K
(1) (2)
11 13 (3) 173 K
13 15 (4) 100°C
(3) (4)
19 11 9. Five molecules of a gas have speeds 1, 2, 3, 4 and
4. By what percentage should the pressure of a given 5 km/s. The ratio of rms speed to the average
mass of a gas be increased so as to decrease its speed of the gas molecule will be
volume by 10% at a constant temperature?
[NCERT Pg. 328]
[NCERT Pg. 326]
(1) 10 : 3 (2) 11 : 3
(1) 10% (2) 9.1%
(3) 11.1% (4) 12% (3) 3 : 10 (4) 3 : 10
10. The graph between mean free path and number 6. Three molecules of a gas have speeds 2, 3 and
density for a gas molecule will be 4 km/s. In such case the root mean square speed
[NCERT Pg. 336] of gas molecules can be calculated as
(1) Straight line (1) 3 km/s (2) 6 km /s

(2) Parabola
17 29
(3) Circle (3) km/s (4) km /s
8 3
(4) Rectangular hyperbola 7. The RMS speed of hydrogen gas molecules at
27°C is v. The RMS speed of oxygen gas
SECTION - B
molecules at 927°C will be
Objective Type Questions
v
1. Which of the following assumptions on ideal gas is (1) (2) 2v
2
true?
v v
(1) Its molecules are considerably bigger (3) (4)
2 4
(2) Molecules apply attractive force on each other
8. The RMS speed of an ideal gas is v. If the
(3) Molecules are in random motion pressure of the gas molecules is quadrupled while
(4) All of these keeping the temperature constant, then the new
RMS speed will be
2. A container has 64 g of O2 at temperature T and
pressure P. If same container has 8 g of H2 at (1) 2v (2) v
temperature 2T, then its pressure will be v v
(3) (4)
(1) P 2 4
(2) 2P 9. Two perfect gases at absolute temperature T1 and
T2 are mixed in a closed vessel. Their number of
(3) 4P
moles is N1 and N2 respectively. Assuming no heat
(4) 8P loss to the surroundings, the final temperature of
3. The equation of state corresponding to 56 g of N2 the mixture will be
is
T1  T2 N1T1  N2T2
(1) (2)
(1) PV = RT 2 2
(2) PV = 2RT N1T1  N2T2
(3) T1T2 (4) N1  N2
RT
(3) PV =
2 10. The rotational kinetic energy of two moles of
(4) PV = 4RT monatomic gas at 27°C is equal to
4. 1 g of H2 at 30ºC is mixed with 14 g of N2 at 40°C. (1) 400 R

Neglecting the vibrational mode, the temperature of
(2) 1200 R
the mixture is
(3) 300 R
(1) 32ºC (2) 35ºC
(4) Zero
(3) 34ºC (4) 38ºC
11. The mean free path of an ideal gas in a closed
5. A mixture of ideal gases has 1 mole of Ne,
2 moles of N2 and 3 moles of ozone at absolute container remains same if
temperature T. The internal energy of the mixture (1) Temperature increases
is
(2) Temperature decreases
(1) 15 RT (2) 16 RT
(3) Temperature remains constant
31RT
(3) (4) 7 RT (4) All of these
2
12. In Maxwell’s speed distribution curve, on increasing 19. The temperature at which rms velocity O2 molecule
temperature the number of gas molecules having is same as helium molecules at STP.
most probable speed (1) 2184 K (2) 2184° C
(1) Decreases (3) 2184° F (4) 819° C
(2) Increases 20. The mean free path of benzene molecule is
6 × 10–6 m and average speed of molecules is
(3) May increase or decrease
1.2 × 103 m/s. The collision rate of molecules, is
(4) Remains constant
(1) 3 × 107 s–1 (2) 4 × 108 s–1
13. Which one of the following is not an assumption of (3) 4 × 107 s–1 (4) 2 × 108 s–1
kinetic theory of gases?
21. Mean free path of the gas molecules depends on
(1) The volume of a gas molecule is negligible its pressure as (assume temperature to be
(2) The gravitational attraction between the gas constant)
molecules is negligible (1) P (2) P–1
(3) The density of gas is same at all points (3) P–2 (4) P0
(4) The change in momentum of gas molecules is CP
negligible 22. For a gas  3, then gas may be
R
14. The average velocity of gas molecules is
(1) Monatomic
proportional to
(2) Diatomic
1 3
(1) (2) (3) Polyatomic
T2 T2
(4) Mixture of monatomic and diatomic
(3) T (4) T 0
23. A monatomic ideal gas is given 200 J of energy at
15. If masses of all gas molecules of a gas are halved constant pressure. The increase in internal energy
and their speeds are doubled then the ratio of initial of gas will be
and final pressure will be
(1) 80 J (2) 100 J
(1) 1 : 3 (2) 2 : 3 (3) 120 J (4) 200 J
(3) 1 : 2 (4) 3 : 4 24. An ideal gas is kept in a closed container if it is
16. The mean free path for a gas is equal to (where n transferred to a train moving with high speed, then
is number of gas molecules per unit volume, d is temperature of gas will
diameter of gas molecules). (1) Increase
1 1 (2) Decrease
(1) (2) 2
2n 2nd (3) Remains constant
1 1 (4) May increase or decrease, depending on
(3) 3 (4) 3/2 nature of gas
2nd 2d
17. Kinetic energy per unit volume of H2 gas at NTP is 25. The mean free path of molecules of gas depends
on the radius of gas molecule as
(1) 3.2 × 106 J (2) 1.5 × 105 J
(1)   r
(3) 4.6 × 106 J (4) 1.2 × 103 J
1
18. The temperature of gas at which its rms velocity (2)  
r2
becomes double to that at 0°C, is
(3)   r 2
(1) 1092°C (2) 819°C
1
(3) 819 K (4) 1092°F (4)  
r
5. A given sample of an ideal gas occupies a volume

SECTION - C
V at a pressure P and absolute temperature T. The
Previous Years Questions mass of each molecule of the gas is m. Which of
the following gives the density of the gas?
 Cp 
1. The value of     , for hydrogen, helium and [NEET(Phase-2)-2016]
 Cv 
P Pm
another ideal diatomic gas X (whose molecules (1) (2)
(kT ) (kT )
are not rigid but have an additional vibrational
mode), are respectively equal to, P
(3) (4) mkT
(kTV )
[NEET-2019 (Odisha)]
6. The molecules of a given mass of a gas have
7 5 7 7 5 9 r.m.s. velocity of 200 m s–1 at 27°C and 1.0 ×
(1) , , (2) , ,
5 3 5 5 3 7 105 N m–2 pressure. When the temperature and
pressure of the gas are respectively, 127°C and
5 7 9 5 7 7 0.05 × 10 5 N m –2 , the r.m.s. velocity of its
(3) , , (4) , ,
3 5 7 3 5 5 molecules in m s–1 is [NEET-2016]
2. Increase in temperature of a gas filled in a 100
(1) (2) 100 2
container would lead to : [NEET-2019] 3
(1) Increase in its mass 400 100 2
(3) (4)
(2) Increase in its kinetic energy 3 3
7. Two vessels separately contain two ideal gases A
(3) Decrease in its pressure and B at the same temperature, the pressure of A
(4) Decrease in intermolecular distance being twice that of B. Under such conditions, the
density of A is found to be 1.5 times the density
3. At what temperature will the rms speed of oxygen of B. The ratio of molecular weight of A and B is
molecules become just sufficient for escaping from
[Re-AIPMT-2015]
the Earth's atmosphere?
1 2
(Given : (1) (2)
2 3
Mass of oxygen molecule (m) = 2.76 × 10–26 kg 3
(3) (4) 2
Boltzmann's constant kB = 1.38 × 10–23 JK–1) 4
8. 4.0 g of a gas occupies 22.4 litres at NTP. The
[NEET-2018] specific heat capacity of the gas at constant
(1) 2.508 × 104 K volume is 5.0 J K–1 mol–1. If the speed of sound in
this gas at NTP is 952 ms –1 , then the heat
(2) 8.360 × 104 K capacity at constant pressure is (Take gas
constant R = 8.3 JK–1 mol–1) [Re-AIPMT-2015]
(3) 1.254 × 104 K
(1) 8.5 JK–1 mol–1 (2) 8.0 JK–1 mol–1
(4) 5.016 × 104 K
(3) 7.5 JK–1 mol–1 (4) 7.0 JK–1 mol–1
4. A gas mixture consists of 2 moles of O 2 and
4 moles of Ar at temperature T. Neglecting all CP
9. The ratio of the specific heats   in terms of
vibrational modes, the total internal energy of the Cv
system is [NEET-2017] degrees of freedom (n) is given by
[AIPMT-2015]
(1) 4 RT
 n  1
(2) 15 RT (1)  1   (2)  1  
 2  n 
(3) 9 RT
 n  2
(3)  1   (4)  1  
(4) 11 RT  3  n
10. The mean free path of molecules of a gas, (radius r) 16. For a certain gas the ratio of specific heats is given
is inversely proportional to [AIPMT-2014] to be  = 1.5. For this gas
(1) r3 (2) r2 3R 3R
(1) Cv  (2) C p 
(3) r (4) r J J
11. The amount of heat energy required to raise the 5R 5R

(3) C p  (4) Cv 
temperature of 1 g of Helium at NTP, from T1K to J J
T2K is [NEET-2013] 17. According to kinetic theory of gases, at absolute
3 3 zero temperature
(1) N k (T – T1) (2) N k (T – T1)
2 a B 2 4 a B 2 (1) Water freezes
3  T2  3 (2) Liquid helium freezes
4 a B  T1 
(3) Nk (4) N k (T – T1)
8 a B 2
(3) Molecular motion stops
12. At 10°C the value of the density of a fixed mass of (4) Liquid hydrogen freezes
an ideal gas divided by its pressure is x. At 110°C
18. One mole of an ideal monoatomic gas requires
this ratio is [AIPMT (Prelims)-2008]
207 J heat to raise the temperature by 10 K when
283 heated at constant pressure. If the same gas is
(1) x (2) x
383 heated at constant volume to raise the temperature
383 10 by the same 10 K, the heat required is [Given the
(3) x (4) x
283 110 gas constant R = 8.3 J/mol-K]
13. Two container A and B are partly filled with water (1) 198.7 J
and closed. The volume of A is twice that of B and
it contains half the amount of water in B. If both (2) 29 J
are at same temperature, the water vapour in the (3) 215.3 J
container will have pressure in the ratio of
(4) 124 J
(1) 1 : 2
(2) 1 : 1 19. Relation between pressure (P) and average
translational kinetic energy per unit volume of gas
(3) 2 : 1
(E) is
(4) 4 : 1
2
14. At constant volume, temperature is increased then (1) P  E
3
(1) Collision on walls will be less
1
(2) Number of collisions per unit time will increase (2) P  E
3
(3) Collisions will be in straight lines
1
(4) Collisions will not change (3) P  E
2
15. A polyatomic gas with n degree of freedom has a (4) P = 3E
mean energy per molecule given by
20. If Cs be the velocity of sound in air and C be the
nKT rms velocity, then
(1)
N
(1) Cs < C
nKT
(2) (2) Cs =C
2N
nKT 
1/2
(3)
2 (3) Cs  C  
3
nKT (4) None of these
(4)
4
21. The temperature of gas is raised from 27°C to 2. Two glass bulbs of equal volume are connected by
927°C. The rms speed is a narrow tube and filled with a gas at temperature
27ºC and pressure 77 cm of Hg. One of the bulbs
927 is now kept at temperature 127ºC, then new
(1) times the earlier value pressure inside the bulb is
27
(1) 80 cm of Hg
(2) Remain the same (2) 76 cm of Hg
(3) Gets halved (3) 88 cm of Hg
(4) Get doubled (4) 90 cm of Hg
22. The equation of state, corresponding to 8 g of O2 3. 2 moles of monatomic gas at temperature 27ºC is
is mixed with 3 moles of diatomic gas at temperature
127ºC, then temperature of mixture is
RT approximately
(1) PV = 8RT (2) PV 
4 (1) 98ºC
RT (2) 57ºC
(3) PV = RT (4) PV 
2
(3) 37ºC
23. At 0 K, which of the following properties of a gas
(4) 87ºC
will be zero?
4. An atom in a solid has degree of freedom due to
(1) Kinetic energy (2) Potential energy its
(3) Density (4) Mass (i) Translational motion
24. The degrees of freedom of a non-linear triatomic (ii) Rotational motion
gas is (iii) Vibrational motion
(consider moderate temperature) (1) (i), (ii) & (iii) (2) (ii) & (iii)
(1) 6 (2) 4 (3) (iii) (4) (i) & (iii)
(3) 2 (4) 8 5. The r.m.s. speed of N2 molecules in a gas is v. If

the temperature is doubled and the N2 molecule
25. In a vessel, the gas is at a pressure P. If the mass dissociate into Nitrogen atoms, then the r.m.s.
of all the molecules is halved and their speed is speed will become
doubled, then the resultant pressure will be
(1) v (2) v 2
(1) 4P (2) 2P
(3) 2v (4) 4v
(3) P (4) P/2
6. If radius of a nitrogen molecule to be roughly
1.0 Å, then mean free path of nitrogen molecule in
SECTION - D a cylinder containing nitrogen at 2 atm and
NEET Booster Questions temperature 17°C (Molecular mass of nitrogen
= 28 g) is
1 (1) 0.10 m (2) 0.20 m
1. A vessel of volume 2  10–3 m3 contains mole
10
(3) 5.5 m (4) 0.33 m
2 7. A horizontal tube of length l closed at both ends
of hydrogen gas and mole of helium.
10 contain an ideal gas of molecular mass M. The
If temperature of the mixture is 300 K, then the tube is rotated with angular velocity  about a
pressure of gas (R = 8.31 J/mole K) is nearly vertical axis passing through an end. If temperature
is constant and P1, P2 are pressures at free end
(1) 275 kPa
and fixed end respectively, then
(2) 375 kPa
(1) P1 < P2 (2) P1 > P2
(3) 250 kPa
P2
(4) 125 kPa (3) P1 = P2 (4) P1 
2
8. If one mole of monatomic gas is mixed with one 14. On a pressure-temperature (P-T) diagram the
mole of diatomic gas then the value of  for mixture thermodynamic process A-B has been shown.
is ( = adiabatic exponent) During the process of the ideal gas
(1) 1.40 (2) 1.50
P B
(3) 1.53 (4) 3.07
9. Two vessels contain two different ideal gases A and A
B at same temperature. If the ratio of molecular
weights of A and B is 3 : 4 then ratio of densities
of A and B, if ratio of pressure is 8 : 9, is T
(1) 3 : 2
(1) Pressure decreases
(2) 2 : 3
(2) Temperature decreases
(3) 1 : 3
(3) Volume decreases
(4) 3 : 1
(4) Volume increases
10. If a container of fixed volume has a mixture of one
mole of hydrogen and one mole of helium in 15. If A, B, C represent rms, average and most
equilibrium at temperature T, then average internal probable speed respectively of an ideal gas, then
energy per mole of gas mixture is which of the following relations is true?
(1) 2RT (1) A < B < C
(2) 3RT (2) B > C > A

(3) RT (3) C > B < A
(4) 4RT (4) A > B > C
11. A closed container has two non-reactive gases 16. For a mixture of gases containing n1 moles of
neon and oxygen with their partial pressure ratio monatomic gas and n2 moles of diatomic gas. The
3 : 2. If the atomic mass of Ne = 20.2 u and ratio of specific heat at constant pressure and
molecular mass of O2 is 32 u, then the ratio of constant volume (= Cp/Cv) is given as
their mass density is approximately
3n1  5n2
(1) 0.947 (1) 2(n  n )
1 2
(2) 1.236
(3) 4.218 5n1  7n2
(2) 2(n  n )
(4) 6.329 1 2
12. How many degrees of freedom is contributed by

5 n1  7 n2
each vibration mode in gas molecules? (3) 3 n  5 n
1 2
(1) 2
(2) 4 7 n1  5 n2
(4) 5 n  3 n
(3) 6 1 2
(4) 3 17. If in an ideal gas r is radius of molecule, P is

13. A gas mixture consists of 2 moles of Oxygen and pressure, T is absolute temperature and k is
4 moles of Argon at temperature T. Neglecting all Boltzmann’s constant, then mean free path  of
vibrational modes, the total energy of the system gas molecules is given as
is
(1) 15RT kP kT
(1) 2 (2)
4 2 r T 4  2 r 2P
(2) 11RT
(3) 9RT 4 2 PT 4  2 kT
(3) 2 (4)
(4) 4RT kr Pr 2
18. An ideal gas is enclosed in a container of volume 24. If heat energy is given to an ideal gas at constant
V at a pressure P. It is being pumped out of the pressure, then select the graph which best
container by using a pump with stroke volume v. represents the variation of VT with temperature (T).
What is final pressure in container after n-stroke of
the pump? (assume temperature remains same) VT VT
n PV
 V 
(1) P   (2)
V  v  (V  v )n (1) (2)
n T T
Vn  V 
(3) P (4) P  
vn V  v  VT VT
19. Variation of atmospheric pressure, with height from
earth is
(3) (4)
(1) Linear (2) Parabolic
(3) Exponential (4) Hyperbolic T T
20. An ideal gas is filled in a closed container and 25. The temperature (T) of one mole of an ideal gas
container is moving with uniform acceleration in varies with its volume (V) as T = –V 3 + V 2,
horizontal direction. Neglect gravity. Pressure inside where  and  are positive constants. The
the container is maximum pressure of gas during this process is
(1) Uniform everywhere (2) Less in front  2 R
(1) (2)
(3) Less at back (4) Less at top 2R 4
21. A container contains 32 g of O2 at a temperature T.
(   )R  2R
The pressure of the gas is P. An identical container (3) (4)
containing 4 g of H2 at a temperature 2T has a 22 2
pressure of 26. Nitrogen gas is filled in an insulated container. If 
(1) 8P (2) 4P fraction of moles dissociates without exchange of
any energy, then the fractional change in its
(3) P (4) 18P temperature is
22. An ideal gas is expanding such that PT = constant.
– 
The coefficient of volume expansion of the gas is (1) (2)
5 3
1 2
(1) (2) –3 5
T T (3) (4)
2 2  3
3 4 27. An ideal gas undergoes a polytropic given by
(3) (4) equation PVn = constant. If molar heat capacity of
T T
gas during this process is arithmetic mean of its
23. Pressure versus temperature graph of an ideal gas molar heat capacity at constant pressure and
is as shown in figure. Density of the gas at point constant volume then value of n is
A is 0. Density at point B will be
(1) Zero (2) –1
P
(3) +1 (4) 
3P0 B 28. Nitrogen gas N2 of mass 28 g is kept in a vessel
at pressure of 10 atm and temperature 57ºC. Due
P0 to leakage of N2 gas its pressure falls to 5 atm and
A temperature to 27ºC. The amount of N2 gas leaked
T out is
T0 2T0
5 63
3 3 (1) g (2) g
(1) 0 (2) 0 63 5
4 2
4 28 63
(3) 0 (4) 20 (3) g (4) g
3 63 28
29. At room temperature the rms speed of the 35. The value of critical temperature in terms of van der
molecules of a certain diatomic gas is found to be Waals’ constants a and b is given by
1920 m/s. The gas is
8a 27a
(1) H2 (2) F2 (1) TC  (2) TC 
27Rb 8Rb
(3) Cl2 (4) O2
a a
30. One mole of monatomic gas and three moles of (3) TC  (4) TC 
2Rb 27Rb
diatomic gas are put together in a container. The
molar specific heat (in JK–1 mol–1) at constant 36. Three perfect gases at absolute temperatures T1,
volume is (Let R = 8 JK–1 mol–1) T2 and T3 are mixed. If number of molecules of the
gases are n 1 , n 2 and n 3 respectively then
(1) 18 (2) 19 temperature of mixture will be (assume no loss of
(3) 20 (4) 21 energy)
31. A narrow glass tube, 80 cm long and opens at both T1  T2  T3 n12T1  n22T2  n32T3
ends, is half immersed in mercury, now the top of (1) (2)
3 n1  n2  n3
the tube is closed and is taken out of mercury. A
column of mercury 20 cm long remains in the tube. n1T1  n2T2  n3T3 T1  T2  T3
Find atmospheric pressure (3) n1  n2  n3 (4) n  n  n
1 2 3
(1) 20 cm of air column
37. The temperature of a gas is –68°C. At what
(2) 60 cm of Hg column temperature will the average kinetic energy of its
(3) 60 cm of air column molecules be twice that of –68°C?
(4) 20 cm of Hg column (1) 137°C (2) 127°C
32. Two closed containers of equal volume filled with air (3) 100°C (4) 105°C
at pressure P 0 and temperature T 0. Both are 38. One kg of a diatomic gas is at pressure of 8 × 104
connected by a narrow tube. If one of the N/m 2. The density of the gas is 4 kg/m 3. The
container is maintained at temperature T0 and other energy of the gas due to its thermal motion will be
at temperature T, then new pressure in the
containers will be (1) 3 × 104 J (2) 5 × 104 J
(3) 6 × 104 J (4) 7 × 104 J
2P0T P0T
(1) T  T (2) T  T 39. 50 cal of heat is required to raise the temperature
0 0
of 1 mole of an ideal gas from 20°C to 25°C, while
P0T T  T0 the pressure of the gas is kept constant. The
(3) 2(T  T ) (4) P0 amount of heat required to raise the temperature of
0
the same gas through same temperature range at
33. If different ideal gases are at the same temperature, constant volume is (R = 2 cal/mol/K)
pressure and have same volume, then all gases
have same (1) 70 cal (2) 60 cal
(1) Density (3) 40 cal (4) 50 cal
(2) Number of molecules 40. The energy (in eV) possessed by a neon atom at
27°C is
(3) Most probable speed
(1) 1.72  10–3 (2) 4.75  10–4
(4) Internal energy per mole
(3) 3.88  10–2 (4) 3.27  10–5
34. According to C.E. van der Waal, the interatomic
41. If hydrogen gas is heated to a very high
potential varies with the average interatomic
temperature, then the fraction of energy possessed
distance (R) as
by gas molecules correspond to rotational motion
(1) R–1
3 2
(2) R–2 (1) (2)
5 7
(3) R–4
3 2
(3) (4)
(4) R–6 7 5
42. If  moles of a monoatomic gas are mixed with  45. To find out degree of freedom, the expression is
moles of a polyatomic gas and mixture behaves 2  1
like diatomic gas, then [neglect the vibrational mode (1) f    1 (2) f 
2
of freedom]
2 1
(3) f    1 (4) f    1
(1) 2 =  (2)  = 2
46. A diatomic gas of molecular mass 40 g/mol is
(3)  = –3 (4) 3 = –
filled in a rigid container at temperature 30ºC. It is
43. The internal energy of 10 g of nitrogen at N.T.P. is moving with velocity 200 m/s. If it is suddenly
about stopped, the rise in the temperature of the gas is
(1) 2575 J (2) 2025 J 32 320

(1) ºC (2) ºC
R R
(3) 3721 J (4) 4051 J
3200 3.2
(3) ºC (4) ºC
44. The mean free path of a molecule of He gas is . R R
Its mean free path along any arbitrary coordinate 47. The ratio of average translatory kinetic energy of
axis will be He gas molecules to O2 gas molecules is
 25 21
(1)  (2) (1) (2)
3 21 25
 3
(3) (4) 3 (3) (4) 1
3 2

Chapter 14
Oscillations
Chapter Contents
z Periodic and Oscillatory When we look around us, we often find objects moving back and
Motions forth repeatedly. During an earthquake, buildings may be set
oscillating so strongly that they are shaken apart. When an airplane
z Period and Frequency is in flight, wings may oscillate due to turbulence of the air, resulting
in metal fatigue and even failure.
z Harmonic and Non Harmonic
Resonance appears to be one reason behind collapse of buildings.
Motion
Aircraft designers ensure that none of the natural angular frequencies
z Displacement at which a wing can oscillate matches the angular frequency of the
engine in flight (you will find reasons for these two in the section on
z Simple Harmonic Motion and forced oscillations and resonance-chapter in daily life).
Uniform Circular Motion
In this chapter we shall study simple harmonic motion, periodic
z Displacement, Velocity and motion of pendulum and spring mass system, damped and forced
Acceleration in Simple oscillations and many more interesting topics.
Harmonic Motion
z Force Law for Simple

PERIODIC AND OSCILLATORY MOTIONS
Harmonic Motion
Periodic Motion
z Energy in Simple Harmonic Periodic motion is defined as the motion which repeats itself after
Motion equal intervals of time. The interval of time is called the time
period of periodic motion.
z Some Systems Executing
Simple Harmonic Motion The motion of second, minute and hour arms of a clock is periodic motion.
z Damped Oscillations Oscillatory Motion

z Forced Oscillations and Oscillatory or vibratory motion is defined as a periodic and
Resonance bounded motion of a body about a fixed point.
O is the equilibrium position for the ball placed in hemispherical bowl.
When it is displaced to A, it moves as O  A  O  B  O.
B A
2 Oscillations NEET
In case of a simple pendulum, O is the equilibrium or mean position. As the bob is displaced a little to A,
it oscillates about O. Time taken by the bob from O  A  O  B  O is the time period of the oscillation.
B A
Note : The body is confined within well defined limits (called extreme position) on either side of mean
position.
Difference between Periodic and Oscillatory Motion

Every oscillatory motion is periodic, but every periodic motion need not be oscillatory. e.g., circular motion
(or the motion of planets around the sun) is a periodic motion, but it is not oscillatory, because the basic
concept of to and fro motion about the mean position for oscillatory motion is not present here.
Note : There is no significant difference between oscillations and vibrations. When the frequency is small,
we call it oscillation (like the oscillation of a branch of a tree), when the frequency is high (like the
vibration of a string of a musical instrument), we call it vibration.
PERIOD AND FREQUENCY

Period is the smallest interval of time after which the motion is repeated. It is denoted by the symbol
T. Its SI unit is second.
Frequency is defined as the number of oscillations per unit time. It is the reciprocal of time period T. It is
represented by the symbol .
The relation between  and T is
1

T
Its SI unit is hertz (abbreviated as Hz),

1 hertz = 1 Hz = 1 oscillation per second = 1 s–1
Note : Frequency,  is not necessarily an integer.
HARMONIC AND NON HARMONIC MOTION

z Harmonic oscillation is that oscillation which can be expressed in terms of single harmonic function
(i.e., sine function or cosine function). A harmonic oscillation of constant amplitude and of single
frequency is called simple harmonic motion. Simple harmonic oscillation is the simplest form of
oscillatory motion. This motion arises when the force on the oscillating body is directly proportional to
its displacement from the mean position (or the equilibrium position). Further at any point, in its
oscillation, this force is directed towards the mean position.
NEET Oscillations 3
Mathematically, a SHM can be expressed as
2t
x  A sin t  A sin …(1)
T
2t
or x  A cos t  A cos …(2)
T
Here, x = displacement of body from mean position at any instant t.
A = maximum displacement or amplitude of oscillation.
 2 
 = angular frequency (= 2) =  
T 
 = frequency, T = time period

x x
T T
+A +A
T
2
0 t 0 t
T T 3T T 3T T 3T
4 2 4 2 2
–A –A
Graph of x = Asin t Graph of x = Acost
Figure-a Figure-b
z Non-harmonic oscillation is that oscillation which cannot be expressed in terms of single harmonic
function. It is a combination of two or more than two harmonic oscillations. Mathematically, it may be
expressed as
x = Asint + Bsin2t 

...(3)
2 4t 
or x  A sin t  B sin 
T T 
Graphically, it can be represented by a curve of the type shown in given figure.
x
O t
T T
2
Example 1 : Categorize the motion as periodic or oscillatory motion

(i) Motion of planets around the sun
(ii) A weighted test tube floating in a liquid pressed down and released
(iii) Motion of hands of a clock
Solution : Periodic motion – (i), (ii) and (iii)
Oscillatory motion – (ii)
4 Oscillations NEET
DISPLACEMENT
In general, it refers to the change with time of any physical property under consideration. Consider an
oscillating simple pendulum.
The angle with the vertical as a function of time is the displacement variable.
 
Consider a block attached to a spring, whose other end is fixed to a rigid wall. Here, it is convenient to measure
displacement of the body from its equilibrium position.
Note : The term displacement is not always to be referred in the context of position only. There can be
other kinds of displacement variables, e.g., the voltage across a capacitor, changing with time in an A.C.
circuit, pressure variations in time in the propagation of sound wave, the changing electric and magnetic
fields in a light wave. The displacement variable may take both positive and negative values. The
displacement can be represented as a mathematical function of time. In case of periodic motion, this
function is periodic with time.
One of the simplest periodic functions is given by

f(t) = Acost
If the argument of this function, t is increased by an integral multiple of 2 radians, the value of the function
will be same. In one revolution, the angle covered by the reference particle is 2 radian and time period is
T. If  is uniform angular velocity of the reference particle,
2 2
Then,   or T 
T 
Thus, the function f(t) is periodic with period T

f(t) = f(t + T )
This result is also correct for f(t) = Asint
A linear combination of sine and cosine functions like
f(t) = Asint + Bcost …(1)
is also a periodic function with the same period T.
Take A = D cos …(2)
and B = D sin …(3)
Putting these values in equation (1),
f(t) = D cos sint + D sin cost
= D(sint cos + cost sin)
f(t) = Dsin(t + ) …(4) using sinA cosB + cosA sinB = sin(A + B)
Here, D and  are constant found in the following way
NEET Oscillations 5
Squaring and adding equations (2) & (3), we get
A2 + B2 = D2cos2 + D2sin2
= D2(cos2 + sin2)
= D2
or D  A2  B 2 …(5)
Dividing equation (3) by equation (2), we get
D sin  B

D cos  A
B
tan  
A
B
or   tan–1   …(6)
 A
Example 2 : Which of the following functions of time represented (a) periodic and (b) non-periodic motion? Give
the period for each case of periodic motion ( is any positive constant) (i) sint – cost (ii) log(2t).
Solution : (i) sint – cost is a periodic function. It can be written as
 1 1 
2  sin t  cos t 
 2 2
  
 2  sin t cos  cos t sin 
 4 4 
 
 2 sin  t  
 4 
  
 2 sin  t   2 
 4 
  2   
 2 sin    t  
    4 
2
The periodic time of the function is

(ii) The function log(2t) increases monotonically with time t. It, therefore, never repeats its value
and is a non-periodic function. As t  , log(2t) diverges to . It, therefore, cannot represent
any type of physical displacement.
Example 3 : Categorise the following function of time : sint + cost as

(a) Simple harmonic motion
(b) Periodic but not simple harmonic. Also, give the period.
Solution : sint + cost
 
 sin t  sin   t 
2 
    C D C D
 2sin   cos  t    using sin C  sin D  2sin 2 cos 2 
4  4  
6 Oscillations NEET
1  
 2 cos  t  
2  4
 
 2 cos  t  
 4
2    7 
This function represents a SHM having period T  and phase angle    or   .
  4  4 
 
Example 4 : Categorise the following function of time 3 sin  2t   as (a) SHM, (b) Periodic but not SHM.
 4
Also give the period.
  2  2t 
Solution : 3 sin  2t   represents S.H.M. with time period comparing it with sin    .
 4 2   T 
SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION AND UNIFORM CIRCULAR MOTION

If a body is in uniform circular motion then the projection of uniform circular motion on a diameter of the circle
follows S.H.M.
Let a particle P moves uniformly in a circle of radius A with angular speed  in anti-clockwise direction.
y
P(t = 0)
t

x
O P

The initial position vector of the particle i.e., OP makes an angle  with positive direction of x-axis at t = 0.
In time t, it covers a further angle t and its position vector makes an angle (t + ) with positive x-axis.
Consider the projection of position vector OP on x-axis. This will be OP. The position of P on the x-axis
as the particle moves on the circle is given by
x(t) = A cos(t + )
which is the defining equation of S.H.M.
y
(a) x Let t +  = 0 at t = 0. The particle is at P. Its projection on x-axis is

O P (P)
same. OP = OP = Acos0º = A as x(t) = Acos(t + )
Figure-(a)
NEET Oscillations 7
y
P
t + 
(b) x At time t, when position vector OP makes an angle t +  with positive
O P
x-axis. Its projection on x-axis is OP = Acos(t + )
Figure (b)
y
P
(c) x Consider t +  as 90°. Projection of P as x-axis is at O itself i.e.,

O P
OP = O as OP = Acos(t + ) = Acos90º = 0
Figure (c)
y
P
t + 
(d) x Consider t +  > 90°. (in II quadrant). Its projection on x-axis is
P O
OP  = Acos(t + ). It will be having a negative value.
Figure (d)
P t + 
(e) x Consider t +  = 180°. Its projection on x-axis is
O
OP = Acos(t + ) = A cos180° = –A
Figure (e)
P t + 
(f) x Consider t +  > 180° (III quadrant). Its projection on x-axis is
O
OP  = A cos(t + ) = a negative value.
P
Figure (f)
8 Oscillations NEET
(g) x Consider t +  = 270°. Its projection on x-axis is at O itself

O (P)
i.e., OP = 0
P
Figure (g)
P
(h) x Consider t +  > 270° (IV quadrant).
O
t + 
Its projection on x-axis is OP  = Acos(t + ) = a positive value.
P
Figure (h)
(i) x Consider t +  = 360°, particle has come back to initial position.

O P
Its projection on x-axis is OP  = Acos(t + ) = Acos360º = A. Same
as what it was when it started at t = 0.
Figure (i)
This shows that if P moves uniformly on a circle, its projection P executes SHM on a diameter of the circle
A P X
Displacement (x)
Q W
R
t
O V
S U
–A T
Figure (j)
We can take projection of the motion of P on any diameter, say the y-axis. In that case, the displacement
y(t) of P as y-axis is given by
y = Asin(t + )

Which is also an SHM of the same amplitude as that of projection x-axis, but differing by a phase of .
2
Note : In Figure, we began our motion at t = 0 with t +  = 0. It is not necessary to begin like this. In
general, we may begin as explained for previous Figure.
NEET Oscillations 9
Example 5 : y
y
P(t = 0)
P
T = 1 min
A P(t = 0) B
30º
T=2s x x
O P O
(a) (b)
Figure depicts two circular motions. The radius of the circle, the period of revolution, the initial
position and the sense of revolution are indicated on the figure. Obtain the SHMs of the
x-projection of the radius vector of the rotating particle P in each case.

Solution : (a) At t = 0, OP makes an angle of 30º  rad with the positive direction of x-axis. After
6
2 2 
time t, it covers an angle t in anticlockwise direction, and makes an angle of t
T T 6
with the x-axis.
 2 
The projection of OP on the x-axis at time t is given by x(t )  A cos  t  
T 6
For T = 2 s
 2 
x(t )  A cos  t  
 2 6

Which is an SHM of amplitude A, period 2 s, and an initial phase = .
6

(b) At t = 0, OP makes an angle of 90º  with the x-axis. After time t, it covers an angle of
2
2   2 
t in the clockwise direction and makes an angle of   t  with the x-axis. The
T 2 T 
projection of OP on x-axis at time t, is given by
  2 
x(t )  B cos   t
2 T 
 2 
= B sin  t 
T 
For T = 1 min = 60 s
  
x(t )  B sin  t 
 30 
 t  
Writing this as x(t )  B cos    (as cos(–) = cos and cos(90º – ) = sin) and
 30 2 
comparing it with equation (ii), x(t) = Acos(t + ), we find that this represents SHM of
 
amplitude B, period 60 s, and an initial phase of    .
 2
10 Oscillations NEET
Example 6 : Plot the corresponding reference circle for given SHM. Indicate the initial (t = 0) position of the
particle, the radius of the circle, and the angular speed of the rotating particle. Consider
 
anticlockwise direction for rotation. x  3 sin  2t   (Express in the form, x = Acos(t + )).
 4 
 
Solution : x  3 sin  2t  
 4
y
   
= 3 cos    2t    as cos(90º + ) = –sin
 2  4 
P  = 2s
–1
 3  t=0
= 3cos  2t  B
 4 
Comparing with x = Acos(t + ), we get x
3 cm O
  3
A = 3,  = 2,    
2 4 4
The reference circle is as shown in figure.
A
Example 7 : Find the time taken by the particle in going from x = 0 to x  where A is the amplitude.
2
Solution : x = Asint
A
 A sin t
2
 2
sin  sin t
6 T
 2
 t
6 T
T
 t
12
DISPLACEMENT, VELOCITY AND ACCELERATION IN SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION

z Displacement equation of S.H.M
If a particle P is in uniform circular motion, on a circular path of radius A, with angular frequency . The
motion of the projection of perpendicular from particle to the diameter of circle will be simple harmonic
motion.
i.e. motion of Q will be simple harmonic motion from OPQ. y A
(t + )
y
sin(t  )  Q P
A
Displacement in S.H.M y
(t + )
y  A sin(t  ) x
…(1) O
This is general equation of S.H.M.
z If particle starts motion from mean position then use
y = Asint
NEET Oscillations 11
z If particle starts motion from extreme position then use
y = Acost
z Velocity in S.H.M
Velocity of particle P, u = A
Component of (A) parallel to OQ is velocity in S.H.M
Velocity of particle Q, v = Acos(t + )
Velocity in S.H.M v  A cos( t  ) …(2)
v  A 1  sin2 (t  )
y
From equation (i), sin(t  ) 
A
y2
v  A 1 
A2
v   A2  y 2 …(3)
z Acceleration in S.H.M
Acceleration of particle P, a = 2A
Component of 2A parallel to OQ is acceleration in S.H.M.
Acceleration of particle Q,
a  2 A sin( t  ) …(4)
From equation (i)
y
sin(t  ) 
A
a  2 y …(5)
z For simplicity, put  = 0 and write equation for displacement, velocity and acceleration.
z Graph of Displacement in S.H.M
2
y (t )  A sin t  A sin t …(6)
T
(a) y
+A
A 3T
4
O t
T 2T 4T
4 4 –A
4
–A
Let us calculate the value of displacement, velocity and acceleration for different value of t
At t = 0
z Graph of Velocity in S.H.M
dy  
v (t )   A cos t  v max sin  t  
dt  2
(b) v
A
2T
4
t
O T 3T 4T
4 4 4
–A
–A
z Graph of Acceleration in S.H.M
dv
a(t )   2 A sin t  2 A sin( t  )
dt
(c) a
2
A
T A2
4
O t
2T 3T T
–A
2
4 4
–A2
T 2T 3T 4T
Time, t 0 4 4 4 4
Displacement, x 0(min) A(max) 0(min)  A(max) 0(min)
Velocity, v A(max) 0(min)  A(max) 0(min) A(max)
Acceleration, a 0(min)  A2 (max) 0(min) A2 (max) 0(min)
Note : (a) Displacement, velocity and acceleration show harmonic variation with time having same
period.
(b) The velocity amplitude is  times the displacement amplitude.
(c) The acceleration amplitude is 2 times the displacement amplitude.

(d) In S.H.M. velocity is ahead of displacement by phase angle of .
2

(e) In S.H.M. acceleration is ahead of velocity by phase angle of .
2
(f) In S.H.M. acceleration is ahead of displacement by phase angle of .
z Time period is defined as the time taken by the particle executing SHM to complete one vibration.
a = –2Asint = –2y as y = Asint
Neglecting –ve sign, we have
a = 2y
a
or 
y
2 y Displacement
 Time period, T   2  2
 a Acceleration
If  is the frequency of vibration of SHM, then
1 1 Acceleration
 
T 2 Displacement
Example 8 : A particle executes SHM with a time period of 2 s and amplitude 10 cm. Find its (i) Displacement
1
(ii) Velocity, (iii) Acceleration after second, starting from mean position.
6
Solution : (i) T = 2 s, A = 10 cm
2
Displacement, x  A sin t
T
2 1
= 10 sin 
2 6

= 10 sin
6
= 5 cm
dx 2 2
(ii) Velocity, v   A cos t
dt T T
2 2 1
= 10  cos 
2 2 6
3
= 10  3.14 
2
= 27.16 cm/s
dv 42 2
(iii) Acceleration, a   2 A sin t
dt T T
4  (3.14)2 2 1
=  10  sin 
4 2 6
= 49.3 cm/s2
Example 9 : The speed of a particle executing SHM with amplitude of displacement 5 cm is 3 cm/s at a
distance 2.5 cm from mean position. What will be its speed at a distance 2.5 3 cm from mean
position?
Solution : v   A2  x 2
At x = 2.5 cm, v = 3 cm/s
5 3 2
 3   5 2  ( 2.5 ) 2    3 rad/s
2 5
Again, x  2.5 3 cm, v  ?
 v   5 2  ( 2 .5 3 ) 2
5 5 2
   3  3 cm/s.
2 2 5
FORCE LAW FOR SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION

Using Newton’s II law of motion, and the expression for acceleration of a particle undergoing simple harmonic
motion, the force acting on a particle of mass m in SHM is
F(t) = ma
= –m2y(t)
i.e., F(t) = –ky(t)
where k = m2
k
or 
m
Like acceleration, force is always directed towards the mean position hence it is called the restoring force.
Note : The force in equation is linearly proportional to y(t). A particle oscillating under such a force is,
therefore, called a linear harmonic oscillator. In the real world, the force may contain additional terms
proportional to y2, y3 etc. These are called non-linear oscillators.
2 m
 Time period, T   2
 k
In different types of SHM’s the quantities m and k will go on taking different forms and names. In general,
m is called inertia factor and k is called the spring factor.
Thus, in general SHM
Inertia factor
T  2
Spring factor
1 1 k 1 Spring factor
Frequency,    
T 2 m 2 Inertia factor
In linear SHM, the spring factor stands for force per unit displacement and inertia factor for mass of
the body execuring SHM,
In angular SHM, the spring factor stands for torque constant, i.e., the moment of the couple to produce
unit angular displacement or the restoring torque per unit angular displacement and inertia factor stands for
moment of inertia of the body executing SHM.
Thus, in linear SHM,
m
T  2
k
m
 2
 Force 
 
 Displacement 
m  displacement
 2
m  acceleration
displacement
or T  2
acceleration
1 acceleration
 Frequency,  
2 displacement
ENERGY IN SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION
KE and PE of a particle in SHM vary between zero and their maximum values. The velocity of a particle
executing SHM is zero at the extreme positions (It is a periodic function of time). So, the kinetic energy (K) of
such a particle is
Displacement equation of particle x = Acos(t + )
1
K mv 2
2
1
= m2 A2 sin2 (t  )
2
1 2
= kA sin2 (t  ) …(1) (k = m2)
2
T
As the sign of v is immaterial in KE, the period of KE is and frequency twice of oscillator. The concept
2
of potential energy is possible only for conservative forces. The spring force, F = –kx is a conservative force,
with associated potential energy.
1 2
U kx …(2)
2
So, the P.E. of a particle executing SHM is,
1 2
U(x )  kx
2
1 2
= kA cos2 (t  ) …(3)
2
T
So, PE of a particle executing SHM is also periodic, with period and frequency twice of oscillator
2
The total energy, E, of the system is
E=U+K
1 2 1
= kA cos2 (t  )  kA2 sin2 (t  )
2 2
1 2
= kA (cos2 (t  )  sin2 (t  ))
2
1 2
E kA …(4)
2
The total mechanical energy of a harmonic oscillator is thus independent of time as expected for motion under
any conservative force.
The time and displacement dependence of PE and KE of a linear simple harmonic oscillator are shown in
figure.
E = K(t) + U(t)
E = K(x) + U(x)
E
U(x)
Energy
Energy
K(x)
O T/2 T –A O +A x
Time (t)
(a) (b)
K.E., P.E. and total energy as a function of time shown in figure (a) and as function displacement shown in
T
figure (b) of a particle in SHM. The K.E. and P.E. both repeat after a period . The total energy remains
2
constant at all t and x.
Both KE and PE in SHM are seen to be always positive in figures. KE. can never be negative as it is
proportional to the square of speed. P.E. is positive by choice of the undermined constant in PE. Both KE
and PE reach maximum value twice,
1 1  1 1 1
K av  Uav  0  kA2   kA2  m 2 A2  E
2  2  4 4 2
Example 10 : A block whose mass is 2 kg is fastened to a spring whose spring constant is 100 N m–1. It is
pulled to a distance x = 0.1 m from its equilibrium position at x = 0 on a frictionless surface from
rest at t = 0. Calculate the kinetic energy of the block when it is 0.05 m away from the mean
position.
Solution : The block executes SHM, its angular frequency,
k

m
100 N m1

2 kg
 7.07 rad s 1
Its displacement at any time t is

x(t) = acost = 0.1 cos(7.07 t)
When the particle is 0.05 m away from the mean position,
0.05 = 0.1 cos (7.07 t)
or, cos(7.07t) = 0.5
3
or sin(7.07t )   0.866
2
Velocity of the block at x = 0.05 m is

v = Asint
= 0.1 × 7.07 × 0.866
= 0.61 ms–1
1
Hence, K.E. = mv 2
2
1
=  2(0.61)2
2
= 0.37 J
Example 11 : A particle executes SHM with amplitude A and time period T. When the displacement from the
equilibrium position is half the amplitude, what fractions of the total energy are kinetic and potential?
1 2
Solution : Total energy E  kA
2
A
when x = 
2
1 2 1 A 2 1 1 2 1
The potential energy U  kx = k .(  )  . kA  E  25% of E
2 2 2 4 2 4
1 3
 Kinetic energy = E – U = E  E = E = 75% of E
4 4
Example 12 : A particle of mass 0.2 kg is executing SHM of amplitude 0.2 m. When it passes through the mean
position, its kinetic energy is 64 × 10–3 J. Obtain the equation of motion of this particle if the

initial phase of oscillation is .
4

Solution : A = 0.2 m,  
4
1
KE  m2 A2
2
1
64  103   0.2  2  0.22
2
128  10 3
2 
0.2  0.2  0.2
or  = 4 rad/s
x  A sin(t  )
 
 0.2 sin  4t  
 4
EXERCISE
1. Which of the following is/are not SHM?
(1) y = Acost (2) y = Asint
(3) y = Asin 3t (4) y = AekT
2. Particle executing SHM along y-axis has its motion described by the equation y = 2 + 10sin5t. Amplitude
of SHM is
(1) 2 (2) 12
(3) 10 (4) 104
3. A particle moves such that acceleration is given by a = –4x. The period of oscillation is
2
(1)  (2)

1
(3) (4) 2

4. Phase difference between the instantaneous velocity and acceleration of a particle executing SHM is

(1) Zero (2)
2
(3)  (4) 2
t
5. A particle executing SHM along y-axis, which is described by y  10 sin , phase of particle at t = 2 s is
4
 
(1) (2)
4 2

(3) (4) 
8
6. A particle is executing SHM about y = 0 along y-axis. Its position at an instant is given by y = (7 m) sin(t).
Its average velocity for a time interval 0 to 0.5 s is
(1) 14 m/s (2) 7 m/s
1
(3) m/s (4) 28 m/s
7
7. A body is executing SHM with amplitude a and time period T. The ratio of kinetic and potential energy when
displacement from the equilibrium position is half the amplitude
(1) 1 : 1 (2) 2 : 1
(3) 1 : 3 (4) 3 : 1
8. The potential energy of a particle of mass 100 g moving along x-axis is given by U  5 x ( x  4) , where x is
in metre. The period of oscillation is
(1) 0.2s (2) 0.1s
1
(3) s (4) s

9. A particle is executing SHM about y = 0 along y-axis. Its position at an instant is given by
y (m)  5(sin3t  3 cos3t ) . The amplitude of oscillation is
(1) 10 m (2) 5 m
(3) 5(1  3) m (4) 5 3 m
10. A particle of mass 2 kg, executing SHM has amplitude 20 cm and time period 1 s. Its maximum speed is
(1) 0.314 m/s (2) 0.628 m/s
(3) 1.256 m/s (4) 2.512 m/s
SOME SYSTEMS EXECUTING SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION
Oscillations due to a Spring

The simplest example of SHM is the small oscillations of a block of mass m fixed to a spring, which is fixed
to a rigid wall as shown in figure
k
m
x
–A x=0 +A
The block moves over a frictionless surface. The block, when pulled or pushed and released, executes SHM.
Let x = 0, indicate the position of the centre of the block when the spring is in equilibrium. Maximum and
minimum displacements to the left and right of the mean position are marked as –A and +A. At any time t,
the displacement from the mean position is x, and the restoring force F acting on the block is
F(x) = –kx
The constant of proportionality, k is called the spring constant.
k

m
and the period, T, of the oscillator is given by
m
T  2
k
k = Effective spring constant.

The value of k depends on two factors.
(1) Stiffness of material
1
(2) Size of spring k 
L
Various Spring Block Systems

(i) If two masses m1 and m2 are connected to the two ends of a spring, then the time period is given by
m1m2 k
T = 2  / k where  = . m1 m2
m1  m2
Here  is known as reduced mass.

(ii) See figure.
m
Time period T  2
k
T
k m
1 k
Frequency f  mg
2 m
(iii) See figure.

k
m
Time period T  4 T
k T
m
mg
(iv) See figure.
m m
T  2  k
4k k
(v) Combination of springs
m
T = 2 m
keff
(a) Series combination

k1 k2
1 1 1 m
In series  
keff k1 k2
m(k1  k2 )
T = 2
k1  k2
(b) Parallel combination k1

In parallel keff = k1 + k2 m
m k2
T = 2
k1  k2
(vi) If a spring cut in parts of length l1, l2, l3 …
 l  l  l    l1  l 2  l3   
k1   1 2 3  k , k2    k and so on.
 l1 l2
   
The Simple Pendulum

Make a simple pendulum by tying a piece of stone to a long unstretchable thread, approximately 100 cm
long, suspend it from a suitable support so that it is free to oscillate.
Consider a simple pendulum. A small bob of mass m is tied to an inextensible massless string of length L.
The other end of the string is fixed to a support on the ceiling. The bob oscillates in a plane about the vertical
line through the support. Figure (a). Let  be the angle which the string makes with the vertical.
L  L
Rigid T
support
m mgsin mgcos

mg
(a) (b)
The two forces acting on the bob are
(1) The tension T along the string and
(2) The vertical force due to gravity (mg). This force mg can be resolved into
 = –L(mgsin)
This is a restoring torque that tends to reduce angular displacement, hence, the negative sign. By Newton’s
law of rotational motion.
 = I
where I is the moment of inertia of the system about the support and  is the angular acceleration. Thus,
I = –mgsinL
mgL
or  sin 
I
When  is small, sin can be approximated by  and equation can be written as
mgL
 
I
mgL

I
I
T  2
mgL
Moment of inertia I = mL2 as the string is massless.
mL2
T  2
mgL
L
or T  2
g
z In this section we will discuss the variation of time period of a simple pendulum due to different
factors.
(1) Effect of change in length :
Time period of the simple pendulum is proportional to Length , so following discussion on it is
important.
(a) Since T  , so the graph between T and l will be a parabola while between T2 and l will
be a straight line.
(b) If the bob is hollow sphere full of water and water comes out slowly through a hole at the
bottom, the time period will first increase (less number of oscillation per second will be made)
then the time period will be restored to original value once the total water has come out. (It
is due to change of position of centre of mass of bob due to leakage of water).
T 1 L
(c) Since T  , 
T 2 L
Now if the temperature of a simple pendulum changes by  and its thermal coefficient of
L T 
linear expansion is  then  . (Note  is small). So  .
L T 2
(2) Effect of acceleration :
(a) Accelerated pendulum
L
T = 2 (upward acceleration)
g a
L
T = 2 (downward acceleration)
g a
L
T = 2 (horizontal acceleration)
g  a2
2
L D
(b) Pendulum in a liquid T = 2 , where n =
g 
g
n
(3) Effect of very large length :
If the length L of pendulum is comparable to radius R of the earth, then the time period
1
T  2 .
1 1 
g  
L R 
R
If the length L becomes very large (infinite) then the time period T = 2
, which is approximately
g
84.6 minute. This is the maximum time period a simple pendulum can have.
(4) Torsional pendulum :
I
T = 2 , where c is torsional constant
c
(5) Physical pendulum :
I
T = 2 ; where I : Moment of inertia of body about axis passing through hinge
mgd
d : Distance of centre of mass from hinge
(6) U-shape tube :
h
T = 2 ; where h : Height of liquid column in one arm
g
DAMPED OSCILLATIONS
Why does the motion of a simple pendulum, oscillating in air, die out? This happens as the air drag and
the friction at the support oppose the motion of the pendulum and dissipate its energy gradually. The
pendulum is said to dissipate its energy gradually. The pendulum is said to execute damped oscillations.
The energy of the system gets dissipated continuously but the oscillations are approximately periodic for
small damping.
The nature of the surrounding medium decides the damping force. Damping force is much greater (and
dissipation of energy much faster) when the block is immersed in a liquid. It is generally proportional to velocity

of the bob and acts opposite to the direction of velocity. If the damping force is denoted by Fd ,

Fd  bv
where the positive constant b depends on characteristics of the medium (i.e., viscosity) and size and shape
of the block, etc.

Thus, that total force acting on the mass at any time t, is F  kx  bv

If a(t ) is the acceleration of the mass at time t, then
ma(t) = –kx(t) – bv(t)
Vector notation has been dropped as it is one dimensional motion.
d 2x dx
m b  kx  0
dt 2 dt
The solution of equation
– bt
x(t )  Ae 2m cos(t  )
where a is the amplitude and  is the angular frequency of the damped oscillator given by
k b2
  
m 4 m2
 t

It can be regarded as a cosine function whose amplitude Ae  b 2m , gradually decreases with time.
10 a
b
5
c
d
x(t) O
–5
–100
5 10 15 20 25
A damped oscillator is approximately
periodic with decreasing amplitude of
o s c il la t io n . W i th g r e a te r d a m p i n g ,
oscillations die out faster.
1 2
Mechanical energy of the undamped oscillator is kA . For a damped oscillator the amplitude is not constant
2
1 2 – btm
E (t ) kA e
2
From equation we find that the total energy of the system decreases exponentially with time.
 b 
Note : (1) Small damping means that the dimensionless ratio of   is much less than 1.
 km 
(2) If we put b = 0, all equation of a damped oscillator reduce to the corresponding equations
of an undamped oscillator, as expected.
FORCED OSCILLATIONS AND RESONANCE

When a system (like a simple pendulum is displaced from its equilibrium position and released, it oscillates
with its natural frequency  and the oscillations are called free oscillations. They die out eventually due to
damping forces. However, they can be maintained by an external agency. These are called forced or driven
oscillations. Consider the case when the external force is itself periodic, with a frequency d called the driven
frequency. The system oscillates at the frequency d of the external agency (not with its natural frequency
); the free oscillations die out due to damping. Let an external force F(t) of amplitude F0 that varies
periodically with time be applied to a damped oscillator. It can be represented as
F(t) = F0cosdt
The motion of a particle under the combined action of a linear restoring force, damping force and a time
dependent driving force represented
ma(t) = –kx(t) – bv(t) + F0cosdt
d2x dx
m 2
b  kx  F0 cos d t
dt dt
Now the body oscillates with the (angular) frequency of the external periodic force. Now, its displacement is
given by
x(t) = Acos(dt + )
The amplitude A is a function of the forced frequency d and the natural frequency . It is given by
F0
A 1
m ( 2 2
 d2 )2  d2 b 2  2
v 0
and tan  
d x0
where m is the mass of the particle and v0 and x0 are the velocity and the displacement of the particle at
time t = 0, which is the moment when the periodic force is applied. The amplitude of the forced oscillator
depends on the (angular) frequency of the driving force.
Case-I Small damping, driving frequency far from natural frequency :
wdb is much smaller than m(2 – d2), and it can be neglected. Then amplitude
F0
A
m(   d2 )
2
d
Note : (i) Amplitude is greatest when  1.

(ii) Smaller the damping, the taller and narrower is the resonance peak.
The amplitude tends to infinity when the driving frequency equals the natural frequency. But this is the ideal
case of zero damping (which never happens as damping is never perfectly zero)
Case-II Driving frequency close to natural frequency :
If d is very close to , m(2 – d2) is much less than db, for any reasonable value of band, hence reduces to
F0
A
d b
The maximum possible amplitude for a given driving frequency is controlled by the driving frequency and the
damping, and is never infinity. The phenomenon of increase in amplitude when the driving force is close to
the natural frequency of the oscillator is called resonance.
EXERCISE
11. If length of a simple pendulum is increased by 69%, then the percentage increase in its time period is
(1) 69% (2) 30%
(3) 50% (4) 10%
12. A uniform thin ring of radius R and mass m suspended in a vertical plane from a point in its circumference.
Its time period of oscillation is
2R 2R
(1) 2 (2) 
g g
 R R
(3) (4) 
2 g 2g
1
13. A second pendulum is moved to moon where acceleration due to gravity is times that of the Earth, the length
6
of the Seconds pendulum on Moon would be
(1) 6 times (2) 12 times
1 1
(3) times (4) times
6 12
14. Imagine a narrow tunnel between the two diametrically opposite points of the earth. A particle of mass m is
released in this tunnel. The time period of oscillation is
R  R
(1)  (2)
g 2 g
R 2 R
(3) 2 (4)
g  g
15. In the adjacent figure, if the incline plane is smooth and the springs are identical, then the period of oscillation
of this body is
k
M 2M
(1) 2 (2) 2 M
k
2k k
M M sin  
(3) 2 (4) 2
k sin  k
16. In case of damped oscillation frequency of oscillation is
(1) Greater than natural frequency (2) Less than natural frequency
(3) Equal to natural frequency (4) Both (1) & (3)
17. In forced oscillations, a particle oscillates simple harmonically with frequency equal to
(1) Frequency of driving force
(2) Natural frequency of body
(3) Difference of frequency of driving and natural frequency
(4) Mean of driving force and natural frequency
18. Which of the following equation represents damped oscillation?
d2x d2x
(1)  kx (2)  kx  f0 sin 0 t
dt 2 dt 2
d2x dx d2x dx k
(3) 2
 kx  0 (4)   x 0
dt dt dt 2 dt m
19. In case of damped oscillation amplitude of oscillation is (symbols have their usual meaning)
bt bt

(1) Ae 2m (2) Ae 2m
bt 2 m
2
(3) A e m (4) Ae bt
20. Resonance is special case of
(1) Damped oscillation (2) Forced oscillation
(3) Natural oscillation (4) Both (1) & (3)

t
en
nm nment
sig ssig
As A Assignment
Assignment
SECTION - A m m
(1)  (2) 2
k 2k
NCERT Based MCQs
1. A particle is moving along the y-axis according to  m m
(3) (4) 4
the equation y = a0sin(3t). The motion is simple 2 2k k
harmonic [NCERT Pg. 346] 5. The differential equation representing the S.H.M. of
2
(1) With time period d 2y
3 particle is 16  9 y  0 . If particle is at mean
dt 2
(2) With amplitude 3a0
position initially, then time taken by the particle to
3 reach half of its amplitude first time will be
(3) With frequency
 [NCERT Pg. 349]
(4) Both (1) and (2) are correct 4 5
(1) s (2) s
2. Choose the incorrect statement among the 9 9
following. [NCERT Pg. 349]
 2
(1) At the extreme position, acceleration of the (3) s (4) s
3 9
simple harmonic oscillator is maximum
6. The force on a body executing SHM is 4 N when
(2) At the mean position speed of the simple the displacement from mean position is 2 cm. If
harmonic oscillator is maximum amplitude of oscillation is 10 cm, then the
(3) In the simple harmonic motion, the direction of maximum kinetic energy associated with the SHM
velocity is always in the direction of will be [NCERT Pg. 351]
acceleration (1) 1 J (2) 4 J
(4) Both (1) and (2) (3) 2 J (4) 3 J
3. Acceleration displacement (a-x) graph of a particle
7. The time period of simple pendulum inside a
executing S.H.M. is shown in the figure. The
stationary lift is T. If lift starts accelerating upwards
frequency of oscillation is (tan  = 8)
with the acceleration of g/2, then the new time
[NCERT Pg. 349] period of the simple pendulum will be
[NCERT Pg. 353]
2 2
(1) T (2) T
3 3
3
(3) T (4) T
2
2 2
(1) Hz (2) Hz 8. The time period of oscillation of a particle whose
  position varies with time t as x = (sin t + sin2t
2 2 1 + sin4t) is [NCERT Pg. 344]
(3) Hz (4) Hz
  2 
4. A spring of force constant ‘k’ is cut into four (1) (2)
 
equal parts one part is attached with a mass m.
The time period of oscillation will be  
(3) (4)
2 4
[NCERT Pg. 350]
9. Which one of the following pairing is incorrect? 13. A block of mass m is suspended form a massless
[NCERT Pg. 342] 2k
spring of spring constant as shown in figure.
(1) y = cos3t  Periodic but not SHM 3
If block of mass m is slightly displaced vertically
(2) y = sint + cost  SHM
downward and released, then it executes SHM.
(3) y = cos2t  SHM The time period of block is [NCERT Pg. 352]
(4) y = ae t  Periodic but not SHM.
10. A particle P is moving on a circular path of radius
R as shown in figure. If time period is 2 minutes, 2k
then the equation of projection on y axis for particle 3
P is (where t is in seconds) [NCERT Pg. 347]
Y m
T = 2 minutes
P ( t = t) P (t = 0) m m
(1) 2 (2) 2
R k 2k
45°
X 3m 2m
O (3) 2 (4) 2
2k 3k
14. Figure shows the velocity-time graph of an object
executing SHM. The correct equation for
displacement - time (x - t) representing this motion
  is [NCERT Pg. 345]
(1) y  R sin  t –  –1
 60 4  v (cm s )
 
(2) y  R cos  t   10
 60 4
0
5 10 15 t(s)
  –10
(3) y  R cos  t – 
 60 4
 
  (1) x  50cos  t    cm
(4) y  R sin  t   5 
 60 4
11. The shortest distance travelled by a particle 
executing SHM from extreme position in 3 seconds (2) x  – 50 sin t cm
5
is equal to half of its amplitude. The time period of
given particle is [NCERT Pg. 344] 
(3) x  10 sin t cm
(1) 18 seconds 5
(2) 36 seconds

(3) 9 seconds (4) x  –10 sin t cm
5
(4) 6 seconds
15. A particle of mass 1 kg is executing oscillation and
12. A particle executes SHM about x = 0 along x-axis. its equation of motion is given by
 d 2 x dx
The equation for SHM is x  10 cm  sin t , 2   x  0 . The motion is
2 dt 2 dt
where x is in cm and t is in seconds. The [NCERT Pg. 356]
maximum speed of particle is [NCERT Pg. 348] (1) Damped oscillation
(1) 5 cm s–1 (2) 5 cm s–1 (2) Forced oscillation
(3) Periodic motion
5 3
(3) 10 cm s–1 (4) cm s–1
2 (4) Both (2) and (3)
8. The potential energy of a particle of mass 1 kg

SECTION - B along x-axis is U = 5(1 – cos3x)J. The time period
Objective Type Questions of small oscillation is
1. A particle is undergoing SHM, when its kinetic 2
energy is equal to potential energy, the velocity of (1) 2 5 (2)
3 5
particle is ( - angular frequency, A - amplitude
3 5 
and potential energy at mean position is zero) (3) (4)
2 2 5
A A 9. Maximum velocity of particle in SHM is 2 cm/s
(1) (2)
2 2 then magnitude of average velocity during one
extreme position to another extreme position is
(3) A (4) 2A  
(1) cm/s (2) cm/s
2. Average energy in a time period of a SHM is 2 4
1 4 2
(1) Zero (2) m2 A2 (3)

cm/s (4)

cm/s
2
10. The maximum speed and acceleration of particle
1
(3) m2 A2 (4) m2 A2 executing SHM be 20 cm/s and 20 cm/s 2
4 respectively, then its time period is
3. Restoring force in SHM is

(1) Conservative (2) Centripetal (1) (2) 10
2
(3) Non-conservative (4) All of these 
(3) (4) 2
4. If the amplitude of oscillation of a simple pendulum 10
is increased by 20%, then percentage change in 11. Choose incorrect statement regarding undamped
the time period will be oscillation
(1) Zero (2) 10% (1) The potential energy of a body (executing SHM)
at mean position can be non-zero
(3) 10.5% (4) 11%
(2) The total energy of oscillating body remains
5. The displacement of a harmonic oscillator is given
constant at all value of x and t
by x = sint + cost. The amplitude of the
oscillator is (3) The time period of a spring pendulum in falling
freely lift is infinity
(1)  (2) 
(4) The effective length of seconds pendulum is
(3)  +  (4) 2  2 about 1 metre
6. The tension in the string of simple pendulum is 12. If length of simple pendulum is equal to radius of
maximum at earth then time period is
(1) Mean position R R
(1) T  2 (2) T  2
(2) Extreme position g 2g
(3) At half of extreme position 2R R
(3) T  2 (4) T  2
1 g 3g
(4) At times of extreme position
2 13. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum of
7. A block of mass m rests on a horizontal table, length L suspended from the roof of a vehicle
which moves without friction down an inclined plane
executing SHM along horizontal with amplitude A
of inclination 60°, is given by
when block just starts to slip then the period
( = coefficient of friction) is
60°
A A
(1) 2 (2) 2
g g
A 2A
(3)  (4) 2 60°
g g
19. In a system of two particle, if only m2 is oscillating
2L L
(1) 2 (2) 2 then its time period is
g 2g
m2
L L
(3) 2 (4) 2 k
3g g
14. A simple pendulum oscillates, the amplitude of m1

oscillation is reduced to one third of its initial
amplitude A0 at the ends of 10 oscillations. After m1 m2
complete 20 oscillations, its amplitude must be (1) 2 (2) 2
k k
A0 A0 m2
m1m2
(4) 2 (m  m )k
(1) (2)
6 4 (3) 2
(m1  m2 )k 1 2
A0 2 A0 20. A body of mass 1 g is executing SHM. Its
(3) (4)
9 3 displacement equation is given by
15. If time period of oscillation of a body connected  
x  4cos  50t   m then its maximum kinetic
with a spring is T. Now spring is cut into two equal  3 
parts and both parts connected in parallel then energy is
period of oscillation of same body is (1) 10 J (2) 20 J
T T (3) 200 J (4) 2 J
(1) (2)
2 4 21. A trolley of mass 1 kg is connected to two
identical spring of spring constant 100 N/m each.
T T
(3) (4) If trolley is displaced from mean position by 1 cm
2 2 2 then maximum velocity of trolley is
16. A (simple pendulum) oscillates with time period T,
now another identical body is put on it without
disturbing the system, then new time period will
(1) Decreases
(2) Increases (1) 0.01 m/s (2) 1.4 m/s
(3) 0.14 m/s (4) 14 m/s
(3) Remains same
22. Two simple harmonic motions are represented by
(4) First increases than decreases the following equations
17. Which of the following functions represents simple x1 = 4sin2t and x2 = 2[sin2t + cos2t]
harmonic motion?
then ratio of their amplitude is
(1) sin2t (2) sin2t + cos2t (1) 2 (2) 1
(3) sint + cos2t (4) sint + cost
1
18. From the displacement–time graph of an oscillating (3)
2
(4) 2
particle, the maximum velocity of particle is
23. A ring of mass m and radius R oscillate about
x(cm)
point O as shown in figure, then its time period is
+10 O
2 6 t(s)
0 4
–10
(1) 5cm/s R R
(1) 2 (2) 
(2) 3 cm/s g 2g
(3) cm/s
2R 8R
(4) 2.5cm/s (3)  (4) 
g g
24. A particle is performing – SHM with amplitude A 29. A spring is cut into two parts in ratio 1 : 10 by
and time period T. Its position time graph is as length. Find the stiffness constant of smaller part
shown in figure then its corresponding a-t graph is (if stiffness constant of original spring is K).
x
K
A (1) 10K (2)
10
t
O 10K
(3) (4) 11K
11
–A
T 30. Potential energy of particle of mass 2 kg oscillating
on x-axis is given as U = (x – 2)2 – 10.
a a The total energy of oscillation is 26 J. Find the
2
A maximum speed of particle.
(1) 4 m/s (2) 8 m/s
(1) (2)
2
(3) 13 m/s (4) 6 m/s
–A
31. A spring mass system is hanging from ceiling of an
a a elevator. The elevator is falling freely. The elevator
a2 is suddenly stopped. Find the amplitude of the
t resulting SHM with respect to lift.
(3) (4) t
2
A mg 2mg
a2 (1) (2)
K K
25. A disc of radius R and mass m is pivoted at its rim mg 4mg

(3) (4)
and is set to small oscillations. If simple pendulum 2K K
have same time period then effective length of
32. The time period of spring block system is T. The
pendulum is
spring is cut into two parts with their length in ratio
R 3R of 2 : 3. Find the time period of oscillation of same
(1) (2) block with longer part of spring.
2 2
R m 5m
(3) R (4) (1) 2 (2) 2
3 K 3K
26. Which of the following quantities is always negative
3m 2m
in SHM? (3) 2 (4) 2
5K 5K

(1) F .a (2) v .r
33. A particle of mass m is placed at lowest point of

(3) a.r (4) F  r smooth parabola x2 = ay. What is the time period
of small oscillation?
27. A particle is free to move on x-axis, in which of the
following case, the particle will execute oscillation
a 2a
about x = 1? (1) 2 (2) 2
g g
(1) F = (x – 1) (2) F = – (x – 1)2
(3) F = – (x – 1)3 (4) F = (x – 1)3 a a
(3) 2 (4) 2
4g 2g
28. Relation between velocity and displacement of
particle is 4v2 = 25 – x2 then find time period of 34. A disc of mass m is connected to two springs K1
oscillation. and K2 as shown. Find time period of oscillation.
(All surfaces are smooth)
(1)  s
(2) 2 s
m
(3) 3 s K1 K2
(4) 4 s
39. A simple pendulum has time period T1. The point
2m m
(1) 2 K  4K (2) 2 K  4K
of suspension is now moved upward according to
1 2 1 2 equation y = Kt2 where K = 1 m/s2. If new time
2 2
period is T2 then find ratio of T 1 and T 2
m m
(3) 2 (4) 2
(K1  K 2 ) (K1  2K 2 ) 2 5
(1) (2)
3 6
35. A system is shown in figure. Find the time period
for small oscillations of two blocks. 6 3
(3) (4)
5 2
k 2k 40. A particle at end of a spring executes simple
m m
harmonic motion with a period t 1 , while the
corresponding period of another spring is t2. If two
3m 3m springs are connected in series then time period is
(1) 2 (2) 2 T, then
k 2k
(1) T = t1 + t2 (2) T 2  t12  t22
3m 3m
(3) 2 (4) 2
4k 8k (3) T –1  t1–1  t2–1 (4) T –2  t1–2  t2–2
36. If a mass M suspended by a spring executes SHM
with time period T, and the time period become
SECTION - C
5T
if mass is increased by m. Then find ratio of Previous Years Questions
3
m 1. The distance covered by a particle undergoing SHM
in one time period is (amplitude = A),
M
[NEET-2019 (Odisha)]
5 3 (1) 4A (2) Zero
(1) (2)
3 5
(3) A (4) 2A
25 16
(3) (4) 2. A mass falls from a height ‘h’ and its time of fall
9 9
‘t’ is recorded in terms of time period T of a simple
37. A graph of the square of the velocity (v2) against
pendulum. On the surface of earth it is found that
the square of the acceleration (a 2) of a given
simple harmonic motion is t = 2T. The entire set up is taken on the
surface of another planet whose mass is half of
v2 v2 that of earth and radius the same. Same
experiment is repeated and corresponding times
noted as t and T. [NEET-2019 (Odisha)]
(1) (2)
Then we can say
2
a 2
a (1) t   2T  (2) t   2T 
2 2
v v
(3) t   2T  (4) t   2T 
(3) (4) 3. The displacement of a particle executing simple

harmonic motion is given by
2 2
a a
y = A0 + Asint + Bcost
38. A body is executing SHM. At a displacement x, its
potential energy is E1 and at a displacement y, its Then the amplitude of its oscillation is given by
potential energy is E2. Find its potential energy E [NEET-2019]
at displacement (x + y)
(1) A0  A2  B2 (2) A2  B 2
(1) E  E1 – E2 (2) E  E1  E2
(3) E = E1 + E2 (4) E = E1 – E2 (3) A02  ( A  B )2 (4) A + B
4. Average velocity of a particle executing SHM in 8. A body of mass m is attached to the lower end of
one complete vibration is [NEET-2019] a spring whose upper end is fixed. The spring has
negligible mass. When the mass m is slightly
A pulled down and released, it oscillates with a time
(1)
2 period of 3 s. When the mass m is increased by
(2) A 1 kg, the time period of oscillations becomes 5 s.
The value of m in kg is [NEET(Phase-2)-2016]
A2
(3) 3
2 (1)
4
(4) Zero
4
5. The radius of circle, the period of revolution, initial (2)
3
position and sense of revolution are indicated in the
figure 16
(3)
y 9
P (t = 0) 9
(4)
16
T=4s
9. A particle is executing a simple harmonic motion.
x Its maximum acceleration is  and maximum
3m velocity is . Then, its time period of vibration will
be [Re-AIPMT - 2015]
y - projection of the radius vector of rotating particle 2 2

(1) (2)
P is [NEET-2019]  2
 2
(1) y(t) = –3 cos2t, where y in m (3) (4)
 
 t  10. A particle is executing SHM along a straight line.
(2) y (t )  4 sin   , where y in m
2 Its velocities at distances x1 and x2 from the mean
position are v1 and v2 respectively. Its time period
 3t 
(3) y (t )  3 cos   , where y in m is [AIPMT - 2015]
 2 
v12  v 22 x12  x22
 t  (1) 2 (2) 2
(4) y (t )  3 cos   , where y in m x12  x22 v12  v 22
2
6. A pendulum is hung from the roof of a sufficiently x22  x12 v12  v 22
(3) 2 (4) 2
high building and is moving freely to and fro like a v12  v 22 x12  x22
simple harmonic oscillator. The acceleration of the
11. When two displacements represented by
bob of the pendulum is 20 m/s2 at a distance of y1 = a sin(t) and y2 = b cos(t) are superimposed
5 m from the mean position. The time period of the motion is [AIPMT - 2015]
oscillation is [NEET-2018]
(a  b )
(1) 2 s (2)  s (1) Simple harmonic with amplitude
2
(3) 1 s (4) 2 s (2) Not a simple harmonic
7. A particle executes linear simple harmonic motion a
with an amplitude of 3 cm. When the particle is at (3) Simple harmonic with amplitude
b
2 cm from the mean position, the magnitude of its
velocity is equal to that of its acceleration. Then its (4) Simple harmonic with amplitude a2  b2
time period in seconds is [NEET-2017]
12. The oscillation of a body on a smooth horizontal
5 5 surface is represented by the equation, x = Acos(t),
(1) (2) where x is displacement at time t and  is frequency
 2
of oscillation. Which one of the following graphs
4 2 shows correctly the variation a with t?
(3) (4)
5 3 [AIPMT - 2014]
15. The displacement of a particle along the x-axis is
a given by x = a sin2t. The motion of the particle
O corresponds to [AIPMT (Prelims)-2010]
(1) T t

(1) Simple harmonic motion of frequency

3
a (2) Simple harmonic motion of frequency
2
O T t (3) Non simple harmonic motion
(2)

(4) Simple harmonic motion of frequency
2
16. The period of oscillation of a mass M suspended
a
from a spring of negligible mass is T. If along with
O T t it another mass M is also suspended, the period
(3)
of oscillation will now be [AIPMT (Prelims)-2010]
T
(1) T (2)
2
a
O
(3) 2T (4) 2T
(4) T t
17. A simple pendulum performs simple harmonic
motion about x = 0 with an amplitude a and time
a
Here a = acceleration at time t and T = time period period T. The speed of the pendulum at x = will
2
13. Out of the following functions representing motion be [AIPMT (Prelims)-2009]
of a particle which represents SHM.
a 32a
(A) y = sin t – cos t (1) (2)
T T
(B) y = sin3 t
a 3 a 3
 3  (3) (4)
(C) y  5cos   3 t  T 2T
 4 
(D) y = 1 + t + 2t2 [AIPMT (Prelims)-2011] 18. Which one of the following equations of motion
represents simple harmonic motion?
(1) Only (A) and (B)
(2) Only (A)
(1) Acceleration = –k(x + a)
(3) Only (D) does not represent SHM
(2) Acceleration = k(x + a)
(4) Only (A) and (C) (3) Acceleration = kx
14. Two particles are oscillating along two close parallel
(4) Acceleration = –k0x + k1x2
straight lines side by side, with the same frequency
and amplitudes. They pass each other, moving in (Where k, k0, k1 and a are all positive.)
opposite directions when their displacement is half
19. Two simple harmonic motions of angular frequency
of the amplitude. The mean positions of the two
100 and 1000 rad s–1 have the same displacement
particles lie on a straight line perpendicular to the
paths of the two particles. The phase difference is amplitude. The ratio of their maximum accelerations
is [AIPMT (Prelims)-2008]
(1) 1 : 104

(1)  (2) (2) 1 : 10
6
2 (3) 1 : 102
(3) Zero (4)
3 (4) 1 : 103
20. A point performs simple harmonic oscillation of period 24. A particle executes simple harmonic oscillation with
T and the equation of motion is given by an amplitude a. The period of oscillation is T. The
minimum time taken by the particle to travel half of
 
x  a sin  t   . After the elapse of what fraction the amplitude from the equilibrium position is
 6
of the time period the velocity of the point will be
equal to half of its maximum velocity? T T
(1) (2)
[AIPMT (Prelims)-2008] 2 4
T T T T
(1) (2) (3) (4)
12 8 8 12
T T 25. A rectangular block of mass m and area of

(3)
6
(4)
3 cross-section A floats in a liquid of density . If it is
given a small vertical displacement from equilibrium
21. A mass of 2.0 kg is put on a flat pan attached to a it undergoes oscillation with a time period T. Then
vertical spring fixed on the ground as shown in the [AIPMT (Prelims)-2006]
figure. The mass of the spring and the pan is
negligible. When pressed slightly and released the 1
(1) T  (2) T
mass executes a simple harmonic motion. The spring A
constant is 200 N/m. What should be the minimum
amplitude of the motion so that the mass gets 1 1
(3) T  (4) T 
detached from the pan? [Take g = 10 m/s2]  m
m 26. The circular motion of a particle with constant speed

(1) Simple harmonic but not periodic
(2) Periodic and simple harmonic
[AIPMT (Prelims)-2007] (3) Neither periodic nor simple harmonic
(1) 10.0 cm (4) Periodic but not simple harmonic
(2) Any value less than 12.0 cm 27. A particle executing simple harmonic motion of
amplitude 5 cm has maximum speed of 31.4 cm/s.
(3) 4.0 cm The frequency of its oscillation is
(4) 8.0 cm [AIPMT (Prelims)-2005]
22. The phase difference between the instantaneous (1) 3 Hz (2) 2 Hz
velocity and acceleration of a particle executing (3) 4 Hz (4) 1 Hz
simple harmonic motion is [AIPMT (Prelims)-2007]
(1) Zero Questions asked Prior to Medical Ent. Exams. 2005
(2) 0.5  28. Which of the following is simple harmonic motion?
(3)  (1) Particle moving in a circle with uniform speed
(4) 0.707  (2) Wave moving through a string fixed at both
ends
23. The particle executing simple harmonic motion has
a kinetic energy K0cos2 t. The maximum values of (3) Earth spinning about its axis
the potential energy and the total energy are (4) Ball bouncing between two rigid vertical walls
respectively [AIPMT (Prelims)-2007]
29. A particle executes S.H.M. along x-axis. The force
(1) K0 and K0 (2) 0 and 2K0 acting on it is given by
K0 (1) A cos (kx) (2) Ae–kx

(3) and K0 (4) K0 and 2K0
2 (3) kx (4) – kx
30. Which one of the following statements is true for 34. Displacement between maximum potential energy
the speed v and the acceleration a of a particle position and maximum kinetic energy position for
a particle executing simple harmonic motion is
executing simple harmonic motion?
a
(1) When v is maximum, a is maximum (1) 
2
(2) Value of a is zero, whatever may be the value (2) + a
of v
(3) ± a
(3) When v is zero, a is zero
(4) – 1
(4) When v is maximum, a is zero 35. A particle of mass m oscillates with simple
31. A particle of mass m is released from rest and harmonic motion between points x1 and x2, the
equilibrium position being O. Its potential energy U
follows a parabolic path as shown. Assuming that
is plotted. It will be as given below in the graph
the displacement of the mass from the origin is
small. Which graph correctly depicts the position
of the particle as a function of time? U
v(x) (1)
m x1 x2
O
(x)
0 U
x(t) x(t)
(2)
x1 O x2
(1) t (2) t
0 0
U
x(t) x(t)
(3) x1 O x2
(3) (4)
t t
0 0
U
32. In a simple harmonic motion, when the
(4) x1 O x2
displacement is one-half the amplitude, what
fraction of the total energy is kinetic?
36. The potential energy of a simple harmonic
1 3
(1) (2) oscillator when the particle is half way to its end
2 4 point is
1
(3) Zero (4) 2 1
4 (1) E (2) E
3 8
33. A linear harmonic oscillator of force constant
1 1
2 × 106 N/m and amplitude 0.01 m has a total (3) E (4) E
mechanical energy of 160 J. Its 4 2
37. If the length of a simple pendulum is increased by
(1) Maximum P.E. is 160 J 2%, then the time period
(2) Maximum P.E. is zero (1) Increases by 1%
(2) Decreases by 1%
(3) Maximum P.E. is 100 J
(3) Increases by 2%
(4) Maximum P.E. is 120 J (4) Decreases by 2%
38. Two simple pendulums of length 5 m and 20 m 43. When an oscillator completes 100 oscillations its
respectively are given small linear displacements 1
in one direction at the same time. They will again amplitude reduced to of initial value. What will
3
be in the same phase when the pendulum of be its amplitude, when it completes 200
shorter length has completed ______ oscillations. oscillations?
(1) 2 1 2
(1) (2)
(2) 1 8 3
(3) 5 1 1
(3) (4)
(4) 3 6 9
39. Two masses MA and MB are hung from two strings 44. In case of a forced vibrations, the resonance wave
of length lA and lB respectively. They are executing becomes very sharp when the
SHM with frequency relation fA = 2fB, then relation (1) Damping force is small
IB (2) Restoring force is small
(1) I A  , does not depend on mass
4
(3) Applied periodic force is small
(2) IA = 4IB, does not depend on mass
(4) Quality factor is small
(3) IA = 2IB and MA = 2MB
IB MB 45. Two SHMs with same amplitude and time period,
(4) I A  and M A  when acting together in perpendicular directions
2 2

40. A mass m is vertically suspended from a spring of with a phase difference of , give rise to
negligible mass, the system oscillates with a 2
frequency n. What will be the frequency of the (1) Straight motion (2) Elliptical motion
system, if a mass 4m is suspended from the (3) Circular motion (4) None of these
same spring?
46. The equations of two SHMs is given as x = a cos
n 
(1)
2
(2) 4n (t + ) and y = a cos (t + ), where     ,
2
n the resultant of the two SHM’s represents
(3) (4) 2n
4 (1) A hyperbola (2) A circle
41. A mass is suspended separately by two different (3) An ellipse (4) None of these
springs in successive order then time periods is
t1 and t2 respectively. If it is connected by both 47. The damping force on an oscillator is directly
the springs as shown in figure then time period is proportional to the velocity. The units of the
t0, the correct relation is constant of proportionality are
(1) kg m s–1 (2) kg m s–2
(3) kg s–1 (4) kg s
K1 K2 48. A wave has SHM whose period is 4 s while
another wave which also possess SHM has its
m period 3 s. If both are combined, then the
resultant wave will have the period equal to
(1) t 02  t 12  t 22 (2) t 0 2  t 1 2  t 2 2 (1) 4 s (2) 5 s

(3) 12 s (4) 3 s
(3) t 01  t 11  t 21 (4) t0 = t1 + t2
SECTION - D
42. The time period of mass suspended from a spring
is T. If the spring is cut into four equal parts and NEET Booster Questions
the same mass is suspended from one of the
parts, then the new time period will be 1. If the ratio of amplitudes of wave in two different
strings is 2 : 1 and frequency ratio of wave is 1 : 2
T then ratio of power transmitted through the strings are
(1) (2) T
4 (1) 4 : 1 (2) 1 : 4
T
(3) (4) 2T (3) 16 : 1 (4) 1 : 1
2
2. The friction coefficient between two blocks as 8. The amplitude of a damped oscillator becomes half
shown in figure is  and horizontal plane is smooth. in one minute. The amplitude after 3 minutes will
If blocks are slightly displaced by x from mean
1
position and then released. Maximum friction force be times the original, where x is
acting between them in further motion is x
(1) 6 (2) 8
(3) 9 (4) 1

k m2 9. An object is performing damped oscillations. A
m1 force of magnitude F = F0cos(t) is applied on the
object. Displacement amplitude is maximum when
m1kx m2 kx (1) is slightly greater than natural frequency
(1) (m  m ) (2) (m  m )
1 2 1 2 (2) is slightly lesser than natural frequency
kx (3) is equal to natural frequency
(3) kx (4) (m  m )
1 2
(4) All of these
3. If a uniform square plate of edge a is suspended
through a corner such that it is free to rotate in 10. When two displacements represented by
vertical plane, then its time period of oscillation is  
x 1 = 3sin50t and x 2 = 4sin  50t   are
a  2
2 2a
(1) 2 (2) 2 superimposed then the motion is
g g
(1) S.H.M. with amplitude 5 units
a 2 2a
(3) 2 (4) 2 (2) S.H.M. with amplitude 7 units
3g 3g
4. The potential energy of a particle of mass m is given 7
(3) S.H.M. with amplitude units
by U(x) = U0(1 – cosx), where U0 and  are 2
constant. Time period of small oscillation of the (4) Not S.H.M. with amplitude 5 units
particle is
11. Relation between linear momentum (p) and position
m  2U0 (x) for harmonic oscillator of mass m is as shown
(1) T = 2 (2) T = 2
 2U0 m in figure. The period of oscillation is
m mU0 2b p
(3) T =  (4) T = 2 (1) T 
2
 U0  2 m
2ma
5. The average energy in one time period in simple (2) T 
harmonic motion is (symbols have usual meanings) b b
x
2 2 2 2 2a a
m A m A (3) T 
(1) (2) b
2 4
(3) m A2
2 (4) Zero 2b
(4) T 
ma
6. A particle moves on x-axis according to equation
x = a + bcost. The motion is simple harmonic 12. Total mechanical energy of oscillating particle
motion with amplitude oscillates with frequency nf , where f is frequency
of particle executing SHM then n is
(1) a (2) a + b
(3) a – b (4) b (1) 1 (2) 2
7. The amplitude of vibration is given by 1

(3) 0 (4)
A0 2
Am  2 , where A 0 , a, b, c are 13. Length of second’s pendulum is nearly
( a  b  c )
positive. The condition of resonant frequency is (1) 1 m (2) 2 m
(1) b2 = 4ac (2) b2 > 4ac 1
(3) b2 = 5ac (4) b2 = 7ac (3) 4 m (4) m
2
14. In a simple harmonic motion the acceleration 19. A simple pendulum has solid bob of relative density
6. It is oscillating inside a non-viscous liquid of relative
(1) Leads displacement by 180°
density 1.2. The time period of small oscillation of
(2) Leads velocity by 90° this pendulum (assume SHM) is given by
(3) Leads velocity by 180°
6l 5l
(4) Both (1) & (2) (1) 2 (2) 2
5g 4g
15. In a vertical spring, a mass produces elongation 
at equilibrium. The time period of vertical SHM of 4l 5l
such arrangement for small amplitude is (3) 2 (4) 2
5g 6g
g 20. A thin rod of length L and mass M oscillating about
(1) 2
 its one end is behaving like a physical pendulum.
Its time period of small oscillation is
1 
(2)
2 g L 3L
(1) 2 (2) 2
 g 2g
(3) 2
g 2L L
(3) 2 (4) 2
(4) Data insufficient 3g 2g
16. In the arrangement shown, the pulley is massless. 21. If a mass M is oscillated separately on two
Time period of vertical SHM of mass m is given as springs, then their time periods are T1 and T2
respectively. Now the two springs are connected in
k series and the same mass is oscillated through
them. Its time period will be given by
T1T2
m (1)
T12  T22
(2) T12  T22
T1  T2
m 4m (3) T1 T2 (4)
(1) 2 (2) 2 2
k k
22. In a simple harmonic motion on horizontal line
m m when the displacement of the particle is half of the
(3) 3 (4)  amplitude, then the fraction of its total energy which
4k k
is purely kinetic is
17. If two masses m1 and m2 are connected at the
two ends of a spring of constant k, then the time 3 1
period of small oscillations of either mass is given (1) (2)
4 2

by T  2 , where  = 1 1
k (3) (4)
4 12
m1  m2
(1) (2) m1 m2 23. A small horizontal platform is undergoing vertical
2
SHM of amplitude 1 cm. If a mass of 50 gram
m1m2 m1  m2 placed on its surface is to remain continuously in
(3) m  m (4) m  m contact with it, then the frequency of SHM should
1 2 1 2
be nearly equal to
18. A simple pendulum has length l = R, where
R = radius of the earth. The time period of its SHM (1) 10 Hz (2) 0.5 Hz
is
(3) 5 Hz (4) 150 Hz
R 2R
(1) 2 (2) 2 24. On the earth surface a simple pendulum has time
g g period T. It is taken to another planet having
acceleration due to gravity half and density nine
R R
(3) 2 (4)  times that of the earth. The time period of the
2g g pendulum on the new planet will be
(1) T 3 29. A particle is executing SHM with frequency N. The
frequency with which its kinetic energy changes
(2) T 2 into potential energy and vice-versa is
T (1) N (2) 2N
(3)
3 2 N N
(3) (4)
(4) 4 T 2 4
25. Maximum time period possible of a simple 30. The circular motion of a particle with constant
pendulum on the earth is approximately speed is
(1) 1 hour (2) 84.6 minute (1) Periodic but not simple harmonic
(3) 1 minute (4) 24 hours (2) Simple harmonic but not periodic
26. Variation of time period T of a simple pendulum (3) Period and simple harmonic
with its length L is best represented by (4) Neither periodic nor simple harmonic
31. A 1.00 × 10–20 kg particle is vibrating under simple
T T
harmonic motion with a period of 1.00 × 10–5 s
and with a maximum speed of 1.00 × 103 m/s. The
maximum displacement of particle from mean
(1) (2) position is
L L (1) 1.59 mm (2) 1.00 m

(3) 10 m (4) 3.18 mm
T T 32. The equation of an SHM with amplitude A and
angular frequency  in which all the distances are
measured from one extreme position and time is
(3) (4) taken to be zero at the other extreme position is
(1) x = A sin t
L L
(2) x = A (cos t + sin t)
27. Two simple pendulums have their lengths as 1.44 m
(3) x = A – A cos t
and 1.69 m respectively. They start in phase from
the mean position simultaneously. After how many (4) x = A + A cos t
oscillations of the longer pendulum they will be in
phase again? 33. A body oscillates with SHM according to the
equation x = (5.0 m) cos [(2 rad s–1)t + /4]
(1) 13 (2) 10
At t = 1.5 s, its acceleration is
(3) 2 (4) 12
(1) – 139.56 m/s2
28. A particle is executing SHM along x-axis as shown
(2) 139.56 m/s2
in the figure. Consider left to right direction as
positive. For the small displacement b to b (3) 69.78 m/s2
(4) – 69.78 m/s2
+
34. The time period of a particle executing SHM is
–A x=0 +A 8 s. At t = 0 it is at the mean position. The ratio
b b
of distance covered by the particle in 1st second to
(1) Change in acceleration vector is positive the 2nd second is
(2) Change in velocity vector is negative (1) ( 2 – 1) (2) 2

(3) Change in displacement is negative
1
(4) All of these (3) ( 2  1) (4)
2
35. Figure shows the position-time graph of an object  

in SHM. The correct equation representing this (1) (2)
3 2
motion is
2 4
x (cm) (3) (4)
3 5
4 40. A particle execute SHM along a straight line. The
2 amplitude of oscillation is 2 cm. When displacement
of particle from the mean position is 1 cm, the
0 t (s)
5 11 magnitude of its acceleration is equal to magnitude
of its velocity. The time period of oscillation is
–4
2 2
(1) (2)
2 2
 2   
(1) 2 sin t  (2) 4 sin t   2
 5 6 5 6 3
(3) (4)
3 2
   
(3) 4 sin t   (4) 4 sin t   41. When a mass m is attached to a spring it
6 3 6 6
oscillates with period 4 s. When an additional
36. A particle executes SHM and its position varies mass of 2 kg is attached to a spring, time period
with time as x = A sint. Its average speed during increases by 1 s. The value of m is
its motion from mean position to mid-point of mean
and extreme position is (1) 3.5 kg (2) 8.2 kg
3A
(3) 4.7 kg (4) 2.6 kg
(1) Zero (2)
 42. A body of mass 0.01 kg executes simple harmonic
motion about x = 0 under the influence of a force
A 2A
(3) (4) as shown in figure. The time period of SHM is
2 
37. A particle is executing SHM and its velocity v is F (N)
related to its position (x) as v2 + ax2 = b, where 80
a and b are positive constants. The frequency of 0.2
x (m)
oscillation of particle is –0.2
–80
1 b a
(1) (2)
2 a 2
(1) 1.05 s (2) 0.52 s
b 1 a (3) 0.25 s (4) 0.03 s
(3) (4)
2 2 b
43. A particle of mass m in a unidirectional potential
38. A particle executes SHM according to equation field have potential energy U(x) =  + 2x2, where
   and  are positive constants. Find its time period
x = 10 (cm) cos 2t   , where t is in second. of oscillation.
 2
The magnitude of the velocity of the particle at 2 m
(1) 2 (2) 2
1 m 2
t = s will be
6
(1) 24.7 cm/s m 
(3)  (4) 
 m
(2) 20.5 cm/s
(3) 28.3 cm/s 44. A loaded vertical spring executes S.H.M. with a
(4) 31.4 cm/s time period of 4 s. The difference between the
kinetic energy and potential energy of this system
39. Two particles executing SHM of same amplitude of varies with a period of
20 cm with same period along the same line
about same equilibrium position. The maximum (1) 2 s (2) 1 s
distance between the two is 20 cm. Their phase
(3) 8 s (4) 4 s
difference in radian is equal to
45. As a body performs SHM, its potential energy U 48. If the particle repeats its motion after a fixed time
varies with time t as indicated in interval of 8 s then after how much time its
maximum value of PE will be attained after
U
attaining its minimum value?
(1) 2 s (2) 4 s
t (3) 8 s (4) 1 s
(1)
49. A particle is executing SHM with total mechanical
energy 90 J and amplitude 6 cm. If its energy is
somehow decreased to 40 J then its amplitude will
U become
(1) 2 cm (2) 4 cm
t 8 4
(3) cm (4) cm
(2) 3 3
50. A linear harmonic oscillator of force constant
6  10 5 N/m and amplitude 4 cm, has a total
U energy 600 J. Select the correct statement.
(1) Maximum potential energy is 600 J
t
(2) Maximum kinetic energy is 480 J
(3) (3) Minimum potential energy is 120 J
(4) All of these
51. A simple pendulum of mass m executes SHM with
U
total energy E. If at an instant it is at one of
extreme positions, then its linear momentum after

t a phase shift of rad will be
(4) 3
3mE
(1) 2mE (2)
2
46. A particle is performing SHM with energy of vibration
2mE
90 J and amplitude 6 cm. When the particle (3) 2 mE (4)
reaches at distance 4 cm from mean position, it is 3
stopped for a moment and then released. The new 52. A flat horizontal board moves up and down under
energy of vibration will be SHM vertically with amplitude A. The shortest
permissible time period of the vibration such that an
(1) 40 J (2) 50 J object placed on the board may not lose contact
(3) 90 J (4) 60 J with the board is
47. The variations of potential energy (U) with position g A

x for three simple harmonic oscillators A, B and C (1) 2 (2) 2
A g
are shown in figure. The oscillators have same
mass. The time period of oscillation is greatest for 2A  A
U U U (3) 2 (4)
g 2 g
53. A second’s pendulum is mounted in a rocket. Its
period of oscillation will decrease when rocket is
x x x (1) Moving down with uniform acceleration

A B C
(2) Moving around the earth in geostationary orbit
(1) A (2) B (3) Moving up with uniform velocity
(3) C (4) Same for all (4) Moving up with uniform acceleration
54. The curve between square of frequency of 58. In the figure shown, there is friction between the
oscillation and length of the simple pendulum is blocks P and Q but the contact between the block
Q and lower surface is frictionless. Initially the block
(1) Straight line (2) Parabola Q with block P over it lies at x = 0, with spring at
(3) Ellipse (4) Hyperbola its natural length. The block Q is pulled to right and
then released. As the spring - blocks system
55. A small iron ball of mass m is suspended with the undergoes SHM with amplitude A, the block P tends
help of a massless rod of length L and is free to to slip over Q. P is more likely to slip at
oscillate in vertical plane. Its time period of
oscillation is
P
mL mL Q
(1) 2 (2) 2
2g g frictionless
x
L m
(3) 2 (4) 2 x = –A x=0 x = +A
g gL
(1) x = 0
56. A rectangular block of mass m and area of cross-
section A floats in a liquid of density . If it is (2) x = +A
given a small vertical displacement from A
equilibrium it undergoes oscillations with a time (3) x = 
2
period T, then
A
1 (4) x = 
(1) T  (2) T   2
m
59. A simple pendulum with iron bob has a time
1 1 period T. The bob is now immersed in a non-
(3) T  (4) T  viscous liquid and oscillated. If the density of liquid
A 
1
57. A body of mass 5 kg hangs from a spring and is th that of iron, then new time period will be
oscillates with a time period of 2 second. If the 12
body is removed, the length of the spring will
8 12
decrease by (1) T (2) T
7 13
(1) glk metre (2) klg metre
12 6
(3) 2 metre (4) g metre (3) T (4) T
11 5

Chapter 15
Waves
Chapter Contents
z Transverse and Longitudinal Most of us experience the phenomenon of wave propagation when we
Waves drop a stone in a pond of still water. These waves move outwards in
expanding circles until they reach the shore. It seems as if the water is
z Displacement Relation for a moving outward from the point of disturbance. If we examine carefully
Progressive Wave the motion of a leaf floating on the disturbed water, we see that the leaf
z The Principle of moves up and down about its original position but there is no
Superposition of Waves displacement of leaf towards the shore. Thus we can say that energy is
transferred but there is no transfer of medium. Such a pattern in which
z Reflection of Waves there is no actual transfer or flow of matter as a whole but energy is
transmitted from one part of a medium to another part is called wave.
z Beats
Waves travelling in a medium are closely connected to harmonic
z Doppler Effect oscillations.
In this chapter, we will discuss the type of propagation of waves
through different media, and the factors affecting the speed of waves
in them. We’ll also discuss the superposition of waves and Doppler’s
effect in sound.
There are mainly three types of waves :
1. Mechanical waves
2. Electromagnetic waves
3. Matter waves
1. Mechanical waves require a material medium for their
propagation. They cannot travel through vacuum. Sound waves,
water waves, and waves on a spring etc. are some examples of
mechanical waves.
2. Electromagnetic waves do not require a medium for their
propagation. They can travel through vacuum. X-rays, radio
waves, light etc., are electromagnetic waves.
3. Matter waves are associated with constituents of matter such
as electrons, protons, neutrons, atoms and molecules.
In this chapter, we will discuss mechanical waves and their
characteristic properties in details.
44 Waves NEET
TRANSVERSE AND LONGITUDINAL WAVES

Mechanical waves are further divided into two parts :
1. Transverse waves
2. Longitudinal waves
1. Transverse waves : Transverse waves are the waves in which the constituents of the medium oscillate
perpendicular to the direction of wave propagation.
If we give an upward jerk to one end of a long rope that has its opposite end fixed, a single wave pulse
is formed and travels along the rope with a fixed speed.
Pulse
Crest
But if we give continuous periodic up and down jerks to one end
of the rope, a sinusoidal wave is produced on the rope. It travels
in the form of crest and trough. One crest and one trough Trough
makes a wave. length of one wave called wave length. Harmonic wave
2. Longitudinal waves : Longitudinal waves are the waves in which the constituents of the medium oscillates
along the direction of wave propagation. It travels in the form of compression and rarefaction.
S. No. Transverse Longitudinal
Particles of the medium vibrate at right Particles of the medium vibrate

1
angles to the direction of wave motion in the direction of wave motion
Particle velocity is always Particle velocity is parallel or

2
perpendicular to wave velocity antiparallel to wave velocity
3 These can be polarised Cannot be polarised
Do not exist in gases as they do not Can exist in a solid, liquid or gas
4 possess shear modulus or modulus
of rigidity
DISPLACEMENT RELATION FOR A PROGRESSIVE WAVE

If, during propagation of a wave in a medium, the particles of the medium perform simple harmonic motion then
the wave is called a ‘simple harmonic progressive wave’ and a plane progressive wave travelling in
+x direction is given by the equation :
y = a sin (t – kx ± )
while the equation of a plane progressive wave travelling in –x direction is given by
y = a sin (t + kx ± )
Note :
2
Here   , [T is time period] is called angular frequency
T
2 
k  , [ is wavelength and v is wave velocity].
 v
This 'k' is called “angular wave number” or propagation constant.
NEET Waves 45
Wave Function
It is a mathematical description of the disturbances created by a wave. For a string, the wave function is a
(vector) displacement, whereas for sound waves, it is a (scalar) pressure or density fluctuations.
In xy frame
y = f (x)
y = y, x = x – vt
so, y = f (x – vt)
In general y = f (x ± vt)
y y
vt
O x
x
O
x=0 x = vt
A pulse is observed from a stationary (xy )
frame and a moving (xy) frame
(i) If y = f (x + vt), then wave is moving in negative x-direction with velocity v.

(ii) If y = f(x – vt), then wave is moving in positive x-direction with velocity v.
(iii) If y = f (x ± vt)2, y  f  x  vt  or f (x ± vt) 3 are valid wave equation.
(iv) y  f  
x  v t , y = f (x2 ± v2t) or f (x3 ± v3t) are not wave equation.
Differential Equation of Wave

2 y 1 2 y
It has been shown analytically that any function of space and time which satisfies the equation 
x 2 v 2 t 2
represents a wave.
Here y is the wave function and doesn’t necessarily denote y co-ordinate.
y = A sint or y = A sinkx, don’t satisfy the above equation so do not represent waves, while functions
y = A sin(t – kx), y = Alog(at + bx)
y = A sinkx sint or y = Asin(t – kx) + Bcos(t + kx)
satisfy the above equation, so represent waves.
Equations of the form y = f(at ± bx) represent travelling or progressive waves. Following are the common
travelling wave equations :
Travelling
y = Alog(at + bx), y=  ax  bt  , y = (ax – bt)2,
– B  x – vt 
2
y  Ae , y = Asin(ax – bt)2, y = acos2(t – kx) or
y = acost sin(t – kx)

But y = A sin(2x2 – 3t2), y = A sin(ax2 + bt), y = coskx. sint, don’t represent traveling or progressive waves.
46 Waves NEET
If a traveling wave is a sine or cosine function it is known as harmonic wave.

In our exam we are asked just to recognize the equations of spherical and cylindrical progressive waves.
A A
y sin  t – kr  represents spherical progressive waves, while y = sin  t – kr  represents cylindrical
r r
progressive waves.
Maximum exam questions are related to one dimensional plane progressive waves which is given by
y  A sin  t ∓ kx   
Just remember the meaning of each term and the various forms in which the equation can be
written as follows :
(i) y in general is disturbance produced by the wave but right now remember it is just the displacement of
medium particles from its mean position. It’ll be given in centimeter or meter.
(ii) A represents the amplitude or maximum displacement of the medium particle from the mean position,
will be given in centimeter or metre.
(iii)  is known as angular or circular frequency of medium particle in oscillation under SHM. Its unit will
2
be radian per sec.  = 2 = , where  is natural frequency given in hertz or per sec or cycle per sec.
T
T is time period given in second.
(iv) t is the variable time from when the wave begins. Given in second.
(v) –ve sign between t and x indicates that the wave is travelling in +ve, x-direction.
2
(vi) k is called propagation constant or angular wave number and given by k = , where  is the

1
wavelength. Note that is also written as  or wave number which indicates the number of waves per metre.

(vii) x is the position of the medium particle from where the wave has started.
(viii) The constant  is called phase constant or initial phase.
dy
(xi) Medium particle velocity vp =  A cos  t ∓ kx 
dt
So, maximum particle velocity vpmax = A
(x) vp = – vw × slope of wave.
dy
vp  v w 
dx
Example 1 : The frequency of a tuning fork is 150 Hz and distance travelled by the sound, produced in air is
20 cm in one vibration. Calculate the speed of sound in air.
Solution : v = 
Distance travelled by the sound in one vibration equals wavelength of sound wave
1
 = 20 cm = m
5
1
 Speed of sound in air, v   150  30 m/s
5
NEET Waves 47
Speed of a transverse wave on stretched string
T T stress
v  
 2
r  density
Where
T = Tension in string
r = Radius of string
 = Density of material of string
Example 2 : Calculate the velocity of the transverse wave in a string which is stretched by a load of 15 kg.
The mass of the string is 3  10–2 kg and its length is 2 m.
T
Solution : Velocity of transverse wave in a string is given by v 

Here, we have T = weight of the load = 15  9.8 N
M 3  102
and    1.5  102 kg m1
L 2
T 15  9.8
 v  = 9800  98.99 m/s
 1.5  102
Speed of longitudinal waves:

(a) Longitudinal wave in a solid
Y
(i) In a stretched string v  Y  Young’s modulus

  mass density
W
4
B
(ii) In an extended solid v  3   modulus of rigidity

(b) Longitudinal Waves
B
(i) In liquid v  B = bulk modulus of elasticity

B
(ii) In gases v  . For gases, B depends upon the process. For adiabatic (B = P)

Example 3 : Calculate the speed of longitudinal wave in steel. Young’s modulus for steel is 3  1010 N/m2 and
its density is 1.2  103 kg/m3.
3  1010
Solution : Speed of longitudinal wave is v   5000 m/s
1.2  103
48 Waves NEET
Example 4 : If the speed of longitudinal mechanical waves in water is 1400 m/s then calculate the Bulk
modulus of elasticity of water. (given density of water is 1 g/cm3).
B
Solution : Speed of longitudinal wave is v 

B
140000 cm/s =
1
 B = 1.96  1010 dyne/cm2 = 1.96  109 N/m2
Speed of Sound in Gases (Newton’s Formula)
Newton assumed that when sound waves propagate through a gas, the change in pressure and volume of
the gas are isothermal.
P
According to Newton the speed of longitudinal waves in an ideal gas is v  .

Where P is isothermal elastic constant of gas.
Example 5 : The speed of sound in air at NTP is 332 m/s. Calculate the percentage error in speed of sound
as calculated from Newton’s formula. Given that the density of air is 1.293 kg/m3.
P
Solution : From Newton’s formula, v 

At NTP, P = 1.01  105 Pa
1.01 105
v  280 m/s
1.293
Difference in velocity = 332 – 280 = 52 m/s
52
%error =  100  15.7%
332
Laplace Correction
Laplace pointed out that the pressure variations in the gases when sound propagates are adiabatic and not
isothermal.
For an adiabatic process, PV  = Constant
B = P
According to Laplace the speed of sound in a gas is
P
v P = Adiabatic elastic constant of gas

For air,  = 1.40
1.40  1.01 105

  331.3 m/s
1.29
NEET Waves 49
z Various quantities affecting speed of sound in gases
(i) Effect of pressure: There is no effect on pressure on speed of sound.
P
(ii) Effect of temperature : On increasing temperature, speed of sound increases, proportional to
absolute temperature
v T T is in kelvin
v1 T1

v2 T2
If temperature is in Celsius then
1
 t 2
vt  v0 1  
 273 
v t  v 0  0.61 t
v v2 v
 tan  = 0.61
v0
T (K ) T (K) t(°C)
(iii) Effect of humidity: Speed of sound in dry air is less than, that in humid air. Because density of
dry air is greater than the humid air.
(iv) Effect of frequency: There is no effect of frequency on speed of sound.
Example 6 : Calculate the speed of sound in hydrogen at N.T.P., if density of hydrogen at N.T.P. is 1/16th of
air. Given that the speed of sound in air is 332 m/s.
P
Solution : Speed of sound in air is given by v a  a
P
Speed of sound in hydrogen is vH =
H
∵ For air as well as hydrogen,  = 1.40
vH a
   16
va H
 vH = 4va
= 4  332 = 1328 m/s

50 Waves NEET
Pressure Progressive Waves

A sound wave may be considered as either a displacement wave y = A sin(t – kx) or a pressure wave
p = p0 cos(t – kx).
The pressure wave is 90° out of phase with respect to displacement wave. The amplitude of pressure wave,
2
p0 = BkA, where B is bulk modulus, k is propagation constant = and A is displacement amplitude.

Equation of wave pulse
a
y
b  ( x  vt )2
Characteristics of Sound
Sound has following three characteristics viz., (i) Loudness (ii) pitch (iii) Quality.
 energy 
(i) Loudness : Loudness is related to the intensity   of sound and measured in the unit ‘bel’
 time × area 
l
as L  log10 , I is the intensity of sound to be measured and I0 is a constant reference intensity
l0
10–12 W/m2 at frequency around 1 kHz.
l
L  10log10 decibel
l0
Note : (a) Loudness of a sound of given intensity may be different for different listeners. So, two
sounds of equal intensity but different frequency may not appear to be equally loud even
to the same listener because the sensitivity of the ear is different for different frequencies.
(b) When intensity of a sound doubles its loudness increases by almost 3 dB and if the
intensity quadruples, the loudness increases by 6dB and so on.
l2
Intensity level L2  L1  10log10
l1
(ii) Pitch : Pitch is related to the frequency of sound. A shrill or sharp sound has high frequency hence higher
pitch and a grave or dull sound has low frequency hence lower pitch.
(iii) Quality : A particular sound may have a number of frequencies and overtones attached to it. That makes
its quality.
Example 7 : What is the intensity of sound of 70 decibel? (Given the reference intensity I0 = 10–12 W/m2)
I
Solution : Loudness (in decibel) = 10log10
I0
I
or, 70 = 10 log10 I
0
I
or,  107
I0
or, I = I0107 = 10–12 × 107 = 10–5 W/m2
NEET Waves 51
EXERCISE
1. A plane progressive wave propagating along positive x-axis is
(1) y = A sin(t + kx) (2) y = A sin(t – kx)
(3) y = A sint sin kx (4) y = A [sin t] kx
5
2. The wave function of a pulse is given by y  , where x and y are in metre and t is in second.
1  (4 x  6t )2
The velocity of pulse is
(1) 2 m/s (2) 6 m/s
(3) 1.5 m/s (4) 3 m/s
3. The equation of the progressive wave, where t is the time in second, x is the distance in metre is
 x 
y  A cos 240  t   . The phase difference (in SI units) between two positions 0.5 m apart is
 12 
(1) 40 (2) 20 (3) 10 (4) 5
4. A transverse wave propagating on the string can be described by the equation y = 2sin (10x + 300t),
where x and y are in metres and t in second. If the vibrating string has linear density of 0.6 × 10–3 g/cm, then
the tension in the string is
(1) 5.4 N (2) 0.054 N (3) 54 N (4) 0.0054 N
5. A rope of length L and mass m hangs freely from the ceiling. The velocity of transverse wave as a function of
position x along the rope is proportional to
1
(1) x0 (2) x (3) (4) x
x
6. The speed of sound in hydrogen at NTP, is 1270 m/s. Then the speed in a mixture of hydrogen and oxygen
in the ratio 4 : 1 by volume, (in m/s) will be
(1) 635 (2) 318 (3) 158 (4) 1270
7. A copper wire is held at the two ends by rigid supports. At 50°C the wire is just taut, with negligible tension.
If Y = 1.2 × 1011 N/m2,  = 1.6 × 10–5/°C and  = 9.2 × 103 kg/m3, then the speed of transverse waves in
this wire at 30°C is
(1) 64.6 m/s (2) 16.2 m/s (3) 23.2 m/s (4) 32.2 m/s
8. The wavelength of sound waves in hydrogen gas corresponding to the lower limit of audibility is (speed of sound
in hydrogen gas is about 1350 m/s)
(1) 60 m (2) 67.5 m (3) 100 m (4) 500 m
9. An iron block is dropped into a deep well. Sound of splash is heard after 4.23 s. If the depth of the well is
78.4 m, then find the speed of sound in air (g = 9.8 m/s2)
(1) 300 m/s (2) 320 m/s (3) 280 m/s (4) 340.8 m/s
10. If the intensity of sound is increased by a factor of 30, by how many decibels is the sound level increased?
(1) 12 dB (2) 14.77 dB (3) 10 dB (4) 13 dB
52 Waves NEET
THE PRINCIPLE OF SUPERPOSITION OF WAVES

Whenever two wave pulses travelling in opposite directions cross each other, they retain their individual
identities. The resultant displacement, at the instant they overlap, is the vector sum of the displacement due
to each pulse. Thus we can say that each pulse moves as if others are not present. This is called the
principle of superposition of waves.
 2 
Example 8 : Two waves represented by y = a sin(t – kx) and y = a sin  t  kx  are superposed. What
 3 
will be the amplitude of the resultant wave?
2
Solution : The two waves have the same amplitude and a constant phase difference of .
3
Therefore, resultant amplitude is given by

R = 2a cos
2
 2 
 R = 2a cos  
 6 
= 2a cos60° = a
REFLECTION OF WAVES
(a) Rigid end: When a progressive wave, like a transverse wave travelling along a stretched string arrives at a
rigid boundary, the wave gets reflected. The reflected wave suffers a phase change of 180° on reflection.
Incident wave
Reflected wave
The phenomenon of echo is an example of reflection of sound by a rigid boundary.

Mathematically, equation of incident travelling wave is
yi(x, t) = a sin(t –kx)
At a rigid boundary, the reflected wave is given by
yr(x, t) = a sin(t +kx + )
= – a sin(t + kx)
(b) Free end: When a wave reflects from a free end. In such a case, the reflected wave has the same phase as the
incident wave.
Mathematically, equation of incident travelling wave is
Incident wave
yi(x, t) = a sin(t – kx)
The reflected wave is given by
yr(x, t) = a sin(t + kx)
Reflected wave
NEET Waves 53
Example 9 : The echo of a gunshot is heard 5 seconds after it is fired. Calculate the distance of the surface
which reflects the sound. The velocity of sound is 332 m/s.
v  t 332  5
Solution : Distance of the surface which reflects the sound =   166  5 = 830 m
2 2
Standing Waves From Free End

When two waves identical in all respects, but travelling in opposite direction along a straight line, superimpose
on each other, standing waves are produced.
z Longitudinal stationary waves are formed in organ pipes.
z Transverse stationary waves are formed in sonometer wire.
Let y1 = A sin(t – kx) and y2 = A sin(t + kx) be the equation of incident and reflected wave
respectively from free end.
From principle of superposition.
y = y1 + y2 = 2A coskx sint
2A coskx represents the amplitude of particle located at position x.
(i) For x = 0, , 2 and so on, amplitude is maximum i.e., 2A. These points are called antinodes.
 3
(ii) For x , , ...... and so on, amplitude is minimum or 0. These points are called nodes.
4 4

(iii) Distance between consecutive nodes = distance between consecutive antinodes = .
2

(iv) Distance between adjacent node and antinodes = .
4
(v) All the particles in same loop i.e., between two adjacent nodes vibrate in same phase.
(vi) Particles on the opposite side of a node vibrate in opposite phase.
(vii) In pure stationary wave node is always at rest. There is no transfer of energy across a node.
(viii) In longitudinal stationary waves, a point where displacement node is formed, pressure is maximum i.e.
pressure antinode is formed.
(ix) All the particles of medium pass through their mean position simultaneously twice in each time period.
Note : Equations of the following forms also represent stationary waves.

1. y = 2a sin(kx) sin(t)
2. y = 2a cos(kx) sin(t)
3. y = 2a cos(kx) cos(t)
Vibration of stretched string

If the length of the string is L, then its first end can be described as x = 0, while the other end is denoted
as x = L.
nv n T
  This relation gives the expression for the natural frequency of vibration of string.
2L 2L 
We thus obtain the normal modes of oscillation of the system
v 1 T
For n = 1, 1  
2L 2L 
This mode of vibration is called the fundamental mode or 1st harmonic.
54 Waves NEET
A
x=0 x =L
First harmonic or fundamental mode
A
L
2v  2 T
For n = 2,  2 =
2L 2L 
A A
x=0 N x =L
Second harmonic or first overtone
A A
3v  3 T
For n = 3,  3 =
2L 2L 
A A A
x=0 N N x =L
Third harmonic or second overtone
A A A
L
nth overtone = (n +1)th harmonics
Example 10 : The equation given below represents a stationary wave set-up in a medium
y = 12 sin(4 x) sin(40 t),
where y and x are in cm and t is in second. Calculate the amplitude, wavelength and velocity of
the component waves.
Solution : Compare the given equation with stationary wave equation, y = 2a sinkx sint
We have 2a = 12 cm, k = 4,  = 40
Therefore, amplitude of the component wave = 6 cm,
k = 4
2
 4

1
    0.5 cm
2
 40
Further velocity of the wave, v    10 cm/s
k 4
Example 11 : A string 50 cm long is under a tension of 20 N force. Calculate the frequency of fundamental mode
given that mass of the string is 1 g.
Solution : Frequency of fundamental mode
v 1 T 1 20  0.5
  = = 100 Hz
2L 2L  2  0.5 1 103
NEET Waves 55
Normal Modes of Oscillation of an Air Column with One End Closed and Other Open (Closed Organ Pipe)
A glass tube partially filled with water is an example of such a system. Further a closed organ pipe which
is closed at one end, also illustrates this system.
And the frequencies of different modes can be calculated as
v


General relation for natural frequencies of closed organ pipe
(2n  1)v

4L
v
For n = 1 1  . This mode is called fundamental mode or 1st harmonic
4L
N A
3v
For n = 2 2  is called 3rd harmonic or 1st overtone
4L
N A A
N
5v
For n = 3 3  is called 5th harmonic or 2nd overtone
4L
N A A A
N N
Therefore n  (2n  1)1
n th overtone = (2n + 1)th harmonics
Note : In a closed organ pipe only odd harmonics are present i.e., odd multiples of the fundamental
frequency.
Normal Modes of Oscillation in Open Organ Pipe

In case of an open pipe, the reflecting surface is an open boundary at both ends of the pipe. Therefore, the
reflecting wave is in phase with the incident wave.
General relation for natural frequency of open organ pipe
nv
 n = 1, 2, 3…
2L
56 Waves NEET
v
For n = 1, 1  is called the fundamental mode or 1st harmonic
2L
x=0 x=L
A A
N
2v
For n = 2, 2  is called 2nd harmonic or 1st overtone
2L
x=0 x=L
A A A
N N
3v
For n = 3, 3  is called 3rd harmonic or 2nd overtone
2L
x=0 x=L
A A A A
N N N
Therefore in general  n  n1
n th overtone = (n + 1)th harmonics
End correction: In open and closed organ pipes antinodes will not form just at the open end, it forms some
outside the open end. The distance of the antinode out side the open end called end correction. It depends
on diameter of pipes, and equal to 0.3 D
–
e –
e

.
–e
Effective length of Effective length of
open pipe = (1 + 2e ) closed pipe = ( + e)
Note : If length given in resonance tube, for condition of resonance are with end correction then second
resonance obtained at three times of first resonance other wise at more than three times.
2  e
3
2  e
2 = 31 + 2e
NEET Waves 57
Example 12 : Calculate the fundamental frequency of a closed organ pipe of length 66.4 cm at 0°C, if the velocity
of sound at 0°C is 332 m/s.
Solution : Fundamental frequency of a closed organ pipe
v 332
=   100 = 125 Hz
4L 4  66.4
Example 13 : Calculate the frequency of 2nd harmonic in an open organ pipe of length 34 cm if the velocity of
sound is 340 m/s.
Solution : In an open organ pipe, the frequency of the second harmonic is
v 2  340
2  2    1000 Hz
2L 2  0.34
Example 14 : Compare the length of a closed organ pipe and an open organ pipe, if the second overtone of the
open pipe is in unison with the second overtone of the closed organ pipe.
3v
Solution : 2nd overtone of open pipe =
2L
5v
2nd overtone of closed organ pipe =
4L
Given that the two frequencies are in unison.
3v 5v
 
2L 4L
L 5

L 6
BEATS
When two harmonic sound waves of equal amplitude but slightly different frequencies travelling in same
direction superpose, the resultant wave (shown in the following figure) looks like a single sinusoidal wave with
a varying amplitude that goes from maximum to zero and back. The amplitude variation causes the variation
of intensity called beats one rise and one fall makes a beat. The frequency with which the amplitude rises
and falls is called the beat frequency and is equal to the difference in frequencies of the two waves.
at x = 0, the two waves can be given by
S1 = a cos1t and
Figure shows phenomenon of beats for two
S2 = a cos2t harmonic waves of frequencies 11 Hz and 9 Hz
Symbol S refers to longitudinal displacement,
1.0
and not the transverse one. y
(a) 0 t (s)
Now according to principle of superposition, –1.0
the resultant displacement is S = S1 + S2
1.0
S = a cos1t + a cos2t (b) y 0 t (s)
 Angular beat frequency beat = (1 – 2)
–1.0
Also,  = 2
2.0
 beat frequency beat  1   2 1.0
(c) y 0 t (s)
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
   2  –1.0
Frequency of resultant wave   1 
 2  –2.0
58 Waves NEET
Note : If the beats produced is less then or equal to 10 beat/s, than beats observed will also be same.
But if beats produced is greater than 10 beats/s, then beat observed is zero.
Example 15 : What is the beat frequency, when two waves of frequency 450 Hz and 456 Hz are superposed?
Solution : Beat frequency () = |1 – 2|

= 456 Hz – 450 Hz = 6 Hz
Example 16 : A tuning fork produces 3 beats per second when sounded together with a fork of frequency
364 Hz. When the first fork is loaded with a little wax then the number of beats becomes two
per second. What is the frequency of the first fork?
Solution : Number of beats  = ± (1 – 2)
 1 =2 +  or 2 – 
 1 = 364 + 3 or 364 – 3
= 367 or 361 Hz
Loading a fork with wax decreases its frequency.
On loading the first fork, the number of beats produced per second decreases therefore 1 = 367 Hz.
DOPPLER EFFECT
Whenever there is a relative motion between the source of sound and an observer, the frequency of sound
received or heard by the observer is different from the frequency of sound produced by the source. This is
called Doppler effect. Doppler effect is also valid for electromagnetic waves. However, in this chapter we shall
consider only sound waves.
Doppler effect can be observed when
(i) The source is moving but the observer is stationary.
(ii) The observer is moving but the source is stationary.
(iii) Both the source and observer are moving.
Note : Doppler effect is symmetric in electromagnetic waves as they do not require any medium to
propagate but asymmetric in case of sound waves. Therefore, the observed frequency of sound when the
observer is at rest and source is moving is different from that when the observer is moving and source
is at rest. This can be easily understood from the first two cases discussed below.
(i) Source Moving : Observer Stationary

For a source moving away from observer.
 v  vS v
  0   O
v  v S
 s 
For a source approaching the observer, we replace vs by –vs to get,
 v  S
v
  0   vS
O
v  vs 
Note : If source moves, then both wavelength and frequency observed by observer changes.
NEET Waves 59
(ii) Observer Moving : Source Stationary
S v
If the observer moves towards source O
v0
 v  v0 
  0  
 v 
v
If the observer moves away from the source S v0
O
 v  v0 
  0  
 v 
Note : If observer moves then there is no change in wavelength, but apparent frequency will change.
(iii) Both Source and Observer Moving
When both source and observer moves then

 v  v0 
  0  
 v  vs 
(iv) Wall is approaching source and observer both at rest:
v = velocity of sound
‘0 ’
S vw
O wall
Direct frequency = 0
 v  vw 
Received frequency by observer =  v  v  0
 w 
 v  vw   2vw 
Beats frequency = 0  v  v  1  0  v  v 
 w   w 
Example 17 : A listener is at rest and a police siren is moving away from the listener at 60 m/s. What frequency
does the listener hear given that the velocity of sound in air is 340 m/s and frequency of siren is
500 Hz?
Solution : Observed frequency,
 v   340  340 1700

    = 
  500 = 400  500  = 425 Hz
 v  v s   340 60  4
Example 18 : A police siren emits a sound wave of frequency 440 Hz. The speed of sound is 332 m/s. If the
siren is moving away from the listener with a speed of 18 m/s relative to the air and the listener
is moving towards the siren with a speed of 68 m/s relative to the air, then what frequency does
the listener hear?
 v  vL   332  68  400
Solution :   0 =  332  18   440 =  440 = 502.85 Hz
 v  vs    350
60 Waves NEET
Example 19 : A man is travelling in a train towards the station with a speed of 50 m/s. Calculate the apparent
frequency heard by him of a whistle which is blown at the station with a frequency 200 Hz. Velocity
of sound in air is 350 m/s.
Solution : Here in this case, observer is moving and source is at rest. Therefore, apparent frequency heard
by the observer is
 v  v0   350  50  400
     200 =  200 = 228.57 Hz
 v  =  350  350
EXERCISE
11. Two superimposing waves are represented by equation y1  2sin2(10t  0.4 x ) and y 2  4 sin2(20t  0.8 x ) .
The ratio of Imax to Imin is
(1) 36 : 4 (2) 25 : 9
(3) 1 : 4 (4) 4 : 1
12. A wave represented by the equation y = acos(kx – t) is superposed with another wave to form a stationary
wave such that the point x = 0 is a node. The equation for the other wave is
(1) asin(kx + t) (2) –acos(kx + t)
(3) –acos(kx – t) (4) –asin(kx – t)
13. A suspension bridge is to be built across valley where it is known that the wind can gust at 5 s intervals. It
is estimated that the speed of transverse waves along the span of the bridge would be 400 m/s. The danger
of resonant motions in the bridge at its fundamental frequency would be greater if the span had a length of
(1) 2000 m (2) 1000 m
(3) 400 m (4) 80 m
14. If the fundamental frequency of string is 220 cps, the frequency of fifth harmonic will be
(1) 44 cps (2) 55 cps
(3) 1100 cps (4) 440 cps
15. Which of the following wave phenomenon is not shown by sound wave?
(1) Interference (2) Diffraction
(3) Polarisation (4) Doppler’s effect
16. The fundamental frequency of a pipe closed at one end is 100 Hz. If close end is open the fundamental
frequency of same pipe will be
(1) 100 Hz (2) 200 Hz
(3) 50 Hz (4) 400 Hz
17. Two tuning fork A and B are sounded together gives 5 beats per second. If frequency of B is 260 Hz and after
loading B with wax the beat frequency increases the frequency of A is
(1) 265 Hz (2) 255 Hz
(3) 260 Hz (4) 250 Hz

NEET Waves 61
18. A policeman on duty detects a drop of 10% in the pitch of the horn of motion of car as it crosses him. If the
velocity of sound is 330 m/s. Calculate the speed of the car
(1) 17.4 m/s (2) 20.4 m/s
(3) 18.6 m/s (4) 16.4 m/s
19. A locomotive approaching a crossing at a speed of 20 ms–1 sounds a whistle of frequency 640 Hz when 1 km
from the crossing. There is no wind and the speed of sound in air is 330 ms–1. What frequency is heard by
an observer 3 km on the straight road from the crossing at right angle.
O
Observer
3 km
d
un
So
S 1 km C
–1
20 ms Crossing
Motion of Locomotive
(1) 600 Hz (2) 630 Hz
(3) 660 Hz (4) 720 Hz
20. Two sources A and B are sounding notes of frequency 660 Hz. A listener moves from A to B with a constant
velocity u. If the speed of sound is 330 m/s, what must be the value of u so that he hears 8 beats per second?
(1) 2.8 m/s (2) 2 m/s
(3) 3.0 m/s (4) 3.5 m/s

t
en
nm nment
sig ssig
As A Assignment
Assignment
5. Doppler effect of sound depends on
SECTION - A
[NCERT Pg. 384]
NCERT Based MCQs
(1) Intensity of sound wave
1. Equation of a transverse wave pulse is
(2) Distance between source and listener
9
y  , (where x and y are in metre (3) Relative velocity between source and listener
3  ( x – 10t )2
and t is in second). The speed of the wave pulse (4) Both (2) and (3)
is [NCERT Pg. 377] 6. A stationary source of sound wave is having
(1) 3 m/s (2) 5 m/s frequency f 0. Sound is reflected from a large
vertical plane surface moving towards the source
(3) 10 m/s (4) 100 m/s with a speed v. If speed of sound in medium is c,
2. Which of the following two wave equations can then frequency of reflected wave received by the
form stationary wave? [NCERT Pg. 379] stationary observer near the source is
(i) y = A cos(t + kx) [NCERT Pg. 386]

(ii) y = A sin(t + kx)  c v 
(1)   f0 (2) f0
(iii) y = A sin(t – kx) c –v 
(iv) y = A cos(t – kx) c –v  c v 
(3)   f0 (4)   f0
(1) (i) and (ii) (2) (iii) and (iv) c v   c 
(3) (i) and (iv) (4) Both (1) and (2) 7. A uniform rope of mass 0.1 kg and length 2.45 m
3. Two sound waves of wavelengths 1 and 2(2 > 1) hangs from a ceiling. The time taken by a transverse
produce n beats/s. The speed of sound is wave to travel the full length of the rope is
(g = 9.8 m/s2) [NCERT Pg. 375]
[NCERT Pg. 383]
(1) 4 s (2) 3 s
n (  2 – 1 ) (3) 10 s (4) 1 s
(1)
1  2
8. A 1.50 m long rope is stretched between two
(2) n(2 – 1) supports with a tension that makes the speed of
transverse wave 48 m/s. The wavelength of second
n 1  2
(3) overtone is [NCERT Pg. 381]
 2 – 1
(1) 1 m (2) 2 m
n 1  2 (3) 3 m (4) 4 m
(4)
1   2
9. The equation of a wave is given by
4. The fundamental frequency in an open organ pipe
y = 10sin(50t + 5x) (where x, y are in m and t is
is equal to the fifth harmonic of a closed organ
in s) The ratio of maximum particle velocity to wave
pipe. If the length of the open organ pipe is 10 cm,
velocity is [NCERT Pg. 373]
then length of the closed pipe is[NCERT Pg. 382]
(1) 15 cm (1) 50
(2) 20 cm (2) 5
(3) 25 cm (3) 10
(4) 40 cm (4) 100
NEET Waves 63
10. The speed of sound in air at N.T.P. is 332 m/s. If 15. Three consecutive resonant frequencies of
th stretched string fixed at both ends are 60 Hz,
 1
density of hydrogen at N.T.P. is   of air, then 90 Hz and 120 Hz then [NCERT Pg. 382]
16  
(1) The fundamental frequency is 30 Hz
the speed of sound in hydrogen is
(2) The given frequencies are 1st, 3 rd and 5 th
[NCERT Pg. 376]
harmonic
(1) 664 m/s (2) 996 m/s
(3) The given frequencies are 1st, 2 nd and 3rd
(3) 1328 m/s (4) 1028 m/s overtone
11. The phase difference between the particles A and (4) Both (1) and (3) are correct
B for a wave located as shown in figure is
[NCERT Pg. 373] SECTION - B
y Objective Type Questions
B 1. The property of a transverse wave that can
o A x distinguish it from a longitudinal wave
/8 (1) Ripple (2) Diffraction
(3) Polarization (4) All of these
3 7
(1) (2) 2. The angle between particle velocity and wave
4 4
velocity in transverse wave is
3 5
(3) (4) 
2 4 (1)  (2)
2
  
12. Three waves y1  2A sin  t –  ,
 3 (3) (4) Zero
4
  3. If velocity of sound in moist air is v1 and velocity
y 2  2 A sin  t   and y 3  – A sin(t ) interfere
 3 of sound in dry air is v 2 then under identical
each other. The amplitude of the resultant wave is condition of pressure and temperature.
[NCERT Pg. 377] (1) v1 > v2 (2) v1 < v2
(1) A (2) Zero (3) v1 = v2 (4) v1  v2
(3) 2A (4) 3A 4. The equation of spherical progressive wave is
13. A transverse wave is travelling along a string. A

(1) y = Asin(kx –t) (2) y  sin  kx  t 
If wave is reflected by a rigid boundary then phase r
of reflected wave is changed by [NCERT Pg. 379]
A A
(1) Zero (2)  (3) y  sin  kx  t  (4) y  sin  kx  t 
r 2r
(3) /2 (4) /4 5. The equation of a travelling wave is given by
14. Two forks A and B, when sounded together produce v particle max .
y = 10cos(1200t – 3x) metre, the is
2 beat/s. The fork A is in unison with 30 cm length v wave
of a sonometer wire and B is in unison with 25 cm (1) 30 (2) 20
length of the same wire at the same tension. The
frequency of fork A and B are respectively (3) 15 (4) 10
6. To increase the frequency from 50 Hz to 200 Hz
[NCERT Pg. 383]
the tension in string increases to
(1) 12 Hz, 14 Hz (1) 2 times
(2) 10 Hz, 12 Hz (2) 4 times
(3) 20 Hz, 22 Hz (3) 8 times
(4) 8 Hz, 10 Hz (4) 16 times
64 Waves NEET
7. Two tuning forks have frequencies 520 Hz and 13. The vibration of a string is represented by
524 Hz respectively. On sounding these forks
 x 
together, the time interval between two successive y  5 sin   cos( 48t ) , where x and y are in cm
maximum intensity is  15 
and t in second then amplitude of the superposing
1 1
(1) s (2) s wave is
2 4
(1) 1.25 cm (2) 5 cm
(3) 1 s (4) 2 s
(3) 10 cm (4) 2.5 cm
8. The equation of two progressive waves is given by
14. In a closed organ pipe, the first resonance occurs
y1 = Asin(kx – t) and y2 = Asin(kx – t + ),
at 25 cm, at what length of pipe, the second
then amplitude of medium particle will be
resonance will occur?
 (1) = 75 cm (2) > 75 cm
(1) 2Acos (2) 2 A cos  
2 (3) < 75 cm (4)  75 cm
15. To make a stationary wave having node at x = 0,

(3) 2Asin (4) 2 A sin   the equation y = Acos(t + kx) is superimposed to
2 another wave of equation
9. If the length of a stretched string is shortened by (1) –Acos(kx – t) (2) –Asin(kx – t)
20% and the tension is increased by 21% then the (3) Acos(t – kx) (4) Acos(kx + t)
frequency (Let n = initial frequency)
16. The vibrations of two air column under identical
(1) Increases by 20.5% conditions are represented in the figure below. The
(2) Increases by 37.5% ratio of frequencies na : nb will be
(3) Increases by 30.5%

(4) Decreases by 37.5%
10. A tuning fork of known frequency 256 Hz makes
5 beats per second with the vibrating string of
piano when tension in the wire of piano increased
by 2% then beat frequency decreases by 2 beats (a) (b)
per seconds, the frequency of piano string before (1) 2 : 3 (2) 3 : 2
increase in tension will be
(3) 3 : 4 (4) 1 : 2
(1) 251 Hz (2) 256 Hz
17. An observer is moving with speed v0 towards a
(3) 261 Hz (4) 253 Hz stationary source emitting a sound wave of
11. In standing wave, all particles between two nodes wavelength . The change in wavelength detected
passes through mean position by the observer is (v = speed of sound)
(1) At the same time with same velocities v v 0

(1) v (2)
(2) At the same time with different velocities 0 v
(3) At the different time with different velocities v 02

(3) (4) Zero
v
(4) At the different time with same velocities
18. Two sound sources of frequency 360 Hz each,
12. There are three sources of sound of equal intensity one moving toward observer, while second moving
with frequency 200 Hz, 201 Hz and 202 Hz away from observer with same speed 5.5 m/s, then
respectively, if all sounded simultaneously, then number of beats produced per second is
beat frequency heard by listener is (v = 330 m/s)
(1) 2 (2) 3 (1) 2 (2) 18
(3) 1 (4) 4 (3) 12 (4) 25
NEET Waves 65
19. Which of the following is not a wave equation? 25. The successive frequencies of standing waves
setup in an organ pipe are 150 Hz, 225 Hz, 300
(1) y = Asinkxsint
Hz, then frequency of 10th harmonics is
  
(2) y  A sin  t – x  (1) 1500 Hz (2) 750 Hz
a b 
(3) 450 Hz (4) 600 Hz
(3) y = Acosk(vt2 – x2)
26. Two open organ pipe of length L1 and L2 (L2 > L1)
(4) y = Acos(2t – 2kx)
produces x beats/second, then speed of sound in
20. A wave travelling in a stretched string is given by organ pipe is
y = Asin(kx –t). The ratio of maximum velocity of
particle with wave velocity is  L  L1   LL 
(1) 2 x  2  (2) 2 x  1 2 
 L1L2   L1  L2 
A
(1) A (2)
k  LL   LL 
(3) 2 x  1 2  (4) x  1 2 
(3) k  L2 – L1 
 L2  L1 
(4) A k
21. The displacement of a wave pulse is given by 27. A sonometer wire is to be divided into three
10 segments having fundamental frequency in the ratio
y metre. The velocity of wave pulse
4  (4t  x )2 1 : 2 : 3, the ratio of lengths should be
is
(1) 3 : 2 : 1 (2) 4 : 3 : 1
(1) 4 m/s (2) 2.5 m/s
(3) 4 : 2 : 3 (4) 6 : 3 : 2
(3) 0.25 m/s (4) –4 m/s
28. An open organ pipe has a fundamental frequency
22. A transverse wave is travelling along a string in the 300 Hz. The frequency of first overtone of this pipe
positive x-axis, then identify the points which have is the same as the first overtone of closed organ
negative particle velocity. pipe, the length of closed organ pipe is
(velocity of sound = 330 m/s)
y
(1) 41 cm (2) 75 cm
D
x (3) 90 cm (4) 82 cm
A C
B 29. A resonance tube is resonated with a tuning fork
of frequency 256 Hz. If the length of resonating air
(1) A (2) B column are 32 cm and 100 cm, the end correction
is
(3) C (4) D
(1) 20 cm (2) 2 cm
23. The reference intensity of sound at a point is
(3) 0.2 cm (4) 1 cm
10–12 W/m2, then intensity of sound of 80 dB is
30. A listener moves toward stationary source with
(1) 10–8 W/m2 (2) 10+4 W/m2 constant speed and crosses him, then correct
(3) 10–4 W/m2 (4) 10+8 W/m2 graph between apparent frequency (f ) with time (t)
is
24. A uniform string is clamped at its two ends. Its
mass per length is given by 20 g/m, the transverse f f
displacement wave of the string is given by
(1) (2)
 2 
y  5 sin  x  cos(20t ) m , then tension in the t t
 3 
string is f f
(1) 9 N (2) 0.9 N (3) (4)
(3) 1.8 N (4) 18 N t t

66 Waves NEET
31. A plane progressive wave of frequency 50 Hz, 36. A stretched string of length l, fixed at both ends
travelling along positive x-axis is represented as can sustain stationary waves of wavelength  then
find .
y = 5 × 10–5 sin(100t) at x = 0. Wave speed is
n2 l2
2 (1)   (2)  
300 m/s. The value of , is 2l 2n

2l
(3)   (4)  = 2ln
(1)  (2) 2 n
37. The temperature at which the speed of sound in air
2 
(3) (4) becomes double of its value at 0°C is T kelvin.
3 3
Then find value of T.
32. Two waves get superposed on a string (1) 273 K (2) 546 K
y1 = 3 sin2 (x – 10t) and y2 = 3 sin2 (x + 10t).
(3) 1092 K (4) 0 K
Then find the distance between two adjacent nodes
on the string. 38. A wave of frequency 500 Hz has velocity of
360 m/s. Find the distance between two nearest
(1) 25 cm (2) 50 cm
points 60° out of phase.
(3) 75 cm (4) 100 cm
(1) 0.6 cm (2) 12 cm
33. A wave represented by y = 2 cos(4x – t) is (3) 60 cm (4) 120 cm
superposed with another wave to form a stationary
wave such that point x = 0 is a node. Find the 39. A whistle of frequency 500 Hz tied to the end of
equation of other wave. string of length 1.2 m revolves at 40 m/s. A listener
standing large distance away in the plane of
(1) 2 sin(4x + t)
rotation of whistle hears frequencies of what range?
(2) – 2 cos(4x – t) (velocity of sound = 340 m/s)
(3) – 2 cos(4x + t) (1) 447 to 567 Hz (2) 180 to 380 Hz
(4) – 2 sin(4x – t) (3) 568 to 880 Hz (4) 220 to 384 Hz
34. Which of the following represents loudness versus 40. v1 and v2 are velocities of sound waves at same
intensity of sound graph? temperature in two monoatomic gases of densities
1 1
1 and 2 respectively. If  = then ratio of
2 4
velocities v1 and v2 will be
L L
(1) 1 : 2 (2) 4 : 1
(1) (2)
(3) 2 : 1 (4) 1 : 4
I I 41. For a particular tube, there are four of six harmonic
frequencies below 1000 Hz are 300 Hz, 600 Hz,
750 Hz and 900 Hz. Find the frequencies missing
from list
L L
(1) 100, 200 Hz (2) 150, 400 Hz
(3) (4)
(3) 150, 450 Hz (4) 450, 800 Hz
I I
42. A string is rigidly tied at two ends and its equation
35. A metal wire of linear mass density of 9.8 g/m is of vibration is given by y = cos 2t sin 2x. Then
stretched with tension of 10 kg weight between two the length of string cannot be
rigid supports 1 m apart. The fundamental
frequency of the wire is 5
(1) 1 m (2) m
(1) 25 Hz (2) 50 Hz 2
(3) 100 Hz (4) 200 Hz (3) 5 m (4) 2m
NEET Waves 67
43. The superposing waves are represented by 3. The fundamental frequency in an open organ pipe
following equations is equal to the third harmonic of a closed organ
y1 = 5sin 2(10t – 0.1x) pipe. If the length of the closed organ pipe is
20 cm, the length of the open organ pipe is
y2 = 10sin 2(10t – 0.1x)
[NEET-2018]
Imax (1) 13.2 cm (2) 8 cm
find I
min (3) 16 cm (4) 12.5 cm
16 9 4. Two cars moving in opposite directions approach
(1) (2) each other with speed of 22 m/s and 16.5 m/s
9 1
respectively. The driver of the first car blows a horn
4 25 having a frequency 400 Hz. The frequency heard by
(3) (4)
9 9 the driver of the second car is [velocity of sound
44. Three waves of equal frequency having amplitudes 340 m/s] [NEET-2017]
10 mm, 4 mm and 7 mm arrive at a given point (1) 350 Hz (2) 361 Hz

with successive phase difference of . The (3) 411 Hz (4) 448 Hz
2
amplitude of resulting wave, is 5. The two nearest harmonics of a tube closed at one
end and open at other end are 220 Hz and 260 Hz.
(1) 7 mm (2) 6 mm
What is the fundamental frequency of the system?
(3) 5 mm (4) 4 mm [NEET-2017]
45. A standing sound wave in a pipe has five (1) 10 Hz (2) 20 Hz
displacement nodes and five antinodes. The
(3) 30 Hz (4) 40 Hz
harmonic number of vibrations, is
6. The second overtone of an open organ pipe has the
(1) 3 (2) 4
same frequency as the first overtone of a closed
(3) 5 (4) 9 pipe L metre long. The length of the open pipe will
be [NEET(Phase-2)-2016]
SECTION - C (1) L (2) 2L
Previous Years Questions L
(3) (4) 4L
1. A tuning fork with frequency 800 Hz produces 2
resonance in a resonance column tube with upper 7. Three sound waves of equal amplitudes have
end open and lower end closed by water surface. frequencies (n – 1), n, (n + 1). They superimpose
Successive resonance are observed at lengths to give beats. The number of beats produced per
9.75 cm, 31.25 cm and 52.75 cm. The speed of second will be [NEET(Phase-2)-2016]
sound in air is [NEET-2019 (Odisha)]
(1) 1
(1) 172 m/s (2) 500 m/s
(2) 4
(3) 156 m/s (4) 344 m/s
(3) 3
2. A tuning fork is used to produce resonance in a
(4) 2
glass tube. The length of the air column in this tube
can be adjusted by a variable piston. At room 8. A siren emitting a sound of frequency 800 Hz
temperature of 27ºC two successive resonances moves away from an observer towards a cliff at a
are produced at 20 cm and 73 cm of column speed of 15 ms–1. Then, the frequency of sound
length. If the frequency of the tuning fork is that the observer hears in the echo reflected from
320 Hz, the velocity of sound in air at 27ºC is the cliff is (Take velocity of sound in air =
330 ms–1) [NEET-2016]
[NEET-2018]
(1) 885 Hz
(1) 330 m/s
(2) 339 m/s (2) 765 Hz
(3) 300 m/s (3) 800 Hz
(4) 350 m/s (4) 838 Hz

68 Waves NEET
9. An air column, closed at one end and open at the 13. The fundamental frequency of a closed organ pipe
other, resonates with a tuning fork when the of length 20 cm is equal to the second overtone of
smallest length of the column is 50 cm. The next an organ pipe open at both the ends. The length
larger length of the column resonating with the of organ pipe open at both the ends is
same tuning fork is [NEET-2016] [AIPMT-2015]
(1) 200 cm (2) 66.7 cm (1) 140 cm
(3) 100 cm (4) 150 cm (2) 80 cm
10. A uniform rope of length L and mass m1 hangs (3) 100 cm
vertically from a rigid support. A block of mass m2
is attached to the free end of the rope. A (4) 120 cm
transverse pulse of wavelength 1 is produced at 14. If n1, n2 and n3 are the fundamental frequencies of
the lower end of the rope. The wavelength of the three segments into which a string is divided, then
pulse when it reaches the top of the rope is 2. the original fundamental frequency n of the string
The ratio 2/1 is [NEET-2016] is given by [AIPMT-2014]
m1  m2 m1 1 1 1 1
(1) (2) (1)   
m1 m2 n n1 n2 n3
m1  m2 m2 1 1 1 1
(3) (4) (2)   
m2 m1 n n1 n2 n3
11. A string is stretched between fixed points

separated by 75.0 cm. It is observed to have (3) n  n1  n2  n3
resonant frequencies of 420 Hz and 315 Hz. There
(4) n = n1 + n2 + n3
are no other resonant frequencies between these
two. The lowest resonant frequency for this string 15. The number of possible natural oscillations of air
is [Re-AIPMT-2015] column in a pipe closed at one end of length 85 cm
whose frequencies lie below 1250 Hz are (velocity
(1) 105 Hz of sound = 340 ms–1) [AIPMT-2014]
(2) 155 Hz (1) 4 (2) 5
(3) 205 Hz (3) 7 (4) 6
(4) 10.5 Hz 16. A speeding motorcyclist sees traffic jam ahead of
12. A source of sound S emitting waves of frequency him. He slows down to 36 km/hour. He finds that
100 Hz and an observer O are located at some traffic has eased and a car moving ahead of him at
distance from each other. The source is moving 18 km/hour is honking at a frequency of 1392 Hz.
with a speed of 19.4 m s–1 at an angle of 60° with If the speed of sound is 343 m/s, the frequency of
the source observer line as shown in the figure. The the honk as heard by him will be [AIPMT-2014]
observer is at rest. The apparent frequency (1) 1332 Hz (2) 1372 Hz
observed by the observer (velocity of sound in air
(3) 1412 Hz (4) 1454 Hz
330 ms–1), is [Re-AIPMT-2015]
VS 17. If we study the vibration of a pipe open at both ends,
then the following statement is not true:
[NEET-2013]
(1) Odd harmonics of the fundamental frequency
60° will be generated
S O
(2) All harmonics of he fundamental frequency will
(1) 97 Hz be generated
(2) 100 Hz (3) Pressure change will be maximum at both
ends
(3) 103 Hz
(4) Open end will be antinode
(4) 106 Hz
NEET Waves 69
18. A source of unknown frequency gives 4 beats/s, 22. The equation of a simple harmonic wave is given by
when sounded with a source of known frequency 
250 Hz. The second harmonic of the source of y = 3sin (50t – x), where x and y are in metres
2
unknown frequency gives five beats per second, and t is in seconds. The ratio of maximum particle
when sounded with a source of frequency 513 Hz. velocity to the wave velocity is
The unknown frequency is [NEET-2013]
(1) 246 Hz
(1) 2 
(2) 240 Hz
3
(3) 260 Hz (2) 
2
(4) 254 Hz
(3) 3 
19. A wave travelling in the positive x-direction having
displacement along y-direction as 1 m, wavelength 2
(4) 
1 3
2m and frequency of Hz is represented by
 23. A train moving at a speed of 220 ms–1 towards a
[NEET-2013] stationary object, emits a sound of frequency
1000 Hz. Some of the sound reaching the object
(1) y = sin(2x – 2t) gets reflected back to the train as echo.
(2) y = sin(10x – 20t) The frequency of the echo as detected by the driver
of the train is: (Speed of sound in air is 330 ms–1)
(3) y = sin(2x + 2t)
(4) y = sin(x – 2t) [AIPMT (Mains)-2012]
20. Two sources of sound placed close to each other, (1) 3500 Hz
are emitting progressive waves given by (2) 4000 Hz
y1 = 4 sin600t and y2 = 5 sin 608t. An observer
located near these two sources of sound will hear (3) 5000 Hz
[AIPMT (Prelims)-2012] (4) 3000 Hz

(1) 8 beats per second with intensity ratio 81 : 1 24. Two waves are represented by the equations
between waxing and waning
y1= a sin (t + kx + 0.57) m and
(2) 4 beats per second with intensity ratio 81 : 1
y2 = a cos (t + kx) m
between waxing and waning
(3) 4 beats per second with intensity ratio 25 : 16 where x is in meter and t in sec. The phase
between waxing and waning difference between them is
(4) 8 beats per second with intensity ratio 25 : 16 [AIPMT (Prelims)-2011]

between waxing and waning (1) 0.57 radian
21. When a string is divided into three segments of (2) 1.0 radian
length l1, l2 and l3, the fundamental frequencies of
these three segments are v1, v2 and v3 respectively. (3) 1.25 radian
The original fundamental frequency (v) of the string (4) 1.57 radian
25. Sound waves travel at 350 m/s through a warm air
1 1 1 1 and at 3500 m/s through brass. The wavelength of
(1) v  v  v  v
1 2 3 a 700 Hz acoustic wave as it enters brass from
warm air [AIPMT (Prelims)-2011]
1 1 1 1
(2)    (1) Decreases by a factor 20
v v1 v2 v3
(2) Decreases by a factor 10
(3) v  v1  v 2  v 3
(3) Increases by a factor 20
(4) v = v1 + v2 + v3 (4) Increases by a factor 10
70 Waves NEET
26. Two identical piano wires, kept under the same 31. A wave in a string has an amplitude of 2 cm. The
tension T have a fundamental frequency of 600 Hz. wave travels in the positive direction of x axis with
The fractional increase in the tension of one of the a speed of 128 m/s and it is noted that 5 complete
wires which will lead to occurrence of 6 beats/s when waves fit in 4 m length of the string. The equation
both the wires oscillate together would be describing the wave is [AIPMT (Prelims)-2009]
[AIPMT (Mains)-2011] (1) y = (0.02) m sin (15.7x – 2010t)
(1) 0.04 (2) 0.01 (2) y = (0.02) m sin (15.7x + 2010t)
(3) 0.02 (4) 0.03 (3) y = (0.02) m sin (7.85x – 1005t)
27. A transverse wave is represented by (4) y = (0.02) m sin (7.85x + 1005t)

y = A sin(t – kx). For what value of the wavelength 32. The wave described by y = 0.25 sin(10x – 2t),
is the wave velocity equal to the maximum particle where x and y are in meters and t in seconds, is a
velocity? [AIPMT (Prelims)-2010] wave travelling along the [AIPMT (Prelims)-2008]
A (1) –x-direction with amplitude 0.25 m and

(1) (2)  A wavelength  = 0.2 m
2
(2) –x-direction with frequency 1 Hz
(3) 2 A (4) A
(3) +x-direction with frequency  Hz and
28. A tuning fork of frequency 512 Hz makes 4 beats wavelength  = 0.2 m
per second with the vibrating string of a piano. The
beat frequency decreases to 2 beats per sec when (4) +x-direction with frequency 1 Hz and
the tension in the piano string is slightly increased. wavelength  = 0.2 m
The frequency of the piano string before increasing 33. Two points are located at a distance of 10 m and
the tension was [AIPMT (Prelims)-2010] 15 m from the source of oscillation. The period of
oscillation is 0.05 sec and the velocity of the wave
(1) 508 Hz
is 300 m/sec. What is the phase difference between
(2) 510 Hz the oscillations of two points?
(3) 514 Hz [AIPMT (Prelims)-2008]
(4) 516 Hz  
(1) (2)
29. Each of the two strings of length 51.6 cm and 6 3
49.1 cm are tensioned separately by 20 N force. 2
Mass per unit length of both the strings is same (3) (4) 
3
and equal to 1 g/m. When both strings vibrate
simultaneously the number of beats is 34. Two sound waves with wavelengths 5 m and 5.5 m
respectively, each propagate in a gas with velocity
[AIPMT (Prelims)-2009] 330 m/s. We expect the following number of beats
(1) 7 per second [AIPMT (Prelims)-2006]
(2) 8 (1) 12 (2) 0
(3) 3 (3) 1 (4) 6
(4) 5 35. A transverse wave propagating along x-axis is
30. The driver of a car travelling with speed 30 m/sec 
represented by: y(x, t) = 8 sin(0.5x – 4t – )
towards a hill sounds a horn of frequency 600 Hz. 4
If the velocity of sound in air is 330 m/s, the
where x is in metres and t is in seconds. The speed
frequency of reflected sound as heard by driver is
of the wave is [AIPMT (Prelims)-2006]
(1) 4m/s
(1) 555.5 Hz
(2) 0.5 m/s
(2) 720 Hz

(3) 500 Hz (3) m/s
4
(4) 550 Hz (4) 8 m/s
NEET Waves 71
36. The time of reverberation of a room-A is one second. 42. Two sound waves having a phase difference of 60°
What will be the time (in seconds) of reverberation have path difference of
of a room, having all the dimensions double of those
of room-A? [AIPMT (Prelims)-2006]  
(1) (2)
(1) 2 (2) 4 6 3
1 
(3) (4) 1 (3) 2 (4)
2 2
37. Which one of the following statements is true?
43. A transverse wave is represented by the equation
2
y  y 0 sin (vt  x ) . For what value of  the
(1) Both light and sound waves in air are 
transverse
maximum particle velocity is equal to two times
(2) The sound waves in air are longitudinal while the wave velocity?
the light waves are transverse
y 0 y 0
(3) Both light and sound waves in air are (1)   (2)  
longitudinal 2 3
(4) Both light and sound waves can travel in (3)  = 2y0 (4)  = y0
vacuum 44. A wave travelling in positive x-direction with
38. A point source emits sound equally in all directions A = 0.2 m, velocity = 360 m/s and  = 60 m,
in a non-absorbing medium. Two points P and Q are then correct expression for the wave is
at distance of 2 m and 3 m respectively from the
  x 
source. The ratio of the intensities of the waves at (1) y  0.2 sin2 6t  60 
P and Q is [AIPMT (Prelims)-2005]   
(1) 9 : 4 (2) 2 : 3
  x 
(3) 3 : 2 (4) 4 : 9 (2) y  0.2 sin 6t  60 
  
39. Two vibrating tuning forks produce progressive waves
given by y1 = 4sin 500t and y2 = 2sin 506t.   x 
Number of beats produced per minute is (3) y  0.2 sin2 6t  60 
  
  x 
(1) 360 (2) 180 (4) y  0.2 sin 6t  60 
  
(3) 3 (4) 60
Questions asked Prior to Medical Ent. Exams. 2005 45. The phase difference between two waves,
represented by y1 = 10–6sin[100t + (x/50) + 0.5] m
40. Two waves are represented by the equations and y2 = 10–6cos[100t + (x/50] m, where x is
y1 = asin(t + kx + 0.57)m and expressed in metre and t is expressed in second,
is approximately
y2 = acos(t + kx) m,
(1) 1.07 radian (2) 2.07 radian
where x is in metre and t in second. The phase
difference between them is (3) 0.5 radian (4) 1.5 radian
(1) 0.57 radian (2) 1.0 radian 46. A wave of frequency 100 Hz travels along a string
towards its fixed end. When this wave travels
(3) 1.25 radian (4) 1.57 radian
back, after reflection, a node is formed at a
41. A hospital uses an ultrasonic scanner to locate distance of 10 cm from the fixed end. The speed
tumours in a tissue. The operating frequency of of the wave (incident and reflected) is
the scanner is 4.2 MHz. The speed of sound in a
(1) 20 m/s
tissue is 1.7 km/s. The wavelength of sound in
the tissue is close to (2) 40 m/s
(1) 4 × 10–3 m (2) 8 × 10–3 m (3) 5 m/s
(3) 4 × 10–4 m (4) 8 × 10–4 m (4) 10 m/s
72 Waves NEET
47. A standing wave having 3 nodes and 2 antinodes 53. An observer moves towards a stationary source of
is formed between two atoms having a distance sound with a speed 1/5th of the speed of sound.
1.21 Å between them. The wavelength of the The wavelength and frequency of the source
standing wave is emitted are  and f respectively. The apparent
(1) 6.05 Å (2) 2.42 Å frequency and wavelength recorded by the
observer are respectively
(3) 1.21 Å (4) 3.63 Å
(1) 1.2f, 1.2  (2) 1.2f, 
48. Two waves of wavelengths 50 cm and 51 cm
produced 12 beats per second. The velocity of (3) f, 1.2  (4) 0.8f, 0.8 
sound is
54. A car is moving towards a high cliff. The driver
(1) 340 m/s (2) 331 m/s sounds a horn of frequency f. The reflected sound
(3) 306 m/s (4) 360 m/s heard by the driver has frequency 2f if v the
velocity of sound, then the velocity of the car, in
49. Two stationary sources each emit waves of the same velocity units, will be
wavelength . An observer moves from one source
to another with velocity u. Then number of beats v v
heard by him (1) (2)
2 3
2u u v v
(1) (2)
  (3) (4)
4 2
u 55. The equation of a simple harmonic wave is given
(3) u (4)
2

by y  3 sin (50t  x ) , where x and y are in
50. Which one of the following statements is true? 2
(1) The sound waves in air are longitudinal while metres and t is in seconds. The ratio of maximum
the light waves are transverse particle velocity to the wave velocity is
(2) Both light and sound waves in air are (1) 2 
longitudinal 3
(2) 
(3) Both light and sound waves can travel in 2
vaccum (3) 3 
(4) Both light and sound waves in air are 2
transverse (4) 
3
51. A vehicle, with a horn of frequency n is moving
with a velocity of 30 m/s in a direction SECTION - D
perpendicular to the straight line joining the
NEET Booster Questions
observer and the vehicle. The observer perceives
the sound to have a frequency n + n 1. Then 1. A 90 cm long string has fundamental frequency
(if the sound velocity in air is 300 m/s) 124 Hz. Where should it be brushed to produce a
fundamental frequency of 186 Hz?
(1) n1 = 0.1 n (2) n1 = 0
(1) 60 cm from one end (2) 30 cm from one end
(3) n1 = 10 n (4) n1 = – 0.1 n
(3) 40 cm from one end (4) Both (1) & (2)
52. A whistle revolves in a circle with angular speed
 = 20 rad/s using a string of length 50 cm. If the 2. If two waves represented by y = asin(t – kx) and
frequency of sound from the whistle is 385 Hz, y = acos(t – kx) are superimposed, then
then what is the minimum frequency heard by an amplitude of resultant wave is
observer who is far away from the centre (1) a
(vsound = 340 m/s)?
(1) 385 Hz
(2) 2a
(2) 374 Hz (3) 2a
(3) 394 Hz a
(4)
(4) 333 Hz 2
NEET Waves 73
3. The equation y = Acos2(t – kx) represents a 8. If the fundamental frequency of a closed organ pipe
wave motion with is equal to the first overtone of an open organ pipe
then the ratio of lengths of closed organ pipe to
 open organ pipe is
(1) Amplitude A, frequency
2 (1) 1 : 4 (2) 4 : 1
A  (3) 2 : 1 (4) 1 : 2
(2) Amplitude , frequency
2  9. A car is going towards a vertical wall at a speed
of 10 m/s sounding a horn of frequency 500 Hz. A
 person standing on the ground behind the car
(3) Amplitude 2A, frequency listens the sound of two frequencies. The
4
difference of frequencies is nearly (Take speed of
(4) Does not represent a wave sound = 330 m/s)
4. A standing wave is produced in a closed pipe. If  (1) 20 Hz (2) 40 Hz
be the wavelength of wave in pipe, then length of
(3) 50 Hz (4) 30 Hz
pipe is
10. If a fast moving loud object passes past a person
 at a speed of 220 m/s then % change in the
(1) Odd Integral multiple of
4 frequency of sound heard by the person is (Speed
of sound = 330 m/s)

(2) Integral multiple of (1) 20% (2) 30%
2
(3) Integral multiple of  (3) 50% (4) 80%
11. A tuning fork A sounded with another fork B of
 frequency 256 Hz produces 4 beats/s. Now A is
(4) Integral multiple of
3 loaded with little wax and beat frequency increases
to 6 beat/s. Frequency of unloaded fork A is
5. A sound wave of wavelength 80 cm travels in air.
(1) 252 Hz (2) 256 Hz
1 3 2
If pressure amplitude at a point is  10 N/m (3) 260 Hz (4) 262 Hz
2
then maximum displacement of particle is 12. The fundamental frequency of an open organ pipe
is 300 Hz then which of the following is wrong?
(Bulk modulus = 1.4 × 105 N/m2)
(1) First overtone is 600 Hz
(1) 2.2 Å (2) 4.4 Å
(2) Fourth overtone is 1500 Hz
(3) 1.4 Å (4) 8.8 Å (3) Second overtone is 900 Hz
6. A tuning fork A of frequency 380 Hz gives 4 beats (4) First overtone is 450 Hz
in 2 seconds when sounded with another tuning
fork B. Then frequency of B 13. A source of sound 'S' is moving along line QP by
making an angle 60° with SO where O is the
(1) Is 382 Hz position of stationary observer. If speed of source
is 19.4 m/s and observer receives the frequency of
(2) Is 378 Hz
103 Hz then real frequency of source is nearly
(3) May be 382 or 378 Hz (Take speed of sound = 330 m/s)
(4) May be 384 or 376 Hz P
7. If the sound level at a point is increased by 30 dB,

then intensity becomes (at that point)
60º
(1) 100 times
S O
(2) 1000 times
Q
(3) 10 times (1) 200 Hz (2) 50 Hz
(4) 10–3 times (3) 75 Hz (4) 100 Hz
74 Waves NEET
14. A and B are two hills at a distance 480 m apart. A 21. The longitudinal wave can be observed in
person standing between the hills, claps his hands
(1) Elastic media (2) Inelastic media
and hears two echoes at the end of 1 second and
2 seconds. The velocity of sound in air (in m/s) is (3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these
(1) 320 m/s (2) 160 m/s 22. A transverse pulse is shown in the figure, on which
(3) 330 m/s (4) 340 m/s 4 points are shown at any instant. Which of the
following points are in a state to move upwards in
15. A progressive wave having frequency 500 Hz has a subsequent time?
velocity of 360 m/s. The distance between two
nearest points which are 120° out of phase is
(1) 24 cm (2) 20 cm
(3) 16 cm (4) 36 cm
B
A
16. Fifty one tuning forks are arranged such that each C D
fork produces 4 beats per second with its
preceding fork. If the frequency of the last fork is
three times that of the first fork then frequency of (1) A, B
the first fork is
(2) A, D
(1) 50 Hz (2) 60 Hz
(3) B, C
(3) 200 Hz (4) 100 Hz
(4) B, D
17. A harmonic wave is represented by
23. A rope of length L and mass M hangs freely from
 x the ceiling. If the time taken by a transverse wave
y ( x, t )  A sin2  t   . If the maximum
  to travel from the bottom to the top of the rope is
T, then time to cover first half length is
particle velocity is three times the wave velocity,
then the wavelength  of the wave is (1) T
A 2A  2  1
(1) (2)  
(2) T 
3 3
 2 
(3) 3A (4) A T
(3)
18. Velocity of sound in a gas in which two waves of 2
wavelength 50 cm and 50.5 cm produce 6 beats
per second is T
(4)
2
(1) 280 m/s (2) 303 m/s
24. A uniform rope having some mass hangs vertically
(3) 410 m/s (4) 520 m/s from a rigid support. A transverse wave pulse is
19. Velocity of sound in steel of Young’s modulus produced at the lower end. The speed (u) of the
2 × 10 11 N/m 2 and density 8000 kg/m 3 is wave pulse varies with height (h) from the lower
approximately end as
u u
(1) 500 m/s (2) 50 m/s
(3) 5 m/s (4) 5 km/s
20. In a resonance tube experiment, the resonance are (1) (2)
heard when the length of air column are 24 cm and
h h
74 cm respectively. The end correction is
(1) 0.5 cm u u
(2) 1 cm
(3) 1.5 cm (3) (4)
(4) 2 cm h h
NEET Waves 75
25. A transverse pulse generated at the bottom of a 30. A sinusoidal wave of frequency 500 Hz has a
uniform rope of length L, travels in upward speed of 350 m/s. The phase difference between
direction. The time taken by it to travel the full two displacements at a certain point at times 1 ms
length of rope will be apart is
L 2L  
(1) (2) (1) (2)
2g g 4 2
3
L 4L (3)  (4)
(3) (4) 2
g g 31. The equation of travelling wave is
26. In a sinusoidal wave, the time required for a x

particular point to move from maximum y  a sin 2 pt  
 5
displacement to zero displacement is 0.170 s.
The frequency of wave is Then the ratio of maximum particle velocity to wave
velocity is
(1) 0.73 Hz (2) 0.36 Hz
(3) 1.47 Hz (4) 2.94 Hz a
(1) (2) 2 5a
5
27. Figure shows a snapshot for a travelling sine wave
along a string. Four elemental portions a, b, c and 2a 2a
(3) (4)
d are indicated on the string. The elemental portion 5 5
which has maximum potential energy is/are
32. A travelling wave pulse is given by
d
c 4
a y
x 2 2
3 x  48t  24 xt  2
b where x and y are in metre and t is in second. The
(1) a (2) b velocity of wave is
(3) c (4) b and d (1) 4 m/s (2) 2 m/s

28. Which one of the following represents a wave? (3) 8 m/s (4) 12 m/s
(1) y = A sin (t – kx) 33. The ratio of maximum particle velocity to wave
(2) y = A cos2 (at – bx + c) + A sin2(at – bx + c) velocity is [where symbols have their usual
meanings]
(3) y = A sin kx
(1) k A (2) A
(4) y = A sin t
29. Which of the following functions for y can never 
(3) k (4)
represent a travelling wave? k
(a) (x2 – vt)2 34. What is the phase difference between the
 ( x  vt )  displacement wave and pressure wave in sound
(b) log x  wave?
 0 

 ( x vt ) 
2 (1) Zero (2)
  2
x
(c) e 0 

(3)  (4)
1 4
(d) 35. The ratio of intensities between two coherent sound
x  vt
sources is 4 : 1. The difference of loudness in dB
(1) Only (a) between maximum and minimum intensities when
(2) (b) & (c) they interfere in the space is
(3) (c) & (d) (1) 20 log10(3) (2) 10 log10(2)

(4) Only (c) (3) 20 log10(2) (4) 10 log10(3)
76 Waves NEET
36. The intensity of sound reduces by 20% on passing 42. Two waves have equations x1 = a sin (t + 1)
through a glass slab. If sound of intensity I is made and x2 = a sin (t + 2) If in the resultant wave the
to cross through two such slabs, then the intensity frequency and amplitude remain equal to
of emergent sound will be amplitude of superimposing waves, the phase
difference between them is
(1) 0.36 I (2) 0.64 I
(3) 0.4 I (4) 0.8 I 
(1)
6
37. Two periodic waves of intensities I1 and I2 pass
2
through a region at the same time in the same (2)
3
direction. The sum of the maximum and minimum
intensities is 
(3)
4
(1) 2(I1 + I2) (2) I1 + I2

(4)
(3) ( I1  I2 )2 (4) ( I1  I2 )2 3
43. The standing wave in a medium is expressed as
38. A stationary wave is represented by y = A sin
y = 0.2 sin (0.8x) cos (3000t) m. The distance
(100t) cos (0.01x), where y and A are in
between any two consecutive points of minimum
millimetres, t is in second and x is in metre. The
or maximum displacement is
velocity of the constituent wave is
(1) 104 m/s  
(2) Not derivable (1) m (2) m
2 4
(3) 1 m/s (4) 102 m/s

39. The length of a sonometer wire AB is 110 cm. (3) m (4) None of these
6
Where should the two bridges be placed from A
to divide the wire in 3 segments whose 44. The equation of a standing wave in a string fixed
fundamental frequencies are in the ratio of at both ends is given as
1 : 2 : 3? y = 2 A sin kx cos t
(1) 60 cm and 90 cm The amplitude and frequency of a particle vibrating
(2) 30 cm and 60 cm at the mid of an antinode and a node are
respectively
(3) 30 cm and 90 cm
 A 
(4) 40 cm and 80 cm (1) A, (2) ,
2 2 
2
40. Standing waves are produced in 10 m long
stretched string fixed at both ends. If the string  
vibrates in 5 segments and wave velocity is (3) A, (4) 2 A,
 2
20 m/s, the frequency is
45. Two sinusoidal waves given below are superposed
(1) 5 Hz
 
(2) 10 Hz y1 = A sin  kx  t  
 6
(3) 2 Hz
 
(4) 4 Hz y2 = A sin  kx  t  
 6
41. If the tension and diameter of a sonometer wire of
The equation of resultant wave is
fundamental frequency n is doubled and density
is halved then its fundamental frequency will A
become (1) y  sin (kx – t)
3
n
(1) (2) y = A 3 sin (kx – t)
4
(2) 2n  
(3) y = A 3 sin  kx  t  
(3) n  3
n A  
(4)
2 (4) y = sin  kx  t  
3  3
NEET Waves 77
46. For a particular resonance tube, following are four 52. A uniform string of fundamental frequency of
of the six harmonics below 1000 Hz; vibration f is divided into two segments by means
of a bridge. If f1 and f2 are fundamental frequencies
300, 600, 750 and 900 Hz
of these segments then
The two missing harmonics are (1) f1f2 = f[f1 + f2] (2) 2f = f1 + f2
(1) 75, 150 (2) 150, 450
(3) f  f1  f2 (4) f1 f2  2f
(3) 400, 800 (4) 250, 400
53. Two sound waves of intensity 2 W/m 2 and
47. A second harmonic has to be generated in a string 3 W/m2 meet at a point to produce a resultant
of length l stretched between two rigid supports. intensity 5 W/m2. The phase difference between
The points where the string has to be plucked and two waves is
touched are respectively

(1)  (2)
l l l 3l 4
(1) , (2) ,
4 2 4 4 
(3) (4) Zero
l l l 3l 2
(3) , (4) ,
2 2 2 4 54. The two waves of the same frequency moving in
the same direction give rise to
48. Two waves are represented by
(1) Beats (2) Interference
y1 = 5 sin 2(75t – 0.25x)
(3) Stationary waves (4) None of these
y2 = 10 sin 2(150t – 0.50x)
55. The string of a violin emits a note of 205 Hz at its
I1 correct tension. The string is tightened slightly and
The intensity ratio of the two waves is then it produces six beats in two seconds with a
I2
tuning fork of frequency 205 Hz. The frequency of
(1) 1 : 2 (2) 1 : 4 the note emitted by the taut string is
(3) 1 : 8 (4) 1 : 16 (1) 211 Hz (2) 199 Hz
(3) 208 Hz (4) 202 Hz
49. In a closed organ pipe of length 105 cm, standing
waves are set up corresponding to third overtone. 56. When two tuning forks (fork 1 and fork 2) are
What distance from the closed end, a pressure sounded together, 4 beats per second are heard.
node is formed? Now some tape is attached on the prong of the fork
2. When the tuning forks are sounded again, 6
(1) 5 cm (2) 15 cm beats per second are heard. If the frequency of
(3) 25 cm (4) 30 cm fork 1 is 200 Hz, then what was the original
frequency of fork 2?
50. A uniform string resonates with a tuning fork, at a
(1) 204 Hz (2) 196 Hz
maximum tension of 32 N. If it is divided into two
segments by placing a wedge at a distance one- (3) 202 Hz (4) 200 Hz
fourth of length from one end, then to resonance 57. The driver of a car travelling with speed 30 m/s
with same frequency the maximum value of tension towards a hill sounds a horn of frequency 600 Hz.
for string will be If the velocity of sound in air is 330 m/s, the
(1) 2 N (2) 4 N frequency of reflected sound as heard by driver is
(3) 8 N (4) 16 N (1) 500 Hz (2) 550 Hz
51. If in a stationary wave the amplitude corresponding (3) 555.5 Hz (4) 720 Hz
to antinode is 4 cm, then the amplitude 58. A train moving at a speed of 220 ms–1 towards a
corresponding to a particle of medium located stationary object, emits a sound of frequency
exactly midway between a node and an antinode is 1000 Hz. Some of the sound reaching the object
(1) 2 cm gets reflected back to the train as echo. The
frequency of the echo as detected by the driver of
(2) 2 2 cm the train is (Speed of sound in air is 330 ms–1)
(3) 2 cm (1) 3500 Hz (2) 4000 Hz
(4) 1.5 cm (3) 5000 Hz (4) 3000 Hz
78 Waves NEET
59. A source of frequency  gives 5 beats/second 63. A man is standing on a railway platform listening
when sounded with a source of frequency 200 Hz. to the whistle of an engine that passes the man at
The second harmonic of frequency 2 of source constant speed without stopping. If the engine
gives 10 beats/second when sounded with a passes the man at time instant t0, how does the
source of frequency 420 Hz. The value of  is frequency f of the whistle as heard by the man
changes with time?
(1) 205 Hz (2) 195 Hz
(3) 200 Hz (4) 210 Hz f f
60. A vibrating tuning fork is moving slowly and
uniformly in a horizontal circular path of radius
8 m. The shortest distance of an observer in same (1) (2)
plane from the tuning fork is 9 m. The distance t t
t0 t0
between the tuning fork and observer at the instant
when apparent frequency becomes maximum is
f f
(1) 9 m (2) 25 m
(3) 15 m (4) 353 m

(3) (4)
61. The frequency changes by 10% as a sound source t t
t0 t0
approaches a stationary observer with constant
speed Vs. What would be percentage change in
64. A whistle ‘S’ of frequency f revolves in a circle of
the frequency as the source recedes the observer
radius R at a constant speed v. What is the ratio
with same speed (Vs < V)?
of maximum and minimum frequency detected by
(1) 10.5% (2) 8.5% a detector D at rest at a distance 2R from the
(3) 4.5% (4) 1.5% center of circle as shown in figure? (take ‘c’ as
speed of sound)
62. A train blowing its whistle moves with constant
speed on a straight track towards observer and
then crosses him. If the ratio of difference between D S
the actual and apparent frequencies be 3 : 2 in the R
two cases, then the speed of train is [v is speed 2R
of sound]
c v  c v 
2v v (1)   (2) 2 
(1) (2) c v  c v 
3 5
v 3v (c  v )
(3) (4) (3) 2 (4)
3 2 c 2


Aakash Modules 03

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aakash Modules 03

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aakash Modules 03

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter 11

Thermal Properties of Matter

z Heat Transfer MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE

0°C 273 K 32°F

Measured temperature – LFP

C 0 K  273 F  32 Measured temprature – LFP

Solution : Let that temperature be x, then

So, at – 40°C, Fahrenheit reading is also – 40°F.

Solution : Upper fixed point = –60 °X

x  ( 180.5) 350  273.15

The pressure and temperature are related as Pt = P0(1 + t )

then the resistance and temperature are related as

These thermometers can measure temperature from – 182°C to 1200°C.

4. Thermoelectric Thermometers : It is based on Seebeck effect. In this thermometer two distinct

7. Magnetic Thermometers : Temperatures below 1 K are measured by ‘magnetic thermometers’ which

(i) Temperature coefficient of resistance of platinum,

(ii) Value of temperature t.

Solution : (i) Temperature coefficient of resistance is given by

R100  R0 4.71  3.70

(ii) For temperature t, we have

5.29  3.70 1.59

z Thermal Expansion is of Three Types

If a body has length L0 at temperature T0, then its length L at a temperature T = T0 + T is

The unit of  is K–1 or (C°)–1.

The value of  is of the order of 10–6 to 10–5 per kelvin

z Relation Between Linear Expansion, Superficial expansion and Volume Expansion

z Apparent Expansion of Liquids

There are two coefficients of expansion in case of liquids.

z Change of Density with Temperature

L = L0T = (1.2 × 10–5 K–1) (50 m) (15 K) = 9.0 × 10–3 m = 9.0 mm

L = L0 + L = 50.000 m + 0.009 m = 50.009 m

Thus, the length at 35°C is 50.009 m.

Vmercury – Vglass = 2.7 cm3

(3) 15°C (4) 12.5°C

Value of c depends on material of body and temperature range.

The SI unit of C is J/mol K.

Note : (1) Specific heat of water is

sw  4186 J kg1K 1  1 calg1 (C)1 .

Fig.: Graph of temperature vs time for a specimen

Q4 = msswt = 10 g × 1 cal/g°C × 100 = 1000 cal

Heat supplied to steam

Maximum heat absorbed by ice 5400 cal

 m.SA (30°C – 26°C) = m.SB(26°C – 20°C)

Fig.: Phase diagram for water

(3) – 5°C (4) 0°C

(1) 1:2 (2) 1:8

(3) 1:4 (4) 2:1

(3) 1600 gm (4) 150 gm

13. Work done in converting 1g of ice at –10°C into steam at 100°C is

(1) 3.04 kJ (2) 6.05 kJ

(3) 0.721 kJ (4) 0.616 kJ

(1) 540 cal/g (2) 536 cal/g

(3) 270 cal/g (4) 480 cal/g

(1) 20 gm of water (2) 20 gm of ice

(3) 10 gm ice and 10 gm of water (4) 5 gm ice and 15 gm water

(1) 0.96°C (2) 1.02°C

(3) 1.16°C (4) 0.23°C

(1) 4800 W (2) 336 W

(3) 1.33 W (4) 0.75 W

(6) Combination of resistance (6) Combination of heat resistance